diff --git a/package.json b/package.json
index 7323cd6..60a2745 100644
--- a/package.json
+++ b/package.json
@@ -39,7 +39,8 @@
     "index.js",
     "yieldable-stringify.js",
     "yieldable-parser.js",
-    "test/"
+    "test/",
+    "utils/"
   ],
   "devDependencies": {
     "eslint": "^6.6.0",
diff --git a/test/big-json-with-string.txt b/test/big-json-with-string.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b945867
--- /dev/null
+++ b/test/big-json-with-string.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+{"titles":["É9075840612JËÍ "],"text":"Your operator's manuals \n\nDigital in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the contents of the operator's manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item \"Vehicle\"). Start with the quick guide or deepen your knowledge with practical tips. \n\nVehicle document wallet in the vehicle Here you can find information on operation, service work and the warranty for your vehicle in printed form. \n\nSprinter \n\nOperating Instructions \n\n9075840612 \n\nOrder no. T907 0455 13 Part no. 907 584 06 12 Edition A-2023-2 \n\nFront passenger air bag warning \n\nAir bag warning sticker for USA and Canada \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled \n\nIf the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child \n\nrestraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. \n\nObserve the chapter entitled \"Children in the vehi- cle\". \n\nPublication details \n\nInternet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mercedes-benz.com https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) \n\nDocumentation team ©Daimler VANS USA, LLC ©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla- ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. \n\nVehicle manufacturer Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany \n\nVehicle dealers Daimler VANS USA, LLC  One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mbsprinterusa.com Customer Assistance Center: 1-877-762-8267 Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, ON M4G 4C9 https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Customer Relations Department: 1-800-387-0100 Daimler VANS USA, LLC and Mercedes-Benz Can- ada, Inc. are Mercedes‑Benz Group AG enterpri- ses. Canada only: \"Authorized Sprinter Dealer\" is defined as an authorized Mercedes-Benz Sprinter Dealer. \n\nAs at 06.04.22 \n\nWelcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Man- ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehi- cle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan, follow the instructions and warning noti- ces in these Operating Instructions. Disregarding them may result in damage to the vehicle or envi- ronment or in injuries to people. Vehicle damage caused by failure to observe the instructions is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary, depending on the follow- ing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability \n\nMercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in: R Design R Equipment R Technical features \n\nYour vehicle may therefore differ, in individual cases, from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Service booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements \n\nAlways keep these documents in the vehicle. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Daimler VANS USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Mercedes-Benz Group AG Company \n\n9075840612 \n\n9075840612 \n\n2 \n\nContents \n\nSymbols ....................................................... 4 \n\nAt a glance ................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................ 6 Instrument cluster ........................................ 8 Overhead control panel .............................. 11 Door control panel ..................................... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns .................... 18 \n\nDigital Operator's Manual ........................... 20 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ..... 20 \n\nGeneral notes ............................................ 21 Environmental protection ........................... 21 Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts .................... 21 Information about Attachments, bodies, installations and conversions ...................... 22 Operator's Manual ..................................... 23 Service and vehicle operation ..................... 23 Operating safety ......................................... 24 Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries ....................... 25 Diagnostics connection .............................. 25 Notes on changes to the engine output ...... 26 Qualified specialist workshop ..................... 26 Vehicle registration .................................... 26 Correct use of the vehicle .......................... 27 Multi Purpose vehicle ................................. 27 Notes for persons with electronic medi- cal aids ...................................................... 27 Information on problems with your vehi- cle ............................................................. 27 \"Reporting safety defects\" .......................... 28 Limited Warranty ........................................ 28 QR codes for rescue card ........................... 28 Data storage .............................................. 28 Copyright ................................................... 32 \n\nElectric sliding door .................................... 54 Rear-end doors .......................................... 57 Partition sliding door .................................. 59 Electrical step ............................................ 60 Side window .............................................. 61 Anti-theft prevention .................................. 64 \n\nSeats and stowage ..................................... 67 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi- tion ............................................................ 67 Notes on grab handles ............................... 67 Seats ......................................................... 67 Steering wheel ........................................... 79 Stowage areas ........................................... 80 Information about the bottle holder ............ 80 Cup holders ............................................... 80 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 81 Sockets ...................................................... 82 Wirelessly charging the mobile phone and coupling with the exterior antenna ....... 83 Installing or removing the floor mats ........... 84 \n\nLight and vision .......................................... 85 Lighting ...................................................... 85 Adjusting the interior lighting ...................... 88 Changing bulbs .......................................... 91 Windshield wipers ...................................... 95 Mirrors ....................................................... 97 \n\nClimate control ........................................ 100 Overview of climate control systems ......... 100 Operating climate control systems ........... 102 Operating air vents ................................... 105 Auxiliary heating ....................................... 106 Operating cargo compartment ventila- tion .......................................................... 108 \n\nOccupant safety ......................................... 33 Restraint system ........................................ 33 Seat belts .................................................. 34 Airbags ...................................................... 37 Automatic measures after an accident ........ 39 Safely transporting children in the vehi- cle ............................................................. 39 Notes on pets in the vehicle ....................... 46 \n\nDriving and parking .................................. 109 Driving ..................................................... 109 Battery main switch ................................. 123 Automatic transmission ............................ 124 All-wheel drive .......................................... 126 Electronic level control ............................. 128 Refueling .................................................. 133 Parking .................................................... 140 Driving and driving safety systems ............ 144 Work mode .............................................. 169 Trailer operation ....................................... 170 \n\nOpening and closing ................................... 47 SmartKey ................................................... 47 Doors ........................................................ 49 Sliding door ............................................... 53 \n\nContents \n\n3 \n\nInstrument cluster and on-board com- puter ........................................................ 176 Overview of the instrument cluster ........... 176 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel ....................................................... 177 Operating the on-board computer ............ 177 Overview of the instrument cluster dis- play ......................................................... 178 Adjusting the instrument lighting .............. 179 Menus and submenus .............................. 179 \n\nMercedes me ........................................... 184 Mercedes me calls ................................... 184 Mercedes me connect ............................. 186 Mercedes me and apps ............................ 187 \n\nWheels and tires ...................................... 243 Information on noise or unusual driving characteristics ......................................... 243 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires .................................................. 243 Information on driving with summer tires ......................................................... 243 Information on M+S tires .......................... 243 Notes on snow chains .............................. 244 Tire pressure ............................................ 245 Loading the vehicle .................................. 252 Tire labeling ............................................. 254 Information on definitions (tires and loading) .................................................... 257 Changing a wheel ..................................... 259 Spare wheel ............................................. 266 \n\nMBUX multimedia system ......................... 189 Overview and operation ............................ 189 System settings ....................................... 192 Navigation ................................................ 195 Telephone ................................................ 200 Overview of Smartphone Integration ......... 203 Web browser overview ............................. 203 Radio and media ...................................... 204 Sound settings ......................................... 207 \n\nTransporting ............................................. 208 Notes on loading guidelines ...................... 208 Notes on distributing the load within the vehicle ..................................................... 209 Securing loads ......................................... 209 Carrier systems ........................................ 211 Placing a load on the wheel arch .............. 211 \n\nTechnical data .......................................... 271 Information on the technical data ............. 271 On-board electronics ................................ 271 Regulatory radio identifications and notes ....................................................... 272 Vehicle identification plate, vehicle iden- tification number (VIN) and engine num- ber ........................................................... 272 Operating fluids and capacities ................ 274 Vehicle data ............................................. 283 Trailer hitch .............................................. 283 Cargo tie-down points and carrier sys- tems ........................................................ 287 \n\nDisplay messages and warning and indi- cator lamps .............................................. 289 Display messages ..................................... 289 Indicator and warning lamps ..................... 310 \n\nMaintenance and care .............................. 213 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ....... 213 Engine compartment ................................ 213 Cleaning and care .................................... 221 \n\nIndex ....................................................... 320 \n\nBreakdown assistance .............................. 227 Emergency ............................................... 227 Emergency Call System ............................ 227 Flat tire .................................................... 229 Battery ..................................................... 229 Towing or tow-starting .............................. 235 Electrical fuses ......................................... 239 Vehicle tool kit ......................................... 240 Hydraulic jack .......................................... 241 \n\n4 \n\nSymbols \n\nIn these Operating Instructions, you will find the following symbols: \n\n& WARNING Danger due to failure to observe the warning notices \n\nWarning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental \n\ndamage due to failure to observe environ- mental notes \n\nEnvironmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi- ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. \n\n* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage \n\nNotes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. \n\n% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. \n\n# (/  page) Display Messages on the display 4 Highest menu level to be selected in the \n\nInstructions Further information on a topic \n\nmultimedia/audio system \n\n* \n\n5 Corresponding submenus to be selected in the multimedia/audio system Indicates a cause \n\n6 \n\nAt a glance – Cockpit \n\n1 Combination switch \n\nF MBUX multimedia system con- \n\nTurn signals \n\n→ \n\n86 \n\ntrol elements \n\nHigh beam \n\n→ \n\n86 \n\nG 12 V socket \n\n→ \n\n82 \n\nwindshield wiper \n\n→ \n\n95 \n\nH 230 V socket \n\nrear passenger compartment window wiper \n\n→ \n\n96 \n\nI Opens and closes the electric \n\nsliding door \n\n2 Steering-wheel buttons \n\n→ \n\n177 \n\nJ Hazard warning lights \n\n3 DIRECT SELECT lever \n\n→ \n\n124 \n\nK Vehicles with KEYLESS START: \n\nkey slot \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n54 \n\n86 \n\n111 \n\n4 Inside rearview mirror \n\nDigital inside rearview mirror \n\n5 Overhead control panel \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n99 \n\n98 \n\n88 \n\nL USB port \n\nM Start/stop button \n\nN Right-hand switch panel \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n80 \n\n110 \n\n6 Device installation frame, e.g. for mounting a tachograph or the switch clock for the station- ary heater \n\n7 Sun visor \n\n8 Front passenger window lifter \n\n9 Central locking system \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n61 \n\n50 \n\nActivates/deactivates all-wheel drive \n\nEngages/disengages LOW RANGE \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\nActivates/deactivates DSR Raises/lowers the vehicle level → \n\n→ \n\n127 \n\n128 \n\n151 \n\n130 \n\nA Stowage compartment cover \n\n→ \n\n241 \n\nEngages/disengages power take-off \n\nB Front passenger stowage com- \n\npartment or tachograph housing \n\nActivates/deactivates working speed control (ADR) \n\n→ \n\n170 \n\nC Cup holders \n\nD Climate control system \n\n→ \n\n100 \n\nActivates/deactivates cargo compartment ventilation \n\n→ \n\n108 \n\nE MBUX multimedia system dis- \n\nplay \n\nActivates/deactivates the bea- con \n\nO steering wheel paddle shifters \n\nP Opens the hood \n\nQ Left-hand switch panel \n\nSets the working speed (ADR) \n\nR Light switch \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\nAt a glance – Cockpit \n\n126 \n\nHeadlamp range adjuster \n\n213 S Adjusts the driver's seat \n\n→ \n\nT Seat heating \n\n→ \n\n170 \n\nCentral locking system \n\n→ \n\nU Driver’s window lifter \n\n→ \n\n7 \n\n67 \n\n78 \n\n50 \n\n61 \n\n8 \n\nAt a glance – Instrument cluster \n\nInstrument cluster with display (color) \n\nE Electric power steering malfunc- \n\ntion Ð \n\n→ \n\n317 \n\n1 Speedometer \n\n2÷ ESP® \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n176 \n\n311 \n\nF Coolant temperature indicator and ? coolant too hot \n\n3· Distance warning \n\n→ \n\n317 \n\nG! Electric parking brake \n\n(yellow) \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n317 \n\n311 \n\n4ü Seat belt not fastened \n\n→ \n\n316 \n\nH6 Restraint system \n\n→ \n\n33 \n\n5#! Turn signal lights \n\n→ \n\n86 \n\nIK High beam \n\n→ \n\n86 \n\n6 Instrument cluster display \n\n→ \n\n176 \n\nJL Low beam \n\n→ \n\n85 \n\n7h Tire pressure loss warning \n\nlamp \n\n8; Engine diagnosis \n\n9% Preglow and malfunction \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\n317 \n\nKT Standing lights \n\nL Fuel level indicator and Ë fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location indicator \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n85 \n\n317 \n\nin preglow system \n\nMN Fog light \n\n→ \n\n85 \n\nA Tachometer \n\n→ \n\n176 \n\nNR Rear fog light \n\n→ \n\n85 \n\nBF and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) Parking brake applied (red) \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\nOJ Brakes (yellow) \n\nP! ABS malfunction \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\n311 \n\nC$ and J (USA) or J \n\n(Canada) Brakes (red) \n\n→ \n\n311 Qå ESP® deactivated \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\nD# Electrical malfunction \n\n→ \n\n317 \n\nAt a glance – Instrument cluster \n\n9 \n\nInstrument cluster with display (black and white), with steering- wheel buttons \n\n1 Speedometer \n\n2÷ ESP® \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n176 \n\n311 \n\ne (white) Lane Keeping Assist active and ready to issue warnings and e (red) Lane Keeping Assist issuing a warn- ing \n\n7; Engine diagnosis \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n168 \n\n317 \n\n3· Distance warning \n\n→ \n\n317 \n\n8% Preglow and malfunction \n\n4ü Seat belt not fastened \n\n→ \n\n316 \n\nin preglow system \n\n5#! Turn signal lights \n\n→ \n\n86 9 Tachometer \n\n6 Display of indicator and warning \n\nlamps \n\n1 At least one door is not completely closed \n\nAF and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) Parking brake applied (red) \n\nB$ and J (USA) or J \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\n311 \n\nh Tire pressure loss \n\nÐ Electric power steering malfunction \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\n317 \n\n(Canada) Brakes (red) \n\nC6 Reserve fuel \n\nD DEF supply low \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n317 \n\n135 \n\n# Electrical malfunction \n\n→ \n\n317 E+ LOW RANGE active \n\n→ \n\n128 \n\nG SOS emergency call sys- tem (Mercedes-Benz emergency call system) \n\nF! Electric parking brake \n\n(yellow) \n\nG Instrument cluster display \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\n176 \n\næ Active Brake Assist switched off \n\né ATTENTION ASSIST switched off \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n149 \n\n164 \n\nH6 Restraint system \n\nIK High beam \n\nJL Low beam \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n33 \n\n86 \n\n85 \n\n· Lane Keeping Assist inac- tive \n\n_ Highbeam Assist \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n169 KT Standing lights \n\n87 \n\nLN Fog light \n\nMR Rear fog light \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n85 \n\n85 \n\n85 \n\n10 \n\nAt a glance – Instrument cluster \n\nNJ Brakes (yellow) \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\nO! ABS malfunction \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\nPå ESP® deactivated \n\n→ \n\n311 \n\nAt a glance – Overhead control panel \n\n11 \n\nVersion 1 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors \n\n7w Switches the rear interior \n\n2 Breakdown assistance call but- ton (Mercedes me connect) \n\nlighting on/off \n\n8p Switches the right-hand \n\n3Ì Activates/deactivates \n\ninterior protection \n\n→ \n\n65 \n\nreading light on/off \n\n9Ë Switches tow-away alarm → \n\n65 \n\nActivates/deactivates the bus interior lighting \n\non/off \n\nA Eyeglasses compartment \n\n4p Switches the left-hand \n\nBG SOS emergency call sys- \n\nreading light on/off \n\ntem \n\n5| Switches automatic light \n\nC ATA indicator lamp \n\ncontrol on/off \n\n6c Switches the front interior \n\nlighting on/off \n\n12 \n\nAt a glance – Overhead control panel \n\nVersion 2 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors \n\n5w Switches the rear interior \n\n2p Switches the left-hand \n\nlighting on/off \n\nreading light on/off \n\n6p Switches the right-hand \n\n3| Switches automatic light \n\nreading light on/off \n\ncontrol on/off \n\n4c Switches the front interior \n\nlighting on/off \n\nAt a glance – Overhead control panel \n\n13 \n\nVersion 3 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors \n\n3c Switches the front interior → \n\n65 \n\n2| Switches automatic light \n\nlighting on/off \n\ncontrol on/off \n\n4w Switches the rear interior \n\nlighting on/off \n\n14 \n\nAt a glance – Overhead control panel \n\nVersion 4 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors \n\n2 Switches the interior lighting \n\non/off \n\nAt a glance – Overhead control panel \n\n15 \n\nOverhead control panel for vehicles with bus equipment 1 Sun visors \n\n6c Switches the front interior \n\n2F Breakdown assistance \n\nlighting on/off \n\ncall button \n\n7w Switches the rear interior \n\n→ \n\n88 \n\n3i Activates/deactivates the \n\n→ \n\n88 \n\nlighting on/off \n\nbus function \n\n8p Switches the right-hand \n\n4p Switches the left-hand \n\nreading light on/off \n\nreading light on/off \n\n9 Switches reading lights in the \n\n→ \n\n88 \n\n5| Switches automatic light \n\n→ \n\n88 \n\npassenger compartment on/off \n\ncontrol on/off \n\nA Eyeglasses compartment \n\n16 \n\nAt a glance – Door control panel \n\nDoor control panel of vehicles with electrically adjustable seat 1 Adjusting the outside mirrors → 97 \n\n2 To unlock/lock the central lock- \n\n→ \n\n51 \n\n5 Operating the memory function → → \n\n6 Opens the door \n\n72 \n\n50 \n\ning system \n\n3 Switching seat heating on/off \n\n→ \n\n78 \n\n7 To open/close the right-hand \n\nside window \n\n→ \n\n61 \n\n4 To adjust the front seats elec- \n\n→ \n\n70 8 To open/close the left-hand \n\n→ \n\n61 \n\ntronically \n\nside window \n\nAt a glance – Door control panel \n\n17 \n\nDoor control panel of vehicles without electrically adjustable seat 1 Adjusting the outside mirrors → 97 \n\n5 To open/close the right-hand \n\n→ \n\n61 \n\n2 Switching seat heating on/off \n\n→ \n\n78 \n\nside window \n\n3 To unlock/lock the central lock- \n\ning system \n\n→ \n\n51 \n\n6 To open/close the left-hand \n\nside window \n\n→ \n\n61 \n\n4 Opens the door \n\n→ \n\n50 \n\n18 \n\nAt a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns \n\n1 Checking and refilling operating \n\n→ \n\n274 \n\n5 Hazard warning light system \n\n→ \n\n86 \n\nfluids \n\n6 B-pillar, driver's side at the level \n\nStarting assistance \n\n→ \n\n230 \n\nof the door handle, \n\n2 Buttons for the SOS emergency call system and breakdown assistance \n\n→ \n\n228 \n\nQR code for accessing the res- cue card \n\n7 Disconnecting the starter bat- \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n28 \n\n233 \n\n3 Warning lamp \n\n→ \n\n227 \n\ntery \n\nSafety vest \n\n→ \n\n227 \n\n8 Tire pressure table at the base \n\nof the driver's seat \n\nFirst-aid kit (soft sided) \n\n4 Vehicles with rear wheel drive: hydraulic jack and tire-change tool kit \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n227 \n\n241 \n\n9 Fuel filler flap with information \n\nlabel on fuel type \n\nA Flat tire \n\n→ \n\n→ \n\n133 \n\n229 \n\nAt a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns \n\n19 \n\nExample: spare wheel \n\n→ \n\n266 \n\n20 \n\nDigital Operator's Manual \n\nCalling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 Info  5 Operator's Manual  5 Õ \n\nAdditional options for calling up the Digital Opera- tor's Manual # Direct access: pressing and holding down an entry in the tab bar of the multimedia system opens the corresponding content in the Digital Operator's Manual. \n\nThe Digital Operator's Manual describe the func- tion and operation of the vehicle and the multime- dia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the \n\nDigital Operator's Manual: \n\n# Voice Control System: call up the Digital Oper- ator's Manual via the voice control system. \n\nR Search: here you can use keywords to quickly \n\nlocate answers to questions concerning vehicle operation. \n\nThe Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. \n\nR Quick start: Here you will find the first steps \n\nfor setting up the driver's seat. \n\nR Tips: provides you with information on specific \n\neveryday situations for your vehicle. \n\nR Bookmarks: you can access your saved per- \n\nsonal bookmarks here. \n\nR Language: you can set the language for the \n\nDigital Operator's Manual here. \n\n1 Back 2 Add bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Content area 5 Menu \n\nSome sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, suchas warning notes, can be expanded and col- lapsed. \n\nGeneral notes \n\n21 \n\nEnvironmental protection \n\nMercedes-Benz Genuine Parts \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental \n\ndamage due to not using recycled recondi- tioned components \n\nThe pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the vehicle's operation. Operate the vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to make a contribution to environmental protection. To do this, observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and your personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressures are \n\nalways correct. \n\n# Do not transport any unnecessary weight (e.g. a roof luggage rack which is no lon- ger required). \n\n# Observe the service intervals. \n\nA regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection. \n\n# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nPersonal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal \n\nwhen starting the engine. \n\n# Do not warm up the vehicle while station- \n\nary. \n\n# Drive carefully and maintain a sufficient \n\ndistance to other vehicles. \n\nMercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled recondi- tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. \n\n* NOTE Effectiveness of the restraint sys- tems impaired due to the installation of accessories, repairs or welding \n\nAir bags and emergency tensioning devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol- lowing areas in your vehicle: R Door frames R Roof frame R Doors R Door pillars R Sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console \n\n# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and \n\nbraking. \n\n# Do not install any accessories such as \n\naudio systems in these areas. \n\n# Shift gears in good time and use each \n\ngear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. \n\n# Do not carry out any repairs or welding. # Have accessories retrofitted at a quali- \n\nfied specialist workshop. \n\n# Switch off the vehicle in stationary traf- \n\nfic. \n\n# Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Pay \n\nattention to the ECO display for a fuel- efficient driving style. \n\nEnvironmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regula- tions serve to protect the environment and should be followed carefully. \n\nIf you use parts, tires, wheels or safety-relevant accessories which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz , the operating safety of the vehi- cle may be jeopardized. Safety-critical systems such as the brake system may malfunction. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts or parts of equal quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessory parts that are approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz tests original parts, conversion parts and accessory parts that have been approved for your vehicle model for reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, we are unable to assess other parts. We therefore accept no responsibility for the use of \n\n22 \n\nGeneral notes \n\nsuch parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing center. In some other countries, certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes- Benz Genuine Parts satisfy these requirements. Make sure that all parts are suitable for your vehi- cle. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) and the engine number when ordering Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (/ page 272). \n\nInformation about Attachments, bodies, installa- tions and conversions \n\nNotes on body/equipment mounting directives For safety reasons, have bodies produced and installed in accordance with the valid Mercedes- Benz body/equipment mounting directives. These body/equipment mounting directives ensure that the chassis and body form one unit and that the greatest possible level of operational and driving safety is achieved. Both vehicle manufacturers and body manufactur- ers must always ensure that the products they manufacture come into circulation only in a safe state and do not pose any risks to people. Other- wise, there may be consequences under civil, crim- inal or public law. All manufacturers are responsi- ble for the products that they have manufactured. Manufacturers of attachments, bodies, installa- tions and conversions must guarantee compliance with Directive 2001/95/EC on general product safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends the following proce- dure for safety reasons: R Do not make any other changes to the vehicle. R Obtain approval from the dealer named on the inside title page in the event of deviations from the approved body/equipment mounting direc- tives. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury in \n\nthe event of improper conversions or changes to the vehicle \n\nConversions or changes to the vehicle can pre- vent systems or components from functioning properly and/or jeopardize the vehicle's operational safety. # Always have conversions or changes to the vehicle carried out at a qualified workshop. \n\nIf you intend to make changes to your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you contact the dealer. They will give you all the infor- mation you need. There may be a charge for this service. If body manufacturers and dealers make modifica- tions that affect the final inspection of the engine, vehicle or equipment, they must accept sole responsibility for the vehicle. This also applies to marking and documenting the vehicle parts affec- ted by the changes that they make. You are responsible for ensuring and providing evi- dence that the following conditions are met: R The vehicle complies with all relevant stand- ards and regulations that are affected by the modification. \n\nR The modified vehicle still meets the vehicle \n\nsafety standards and emissions laws and regu- lations. \n\nR The modification does not impair the safety of \n\nthe vehicle. \n\nMercedes-Benz is not responsible for the final inspection, product liability or warranty claims resulting from modification. This applies to the fol- lowing points: R The modified components or systems R The resultant violation of emissions laws and regulations or vehicle safety standards \n\nR All consequences resulting from the modified, \n\nAcceptance tests performed by public test bodies or official approvals do not rule out safety risks. Observe the information about Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (/ page 21). % You can obtain further information at a quali- \n\nfied specialist workshop. \n\nless safe or even faulty vehicle \n\nMercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility as final manufacturer or for the resultant product liability. \n\nNotes on the radiator Even seemingly minor changes to the vehicle, such as attaching a radiator grille in winter, are not per- mitted. Do not cover the radiator. Do not use any thermal mats, insect protection covers, etc. \n\nGeneral notes \n\n23 \n\nOtherwise, the values of the vehicle's diagnostic system will be distorted. Some of these values are prescribed by law and must be correct at all times. \n\nService and vehicle operation \n\nWarranty \n\nNotes on the cargo floor The factory equips the vehicle with a wooden or plastic cargo floor; this is an integral part of the vehicle structure. If you have the cargo floor removed, the vehicle body may be damaged. Load securing will then be impaired and the maximum loading capacity of the tie-down points will no lon- ger be guaranteed. Therefore, do not have the cargo floor removed. \n\nNotes on the partition Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as commercial vehicles (N1, N2) do not fulfill ISO 27956, which describes the equipment for properly securing a load in delivery vehicles. If the vehicle is used to transport goods, retrofitting the partition is strongly recommended, as properly securing the load in vehicles without a partition will always be complex. \n\nOperator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models, as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that was available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. There- fore, your vehicle's equipment may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equip- ment and operation, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approxi- mate and are subject to a certain tolerance. The Operator's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. \n\nNote on vehicles that are equipped by body manu- facturers Always observe the body manufacturer's operating instructions. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers. \n\nThe Limited Warranty for your vehicle is in accord- ance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the terms of the following warranty terms and conditions: R New Vehicle Limited Warranty R Exhaust System Warranty R Emission Systems Warranty R California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Ver- mont Emission Control System Warranty R State Warranty Enforcement Laws (\"Lemon \n\nLaws\") \n\nReplacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories Warran- ties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. % Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace- ment. The new Service and Warranty Informa- tion booklet will be posted to you. \n\nVehicle operation outside the USA or Canada \n\nWhen you are traveling abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R service points or replacement parts may not \n\nbe available immediately. \n\nR unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic con- verter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter. R the fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. \n\nCertain Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through the European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or write to one of the fol- lowing addresses: In the USA: Daimler VANS USA, LLC European Delivery Department \n\n24 \n\nGeneral notes \n\nOne Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 \n\nMaintenance information \n\nYour customer service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation booklet. \n\nOperating safety \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal- \n\nfunctions or system failures \n\nInformation on Roadside Assistance \n\nRoadside Assistance offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-877-762-8267 (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Roadside Assistance brochure (USA) or the \"Roadside Assis- tance\" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- ment wallet. \n\nInformation on changing address or owner \n\nIn the event of a change of address, please send us the \"Notification of Address Change\" in the Service and Warranty Information booklet or sim- ply call the Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-877-762-8267 or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This way, if necessary, we can reach you in a timely fashion. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the \"Notice of Purchase of Used Car\" in the Service and Warranty Information book- let or call the Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-877-762-8267 or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. \n\nIf you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs car- ried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified special- ist workshop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic com- ponent parts \n\nModification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com- ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec- \n\ntronic component parts or their software. \n\n# You should have all work on electrical \n\nand electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nObserve the \"Vehicle electronics\" section in \"Tech- nical data\". \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire caused by flamma- ble material on hot exhaust system com- ponents \n\nRisk of danger due to substances that are hazard- ous to health \n\nIn compliance with Proposition 65 (\"Prop65\"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: \n\nFlammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on an unpaved road or off- road, check the vehicle underside regu- larly. \n\nGeneral notes \n\n25 \n\n# In particular, remove trapped plant parts \n\nor other flammable material. \n\n# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components \n\nIn the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a \n\nhigh curb or an unpaved road \n\nR The vehicle is driven too fast over an obsta- cle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pothole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or \n\nsuspension components \n\nIn situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flamma- ble materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nor # If driving safety is impaired while continu- ing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nDeclarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries \n\nvehicle installed radio components \n\ndevices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.\" Kanada: \"The wireless devices of this vehicle com- ply with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device\". USA: \"Wireless charging system for mobile devices (Model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): This Device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules.\" The name and address of the responsible party is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany \n\nDiagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore be connected only in a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- \n\nnecting devices to the diagnostics connec- tion \n\nIf you connect devices to the diagnostics con- nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you use and connect only products approved by an authorized Mercedes- Benz Service Center. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects \n\nin the driver's footwell \n\nUSA: \"The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These \n\nObjects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. \n\n26 \n\nGeneral notes \n\n# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. \n\n# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. \n\n# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. \n\n* NOTE Battery discharging from using devi- ces connected to the diagnostics connec- tion \n\nUsing devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the bat- tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis- tance. \n\nNotes on changes to the engine output \n\nOutput increases can cause: R Change the emission values. R Lead to malfunctions. R Result in consequential damage. \n\nThe operating safety of the vehicle is not guaran- teed in all situations. Any tampering with the engine management in order to increase the engine output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and other warranty entitlements. If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of any alter- ations to the vehicle's engine output. If you do not inform the buyer, this may constitute a punishable offense under national legislation. \n\nQualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Always have the following work on the vehicle car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and con- \n\nversions \n\nR Work on electronic component parts \n\nMercedes-Benzrecommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz for this purpose. \n\nThe connection and use of another device on the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components \n\nPlease refer to the warranty terms and conditions regarding this. In addition, connecting equipment to the diagnos- tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. \n\nVehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centers to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it Mercedes-Benz has your registration data. In the following cases your vehicle may not be reg- istered to you yet: R you did not purchase your vehicle at an author- \n\nised specialist dealer. \n\nR your vehicle has not yet been inspected at an \n\nauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\nGeneral notes \n\n27 \n\nIt is advisable to register your vehicle with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this, for example, at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\nIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi- cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts. \n\nCorrect use of the vehicle If you remove warning stickers, you or others may fail to recognize the dangers. Leave warning stick- ers in position. Observe the following information in particular when operating the vehicle: R Safety notes in these operating instructions R Technical data for the vehicle R Traffic rules and regulations R Laws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety \n\nstandards \n\nMulti Purpose vehicle \n\nNotes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully devel- oping vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic med- ical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components built into the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of your vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multi- media and sound system or also in the seating area, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident when the cen- \n\nter of gravity is too high \n\nThe vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. # Always adapt your speed and driving \n\nstyle to the vehicle's driving characteris- tics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions. \n\nObserve the notes and warnings of the manufac- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle sys- tems and/or maintaining a distance from the com- ponents. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system \n\nIf you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nUtility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Unsafe operation of the vehicle can result in an accident or rollover, as well as serious or even fatal injuries. \n\nInformation on problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehi- cle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- \n\n28 \n\nGeneral notes \n\nter again or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA: Daimler VANS USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 \n\nsafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in indi- vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; may also go to the following websites for more informa- tion: R English: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: www.tc.gc.ca/rappels \n\nLimited Warranty \n\n\"Reporting safety defects\" \n\nUSA only: The following text is published as required of man- ufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National High- way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- tion to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes\\-Benz USA, LLC. Für Übersetzung: To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590, USA. You can find more information on vehicle safety at: https://www.safercar.gov \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions. \n\nDamage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. Such damage is not covered by either the Limi- ted Warranty or the new or used-vehicle war- ranty. # Observe the instructions in these operat- ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as regarding possible vehicle damage. \n\nQR codes for rescue card The QR code stickers are affixed to the B-pillar on the driver's and front passenger side. In the event of an accident, emergency services can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code \n\nCanada only: The following text is published as required of man- ufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a \n\nData storage \n\nData processing in the vehicle \n\nElectronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi- cle. Control units process data which they receive from vehicle sensors, forexample, generate them- selves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of \n\nGeneral notes \n\n29 \n\nyour vehicle, some assist you when driving, suchas driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa- tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Addi- tional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally. \n\nPersonal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle iden- tification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, forexample, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibili- ties for using data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, suchas the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under cer- tain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, forexample, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. \n\nLegal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern- mental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. Forexample, this may be the case during the inves- tigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorized to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the air bag control unit, forexample. \n\nOperational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, forexample: R Vehicle status information suchas the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, \n\nnumber of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display \n\nR Ambient conditions, suchas temperature, rain \n\nsensor or distance sensor \n\nGenerally, these are volatile data and will not be stored beyond the period of operation but will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units, forexample vehicle keys, often contain data memories. Their use permits the temporary or per- manent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the technical equipment, the follow- ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components, \n\nsuchas fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or malfunctions in important sys- tem components, suchas lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situations, suchas air bag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems \n\nR Information on events in which the vehicle is \n\ndamaged \n\nIn certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been temporary. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a mal- function, forexample. If you use services suchas repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service net- work employees, suchas workshops and manufac- turers or third parties, suchas breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of indi- vidual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga- tions and quality improvement. To that end, this data – in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other malfunctions – may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. In addition, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, forexam- ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to \n\n30 \n\nGeneral notes \n\nexamine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. \n\nConvenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, forexample: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, suchas interior lighting \n\nDepending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, forexample: R Multimedia data, suchas music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia sys- tem \n\ninformation, please consult the Operator's Manual for the vehicle or the infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smart- phone apps, suchas navigation or music player apps. There is no additional interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active access to vehicle data. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operat- ing system of your smartphone. \n\nOnline services \n\nWireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, data can be exchanged between your vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a smart- phone. Online functions can be used via this wire- less network connection. This includes online serv- ices and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers. \n\nR Address book data for use in an integrated \n\nhands-free system or an integrated navigation system \n\nR Entered navigation destinations R Data on the use of Internet services \n\nThese data for convenience and infotainment func- tions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have con- nected to the vehicle, suchas a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. These data are transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accord- ance with the settings that you have selected. \n\nSmartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound can be output via the multimedia system. Simultane- ously, specific items of information are transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, thisincludes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more \n\nManufacturer's own services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufac- turer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Opera- tor's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal identification data may be used to provide online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, suchas an emergency call system. \n\nServices of third parties If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that pro- vider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. \n\nGeneral notes \n\n31 \n\nFor this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data. \n\nOnboard Logic Unit (OLU) The Onboard Logic Unit (OLU) is available to com- mercial customers. It contains control units, including antennas for connection via wireless networks, that permit the exchange of data between your vehicle and other systems. The control units can be used in conjunc- tion with service provided by a third party. Under certaincircumstances, these services may alter the basic configuration of the vehicle and could affect the performance of certain vehicle functions. For further information about specific services, read the Operator's Manual of the third-party pro- vider. For further information about the Onboard Logic Unit, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you, yourself, do not own and are not responsi- ble for the vehicle, you may notknow the current status of the Onboard Logic Unit. For further infor- mation concerning the services which are cur- rently active, including any data which may be being processed as defined by the GDPR, please contact the person responsible for the vehicle. \n\nData protection rights \n\nDepending on the country, the equipment and functions of your vehicle, and the services and service offerings used, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the vari- ous services and service offers. There, you will also find the contact information for the manufac- turer and its data protection officer. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. \n\nEvent Data Recorders \n\nUSA only:  This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is \n\ndesigned to record data related to vehicle dynam- ics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were oper- \n\nating; \n\nR Whether or not the driver and passenger safety \n\nbelts were buckled/fastened; \n\nR How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the \n\naccelerator and/or brake pedal; and, \n\nR How fast the vehicle was traveling. \n\nThese data can help provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Daimler Vans USA, LLC (\"DVUSA\") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this infor- mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. DVUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include respon- ses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving DVUSA or its sub- sidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modify- ing or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. \n\n32 \n\nGeneral notes \n\nState laws or regulations regarding EDRs that con- flict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the fed- eral regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. \n\nCopyright \n\nInformation on free and open-source software \n\nInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data storage medium in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource. \n\nInformation on registered trademarks \n\nR Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- \n\ntooth SIG Inc. \n\nR DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks \n\nof DOLBY Laboratories. \n\nR ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade- \n\nmarks of Mercedes‑Benz Group AG. \n\nR HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen- \n\ntex Corporation. \n\nR iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks \n\nof Apple Inc. \n\nR Burmester® is a registered trademark of \n\nBurmester Audiosysteme GmbH. \n\nR Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM \n\nRadio Inc. \n\nR HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq- \n\nuity Digital Corporation. \n\nR Gracenote® is a registered trademark of \n\nGracenote, Inc. \n\nR ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. \n\nOccupant safety \n\n33 \n\nRestraint system \n\nProtection provided by the restraint system \n\nLimitations of the protection provided by the restraint system \n\nThe restraint system includes the following compo- nents: R Seat belt system R Air bags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system \n\nVehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint sys- \n\ntem. \n\nThe restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- pants are subjected. Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can pro- vide the intended level of protection. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Ten- sioning Devices and/or air bags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags are not deployed in every accident. Vehicles with a co-driver bench seat: the Emer- gency Tensioning Device on the co-driver seat is triggered whether or not the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their \n\nback against the seat backrest. \n\nR Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possi- \n\nble. \n\n# Never tamper with the wiring or any elec- tronic component parts or their software. \n\nIf it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommo- date a person with disabilities, contact an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267. \n\nRestraint system functionality \n\nWhen the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- formed, during which the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The com- ponents of the restraint system are then func- tional. \n\nRestraint system malfunction \n\nA malfunction has occurred in the restraint system in the following cases: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey. \n\nR Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for this vehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- \n\ntions in the restraint system \n\nHowever, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrat- ing the vehicle from the outside. It is also not pos- sible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying. \n\nComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as plan- ned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. \n\n34 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nFunction of the restraint system in an accident \n\n# Have a deployed air bag replaced at a \n\nHow the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R frontal impact R Rear impact R side impact R Overturning or rollover \n\nThe activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp- tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system should take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors that can be seen and measured only after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in air bag deployment, nor do they provide an indi- cation of air bag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts, such as longitudinal members, are hit, the vehicle deceleration may be high enough for this to happen. Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact1), overturning, rollover \n\nR Driver's air bag, co-driver air bag: frontal \n\nimpact \n\nqualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. \n\nFor your safety and that of your passengers, it is recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered or an air bag is deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R the bang will not generally affect your hearing. R in general, the powder released is not hazard- \n\nous to health but may cause short-term breath- ing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. \n\nAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protec- tion measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlorate, for exam- ple. \n\nSeat belts \n\nProtection provided by the seat belt \n\nAlways fasten your seat belt correctly before start- ing a journey. Only a seat belt which is worn cor- rectly can provide the intended level of protection. \n\nR Side impact air bag: side impact R Window curtain air bag: side impact, overturn- \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to \n\nincorrectly fastened seat belt \n\ning, rollover, frontal impact \n\n1) Only when the vehicle is fitted with a side impact air bag or window curtain air bag. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag \n\ncomponents \n\nThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. \n\nIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or chang- ing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. \n\nOccupant safety \n\n35 \n\nAlways observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 67). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- pant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit \n\ntightly and snugly across the body. \n\nR The seat belt must be routed across the center of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. \n\nLimitations of the protection provided by the seat belt \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an \n\nincorrect seat position \n\nThe seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning \n\nR The shoulder section of the seat belt should \n\nyour journey. \n\nnot touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. \n\nR Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter \n\ncoat. \n\n# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. \n\nR Push the lap belt down as far as possible \n\nacross your hips and pull tight with the shoul- der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. \n\nR Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- \n\nted, abrasive or fragile objects. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death when \n\nadditional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature \n\nPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi- tional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5 ft \n\nR Only one person should use each seat belt at \n\nany one time. \n\n(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys- tem. \n\nR Never secure objects with a seat belt if the \n\nseat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. \n\nThe seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature: R Co-driver seat R Rear seats \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts \n\nSeat belts cannot provide protection in the fol- lowing situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi- fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed \n\nR The seat belt buckle is damaged or \n\nextremely dirty \n\nR Modifications have been made to the \n\nActivate or deactivate the child seat safety feature of the seat belt (/ page 42). If children are traveling in the vehicle, always observe the instructions and safety notes on \"Chil- dren in the vehicle\" (/ page 40). Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 208). \n\nEmergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor \n\nSeat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as inten- ded. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, \n\n36 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nEmergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. \n\n# Make sure that the seat belts are undam- \n\naged, not worn and clean. \n\n# Always have the seat belts checked \n\nimmediately after an accident at a quali- fied specialist workshop. \n\nOnly use seat belts that are approved by the dealer specified in the publication details for your vehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death from \n\ndeployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices \n\nPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their intended protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic \n\nEmergency Tensioning Devices immedi- ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nFor your safety and that of your passengers, it is recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat \n\nbelt \n\n# Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 2 of the corre- sponding seat. \n\n# To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position. \n\n# To engage the seat belt outlet: release button 3 and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages. \n\n% Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can provide the intended level of protection. Observe the notes on fastening the seatbelt (/ page 34). \n\nIf an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt is \n\nfully retracted. \n\nFastening and adjusting seat belts \n\nIf the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. \n\n* NOTE Deployment of components of the \n\nrestraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buck- led \n\nWhen the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa- rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emer- gency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended. \n\n% Observe the notes on stowage areas \n\n(/ page 208). Information on installing a child restraint sys- tem and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the \"Children in the vehicle\" section (/ page 42). \n\nOccupant safety \n\n37 \n\nReleasing the seat belts \n\n# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. \n\nPossible protection per air bag: R Driver's air bag, co-driver air bag: head and rib- \n\ncage \n\nR Window curtain air bag: head R Side impact air bag: ribcage and pelvis \n\nFunction of the seat belt warning system for driver and co-driver \n\nThe ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instrument Display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the vehicle is switched on. A warning tone may also sound. After the vehicle is started, the seat belt warning goes out as soon as the driver's and the co-driver's seat belts are fastened. While driving, the seat belt warning lights up in the following cases: R if the vehicle's speed is higher than 15 mph \n\n(25 km/h) and the driver's or co-driver's seat belt is not fastened \n\nR if the driver or co-driver unfasten their seat belt \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled \n\nIf the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child \n\nrestraint system on a seat with an ENA- BLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. \n\nWhen installing a child restraint system on the co- driver seat, observe the vehicle-specific informa- tion (/ page 45). Also be sure to observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the co-driver seat (/ page 45). \n\nduring the journey \n\nProtection provided by the airbags \n\nAirbags \n\nOverview of air bags \n\nDepending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor- rectly fastened seat belt. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an \n\nincorrect seat position \n\n1 Driver's air bag 2 Window curtain air bag 3 Co-driver air bag 4 Side impact air bag \n\nThe installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an air bag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. \n\nIf you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protec- tive function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant \n\nwomen must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdo- men. \n\nR Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. \n\nR Observe the following information. \n\n# Always make sure that there are no \n\nobjects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. \n\n38 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nTo avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; both the driver's and co-driver seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 67). \n\nLimitations of the protection provided by air bags \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifica- \n\ntions to the cover of an airbag \n\nIf you change the cover of an airbag or attach objects, e.g. even stickers, to it, the airbag may no longer function as intended. # Never modify the cover of an airbag. # Do not attach any objects to the cover. \n\nR Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. \n\nR Always lean against the seat backrest when \n\nthe vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air- bags. \n\nThe installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 37). Objects in the deployment area of an air bag may prevent the air bag from functioning correctly. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag \n\nR Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. \n\nR If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe \n\nthe additional notes (/ page 40). \n\nR Always stow and secure objects correctly. \n\nObjects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air- bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occu- pant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects \n\nbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag. \n\nObjects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat. # Always stow and secure objects cor- \n\nrectly. \n\n# Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag. \n\nR There are no objects between the seat, door \n\nand door pillar (B-pillar). \n\nR There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessories, such as mobile navi- gation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side win- dow or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. \n\nR There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile \n\nobjects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers \n\nIf you use unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. # Only use seat covers that are approved by the sales organization responsible for your vehicle. \n\nYou can find information on the sales organization for your vehicle in the publication details for this Operator's Manual. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- \n\ntioning sensors in the door \n\nThe function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. \n\nOccupant safety \n\n39 \n\n# Never modify the doors or parts of the \n\ndoors. \n\n# Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nThe driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions: R braking more strongly than automatic braking R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with \n\nforce \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed \n\nairbag \n\nSafely transporting children in the vehicle \n\nA deployed airbag no longer offers any protec- tion. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified \n\nspecialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. \n\nHave deployed air bags replaced immediately. \n\nAlways observe when children are traveling in the vehicle \n\n% Always observe the safety notes relevant to the situation. In doing so, you will be able to identify possible risks and avoid dangers when children are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 40). \n\nAutomatic measures after an accident \n\nDepending on the type and severity of the acci- dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R automatic braking (post-collision brake) R activating the hazard warning lights R triggering an automatic emergency call \n\n(/ page 227) R switching off engine \n\nTo start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more (/ page 110). Depend- ing on the type and severity of the accident, it may possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. \n\nBe diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious con- sequences. Always be diligent and secure a child carefully before each journey. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you always observe the following notes: R Always secure the child in a child restraint sys- tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropriate \n\nto the age, weight and size of the child. \n\nR The vehicle seat must be suitable for installing \n\na child restraint system. \n\nR switching off the fuel supply R unlocking the vehicle doors R lowering the front side windows R switching on the interior lighting \n\nAccident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason Mercedes-Benz strongly advises you to install a child restraint system on a rear seat. \n\nFunction of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post-col- lision brake can minimize the severity of a further collision or even avoid it. If an accident has been detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric park- ing brake is automatically applied. \n\nThe generic term child restraint system \n\nThe generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat \n\nbelt guides \n\nThe child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. \n\n40 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nObserve laws and regulations Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. \n\nObserve standards for child restraint systems \n\nBabies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervi- cal spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. \n\nAll child restraint systems must meet the following standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards \n\n213 and 225 \n\nR Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 \n\nAlways secure a child restraint system correctly \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to \n\nincorrect installation of the child restraint system \n\nand 210.2 \n\nConfirmation that the child restraint system com- plies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. \n\nThe child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur- er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the \n\nchild restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. \n\nDetecting risks, avoiding danger \n\n# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) \n\nSecuring systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle \n\nOnly use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the ISOFIX securing rings R the seat belt system of the vehicle R the Top Tether anchorages \n\nInstalling an ISOFIX child restraint system is prefer- red. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehi- cle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 42). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides. \n\nAdvantage of a rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces back- wards. \n\nunder or behind the child restraint sys- tem. \n\n# Use child restraint systems only with the \n\noriginal cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with \n\ngenuine covers. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle \n\nIf the child restraint system is incorrectly mounted or unsecured, it may come loose. The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. Unused child restraint systems could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Always fit child restraint systems cor- \n\nrectly, even if they are transported in the vehicle unused. \n\nR Always observe the child restraint system man- ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- \n\nOccupant safety \n\n41 \n\ntions as well as the vehicle-specific informa- tion: \n\nAvoid direct sunlight \n\n- \n- \n- \n\nInstalling the ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 42). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 44). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the co-driver seat (/ page 45). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 45). \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight \n\nIf the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. \n\nR Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- \n\n# Cover the child restraint system with a \n\nrior and on the child restraint system. \n\nblanket, for example. \n\nR Also secure Top Tether if present. \n\nDo not modify the child restraint system \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifica- tions to the child restraint system \n\n# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\nThe child restraint system can no longer func- tion properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been \n\nspecially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. \n\nObserve when stopping or parking \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nOnly use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint sys- tems \n\nChild restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child \n\nrestraint systems that have been dam- aged or involved in an accident. \n\n# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n42 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nOverview of suitable seats in the vehicle for instal- ling a child restraint system \n\nLeft/right rear seat \n\nPreferred securing system: ® ISOFIX child seat anchor (/ page 42) ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present \n\n(/ page 43) \n\nInstalling a child restraint system # When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used, as well as the notes in this Oper- ator's Manual. \n\n# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt \n\noutlet. \n\nAlternative securing system: 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat \n\nCo-driver seat \n\n# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt \n\nbuckle. \n\nActivating the special seatbelt retractor # Extend the seat belt fully and then allow the \n\nSecuring system: 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat \n\nRear center seat \n\nSecuring system: 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present \n\n(/ page 43) \n\ninertia reel to retract the belt. When the special seatbelt retractor is activa- ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the \n\nseat belt is tight. \n\nDeactivating the special seatbelt retractor # Press the release button of the seat belt \n\nbuckle. \n\n# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to \n\nActivating or deactivating the special seatbelt retractor of the seat belt \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat \n\nthe seat belt outlet. \n\nInstalling a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- tem on the rear seat \n\nbelt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion \n\n▌Installing an ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat \n\nIf the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord- \n\nance with the traffic conditions. \n\n# Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. \n\nWhen activated, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seatbelt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee- ded. \n\nToo much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child is secured in a LATCH-type \n\n(ISOFIX) child restraint system with inte- grated seat belt, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 73 lb (33 kg). \n\nAlways comply with the information about the mass of the child: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat- ing instructions for the child restraint system used \n\nR on a label on the child restraint system, if avail- \n\nable \n\nOccupant safety \n\n43 \n\nCheck regularly that the permissible gross mass of the child plus the child restraint system is not exceeded. When you install a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use and suitability of the seats for attaching a child restraint sys- tem. \n\nO Always observe the manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. \n\nO Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. \n\n®When installing an ISOFIX child restraint sys- tem, also observe the following: O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat and  a Group 1 rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem on a rear seat: adjust the rear and/or front seat so that the front seat does not touch the child restraint system. \n\nO When using a Group 1 forward-facing child  \n\n1 ISOFIX mounting brackets \n\nBefore every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehicle. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the cen- ter seat during installation of the child restraint system \n\nrestraint system: the backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. \n\n# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap- \n\nped. \n\nO For certain child restraint systems in weight \n\ncategory II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. \n\nO Do not put the child restraint system under \n\n# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to both mounting brackets 1 in the vehicle. \n\nSecuring Top Tether \n\nstrain between the roof and the seat surface and/or install it facing the wrong direction. O Do not put the child restraint system under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect attachment of the Top Tether belt \n\nIf you attach the Top Tether belt incorrectly, the child restraint system is not properly secured and therefore cannot protect as inten- ded. # Attach the Top Tether hook only to the \n\nintended Top Tether anchorage. \n\n¯ If the child restraint system is equipped \n\nwith a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an addi- tional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX and the vehicle. \n\n44 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nSecuring the child restraint system with the seat belt \n\n▌Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat \n\nWhen installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem, observe the following: O Always observe the manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. \n\nTop Tether anchorages 1 are located on the back of the respective rear bench seat on the bench seat legs. \n\nO When using a baby car seat in weight cate- gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child  restraint system in weight category I on a  rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys- tem. \n\nO When using a forward-facing child restraint  \n\nsystem in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly. \n\nO The backrest of the forward-facing child \n\nrestraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight \n\n# If necessary, move the head restraint upwards \n\n(/ page 78). \n\ncategory II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. \n\n# Install the ISOFIX child restraint system with \n\nTop Tether. Comply with the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instructions. \n\n# Guide Top Tether belt 3 under the head \n\nrestraint between the two head restraint bars. \n\n# Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether \n\nanchorage 1 without twisting. \n\nO The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. \n\nO The child restraint system must not be put \n\nunder strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. \n\n# Tension Top Tether belt 3. Comply with the \n\nchild restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions. \n\nO Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. \n\n# If necessary, slide the head restraint down- wards (/ page 78). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 3. \n\nThe seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature: R Co-driver seat R Rear seats \n\nWhen activated, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the co-driver seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 42). \n\nOccupant safety \n\n45 \n\n# Install the child restraint system. \n\nO Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or \n\nThe entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat. \n\n# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let. \n\nbehind the child restraint system. \n\nThe seat belt on the co-driver side is equipped with a child seat safety feature. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 42). # Set the co-driver seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position possible. \n\n▌Notes on rearward-facing child restraint systems The co-driver air bag cannot be disabled. Always install a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat, but never on the co-driver seat. Observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint sys- tem used. \n\n# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- \n\nment. \n\n# Set the seat cushion inclination in such a way \n\nthat the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. \n\n# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical posi- \n\n▌Notes on child restraint systems on the co- driver seat Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. \n\n▌Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the co-driver seat \n\nWhen installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem on the co-driver seat, always observe the fol- lowing: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and \n\ntion possible. \n\n# Install the child restraint system. \n\nThe entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat. \n\n# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let. \n\n# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the \n\nco-driver seat as appropriate. \n\nforward-facing child restraint systems on the co-driver seat (/ page 45). \n\nChild safety locks \n\nO Observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation and operating instructions. \n\nO The backrest of the forward-facing child \n\n▌Activating or deactivating child safety locks for the sliding doors \n\nrestraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat. \n\nO For certain child restraint systems in weight \n\ncategory II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nO The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nO The child restraint system must not be put \n\nunder strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. \n\n46 \n\nOccupant safety \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\nbe opened at any time using the switch in the cen- ter console. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle \n\nIf persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil- dren, unattended in the vehicle. \n\nExample: sliding door child safety lock \n\n# Slide the child safety lock latch 1 into posi- \n\ntion 2 (secure) or 3 (unlock). \n\n# Make sure that the child safety locks are work- \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\ning properly. \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users \n\nNotes on pets in the vehicle \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle \n\nR Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example \n\n# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle. \n\nIf you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press but- tons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nR Switch systems on or off and endanger \n\nvehicle. \n\nother road users \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. \n\nThe following doors have child safety locks: R Sliding doors The child safety locks on the doors secure each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside (exception: electric sliding door). When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. If the electric sliding door is secured, only the slid- ing door controls in the rear passenger compart- ment are deactivated. The electric sliding door can \n\nUnsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat- \n\ntended. \n\n# Always correctly secure animals while \n\ndriving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n47 \n\nSmartKey \n\nNotes on radio connections of the key \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury to persons \n\nwith medical devices due to electromag- netic radiation when using the start/stop button \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nPersons with medical devices, e.g. pacemakers or defibrillators: There is a radio connection between the key and the vehicle. The function of a medical device can be impaired. # Before operating the vehicle, consult \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the \n\nkey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the key out of reach of children. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by \n\nmagnetic fields \n\nyour doctor or the manufacturer of the medical device about any possible effects from such systems. \n\n# Keep the SmartKey away from strong \n\nmagnetic fields. \n\nDetection range of the KEYLESS-START function antenna \n\n1 Position of the key holder when the detection \n\nrange of the antenna is reduced \n\nOverview of key functions \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\n1 To lock 2 Battery check lamp 3 To unlock 4 To unlock the cargo compartment (sliding doors and rear-end doors)/to unlock and open/close the electric sliding doors \n\n5 Mechanical key \n\nThe key's factory setting enables you to centrally lock and unlock the following components: R the driver's door and co-driver door R the sliding doors R the rear-end doors \n\n% If you do not open the vehicle within approx- imately 40 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle will lock again and anti-theft protection will be armed again. \n\n48 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nDo not keep the key together with electronic devi- ces or metallic objects. This can affect the key's functionality. % If the indicator lamp does not light up when you press the % or & button, the bat- tery is discharged. \n\n% The SmartKey function is automatically activa- ted when the vehicle is started with the Smart- Key in the gearshift console slot. \n\nRemoving and inserting the emergency key \n\nReplace the key battery (/ page 48). \n\nRemoving \n\nActivating/deactivating the acoustic locking verifi- cation signal \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock. \n\nChanging the unlocking settings \n\nThe key has the following adjustable unlocking functions: R Unlock centrally R Unlock the driver's door (vehicles without par- \n\ntition or with cab) \n\nR Unlock the driver's door and front passenger \n\ndoor (vehicles with partition) \n\n# Press release button 2. \n\nEmergency key 1 is pushed slightly out. \n\n# Pull emergency key 1 out completely. \n\nInserting # Press release button 2. # Slide emergency key 1 in completely until it \n\nengages. \n\n# To switch between settings: press and hold \n\nthe  % and & buttons at the same time for approximately six seconds until the indica- tor lamp flashes twice. \n\nReplacing the key battery \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to swal- \n\n# To unlock the vehicle centrally when the  \n\nlowing batteries \n\nunlocking function is selected for the driver's  door or the driver's and front passenger door:  press the % button a second time. \n\nReducing the energy consumption of the SmartKey \n\nDeactivating the SmartKey function If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can also deactivate the function of the SmartKey to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey. # Press and hold the & button on the Smart- \n\nBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury! # Keep the batteries out of the reach of \n\nchildren. \n\n# If the lid and/or the battery compart- ment do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. # If batteries are swallowed or otherwise \n\nKey. \n\n# While pressing the & button, immediately press the % button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The indicator light on the SmartKey will light up once briefly and once for a long time. \n\nenter the body, seek immediate medical attention. \n\nActivating the SmartKey function # Press any button on the SmartKey. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n49 \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental \n\ndamage due to improper disposal of bat- teries \n\nRectifying problems with the key \n\nYou can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle \n\nPossible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio sig- \n\n Batteries contain pollutants. It is \n\nillegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. \n\n# \n\nnal source. R The key is faulty. \n\n# Check the battery with the indicator lamp and \n\nreplace if necessary (/ page 48). \n\n# Use the mechanical key to unlock and lock the \n\n Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. \n\nRequirements:  R a CR 2032 3 V cell battery \n\nvehicle (/ page 48). \n\n# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist \n\nworkshop. \n\nYou have lost a key # Have the key deactivated at a qualified special- \n\nist workshop. \n\n# If necessary, have the mechanical locks \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced by a qualified specialist work- shop. # Remove the mechanical key (/ page 48). \n\nreplaced. \n\nDoors \n\nUnlocking and opening the door from inside \n\nExample image \n\n# Press release button 2 down fully and slide \n\ncover 1 forward. \n\n# Remove battery compartment 3 and remove \n\nthe discharged battery. \n\n# Insert the new battery into battery compart- \n\nment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the battery. \n\n# Insert battery compartment 3. # Replace cover 1 so that it engages. # Slide the mechanical key in completely until it \n\n# To unlock and open the front door: pull door \n\nhandle 2. Safety pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked. \n\nengages (/ page 48). \n\n50 \n\nOpening and closing \n\n# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle \n\nIf persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil- dren, unattended in the vehicle. \n\nThe % symbol indicates that the rear door is unlocked. # To unlock and open the rear door: pull opening \n\nYou can use the central locking buttons to cen- trally lock and unlock the entire vehicle from the inside. The central locking buttons are located in the driv- er's and front passenger door. \n\nlever 1 and open the rear door. When the door unlocks, latch 2 moves forward. The % symbol is visible. \n\n# To close: pull the rear door closed by the door \n\nhandle. \n\n# To lock: slide latch 2 back. The & symbol is visible. \n\nCentrally locking and unlocking the door from the inside \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\nCentral locking buttons (vehicles with electrically adjustable front seats) \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. \n\nCentral locking buttons (vehicles with manually adjustable front seats) \n\nOpening and closing \n\n51 \n\n# To unlock: with the doors closed, press button \n\n1. \n\n# To lock: with the doors closed, press button \n\n2. \n\nIf the vehicle is being tow-started, push-started or tested on a roller dynamometer, there is a risk of being locked out when the function is activated. # To activate: press and hold button 2 until you \n\nhear a tone. \n\nActivating/deactivating the automatic locking mechanism \n\n# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 until \n\nyou hear a tone. \n\nRequirements:  R The power supply or the vehicle has been \n\nAutomatic locking after closing the last door \n\nswitched on. \n\nR The doors are closed. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo- sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle \n\nWhen the automatic locking mechanism is activa- ted and the vehicle is traveling at a speed above 9 mph (15 km/h), the vehicle is locked automati- cally. \n\nIf persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. # Never leave persons, particularly chil- dren, unattended in the vehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nCentral locking buttons (vehicles with electrically adjustable front seats) \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& WARNING Accident‑ and risk of injury with unsecured or unattended animals in parked vehicle \n\nCentral locking buttons (vehicles with manually adjustable front seats) \n\nIf you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possiblypress buttons or switches. \n\n52 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nAn animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nR Switch systems on or‑ off and endanger \n\nother road users \n\n# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat- \n\ntended. \n\n# Always secure animals properly, e.g. with \n\na suitable animal transport box. \n\nAfter leaving the vehicle and closing the last door, the vehicle is automatically locked. This also applies if the key is still in the vehicle. There is a danger of locking oneself out. The vehi- cle can only be opened again with a vehicle key. R Always carry the vehicle key with you when \n\nleaving the vehicle. \n\n# To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter- \n\nclockwise to position 1. \n\n# To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise to \n\nposition 1. \n\n% If the vehicle is locked and the only available key is in the vehicle, notify a qualified special- ist workshop. \n\n% Right-hand drive vehicles: turn the mechanical key in the opposite direction for each case. \n\nUsing the grab handles when getting into and out of the vehicle \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive \n\nload on the grab handles \n\nWarning notice, depending on the equipment on the driver's door, the partition wall, the sliding door or the speed delivery door \n\nIf you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. \n\nUnlocking and locking the driver's door with the mechanical key \n\n% If you want to lock the vehicle completely with the mechanical key, press the button for the locking mechanism from inside first with the driver's door open. Then lock the driver's door with the mechanical key. \n\nThe entrances on buses are equipped with grab handles and steps. The grab handles to enter and exit the vehicle are at the front door and the sliding door. % To avoid risks: \n\nR When getting into and out of the vehicle, \n\nonly use the grab handles and steps. Only they are designed for such a load. R Keep steps and entry sills free from dirt, \n\ne.g. mud, clay, snow and ice. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n53 \n\nTo unlock \n\nGetting into and out of the vehicle (example: slid- ing door) \n\n# When getting into and out of the vehicle, use \n\ngrab handles 1 and steps. \n\n# Pull safety pin 3 upwards manually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50). \n\n% The grab handles on the sliding door are there to help people enter and exit the vehicle and can hold up to a maximum of 176 lbs (80 kg). Do not use the grab handle on the sliding door to secure a load (lashing down). Do not secure any objects to the easy entry and exit aids. \n\nOpening \n\nSliding door \n\nOpening and closing the sliding door \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to an open sliding door which is not engaged in place \n\nOn an incline, the sliding door can move by itself. This can cause you or other people to become trapped. # Always make sure that the open sliding \n\ndoor is engaged. To do so, open the slid- ing door to the stop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to sliding door opening towards the rear \n\n% Your vehicle may be equipped with a long slid- ing door with an intermediate catch. You can also lock the sliding door in place around half- way when opening and closing. This means you do not always have to open the door to the steering limit when getting in or out. The sliding door is not fully engaged when in the intermediate catch. \n\nWhen you open the sliding door, the sliding door could hit other people as it moves towards the rear of the vehicle. # Only open the sliding door when traffic \n\nconditions permit. \n\n# Press the button 1 inside and pull the door \n\n2 handle. \n\n# Push back the sliding door using door handle \n\n2 fully until it engages. # Check the sliding door catch. \n\n54 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nClosing # Press the button 1 inside and pull the door \n\nOpening/closing the electric sliding door with the button \n\n2 handle. \n\n# Slide the sliding door firmly forwards by handle \n\n2 until it closes. \n\nTo lock # Push safety pin 3 downwards manually or use the central locking button to lock the sliding door (/ page 50). \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to sliding door opening towards the rear \n\nWhen you open the sliding door, the sliding door could hit other people as it moves towards the rear of the vehicle. # Only open the sliding door when traffic \n\nconditions permit. \n\nNotes on electrical closing assist \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury despite the object \n\nIf your vehicle is fitted with electrical closing assist, you will require less force to close the sliding door. \n\nElectric sliding door \n\nFunction of the electric sliding door \n\nYour vehicle can be equipped with an electric slid- ing door on the left and/or right-hand side. You can operate the electric sliding door in the fol- lowing ways: R by pressing the sliding door buttons on the \n\ndetection function \n\nThe object detection function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, such as fingers. The object detection function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these sit- uations. # When opening and closing the electric sliding door, make sure that no parts of the body are within the operating range of the sliding door. \n\n# If someone becomes trapped, press the button again to stop the sliding door. \n\ncenter console \n\nR by pressing the sliding door button on the door \n\nsill (B-pillar) \n\nR using the door handle (inside or outside) R using the key \n\nObject detection: If an object obstructs the sliding door as it is clos- ing, the sliding door will be stopped. Object detec- tion is only an aid. It is not a substitute you having to pay attention. \n\nIf the electric sliding door is obstructed while opening, it moves a few centimeters in the oppo- site direction and stops. If the sliding door is obstructed during the closing procedure, it opens fully again. If the electric motor of the sliding door is in danger of overheating, e.g. due to frequent opening and closing within a short period, the sliding door opens fully. The sliding door is then locked in place. The sliding door is operational again after approximately 30 seconds. If there has been a malfunction or if the battery has been disconnected, you can use the release catch to disconnect the sliding door from the elec- tric motor. Then you can open or close the door manually (/ page 56). \n\n1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right \n\nside of the vehicle \n\nOpening and closing \n\n55 \n\nWhen you close the door using button 1 or 2, you will additionally hear two warning sig- nals. The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will flash and button 3 will flash. When the sliding door is completely closed, the indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will go out. \n\n# To stop automatic operation: briefly press but- \n\nOn vehicles with a partition, button 3 is loca- ted on the partition next to the doorway at the level of the inside door handle. \n\nton 1 or 2. The sliding door stops moving. \n\n# To lock: push locking pin 3 downwards man- ually or use the central locking button to lock the sliding door (/ page 50). \n\n% When you stop automatic operation upon \n\nopening the door, the door closes when you press the button again. \n\n% In unfavorable operating conditions, e.g. frost or ice, or if the vehicle is very dirty, you can press and hold the corresponding button. The electric sliding door moves with increased force. Observe that, in such circumstances, the object detection function is less sensitive. To stop the movement, release the button. \n\nWhen the sliding door is locked, it can only be opened from the inside by manually unlocking locking pin 4. \n\nOpening/closing the electric sliding door with the key \n\n# To unlock: briefly press the 5 or 4 but- \n\nton on the key. \n\n# To unlock: pull locking pin 4 upwards man- ually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50). \n\n# To open: press and hold the 5 or 4 but- ton on the key for longer than 0.5 seconds. You will hear two acoustic signals and the slid- ing door will open automatically. \n\n# To open: briefly press button 1, 2 or button \n\n3. The sliding door opens automatically. When you open the door using button 1 or 2, you will additionally hear two warning sig- nals. The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will flash and button 3 will flash. When the sliding door is completely open, the indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will light up. \n\n# To close: press and hold the 5 or 4 but- ton on the key for longer than 0.5seconds. You will hear two acoustic signals and the slid- ing door will close automatically. \n\n# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press \n\nthe 5 or 4 button on the key. The sliding door stops moving. \n\n% When you stop automatic operation upon \n\nopening the door, the door closes when you press the button again. \n\n# To close: briefly press button 1, 2 or button \n\n3. The sliding door closes automatically. \n\n56 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nOpening/closing the electric sliding door with the door handle \n\n# Open or close the sliding door with the outside \n\nor inside door handle. \n\nEstablishing the connection between sliding door and electric motor # Insert the mechanical key into opening 1 of disconnect switch 2 in the \"MAN\" position. # Turn the mechanical key 180° counter-clock- \n\nwise. The \"AUTO\" position is set. \n\n# Adjust the sliding door (/ page 57). \n\nIf there has been a malfunction or if the battery has been disconnected, you can use disconnect switch 2 to disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor. Then you can open or close the door manually. \n\n# To unlock: pull locking pin 2 upwards man- ually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50). # Press button 1 or pull outside door handle \n\n3. The sliding door opens or closes. \n\n# Press button 1 again or pull outside door \n\nhandle 3. The sliding door stops moving. \n\nUnlocking the electric sliding door manually \n\nDisconnecting the sliding door from the electric motor # Insert the mechanical key into opening 1 of disconnect switch 2 in the \"AUTO\" position. \n\nCover in sliding door trim \n\n# Vehicles with sliding door trim: fold the cover \n\n# Turn the mechanical key 180° clockwise. \n\nThe \"MAN\" position is set. \n\nof disconnect switch 2 up. The disconnect switch is accessible. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n57 \n\n# To disconnect the sliding door from the elec- tric motor: turn disconnect switch 2 180° clockwise. The \"MAN\" position is set. \n\nTo unlock # Pull safety pin 3 upwards manually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50). # Press release button 1. # Open or close the sliding door with the outside \n\nSliding door button on the door sill (B-pillar) \n\nor inside door handle. \n\nEstablishing the connection between sliding door and electric motor # Turn disconnect switch 2 180° counter- \n\nclockwise. The \"AUTO\" position is set. \n\n# Adjust the sliding door (/ page 57). # If it is not possible to rectify the malfunction, \n\nvisit a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nYou must reset the sliding door if there has been a malfunction or a voltage supply interruption. # If the sliding door is open: press button 1 on the center console or sliding door button 3 on the door sill (B-pillar) and hold until the door is closed. \n\nor # Close the sliding door with the door handle \n\n(/ page 56). \n\n# Then briefly press button 1 on the center \n\nResetting the electric sliding door \n\nconsole or sliding door button 3 on the door sill (B-pillar) once, or pull the door handle (/ page 56) to completely open the sliding door. The sliding door is operational. \n\nRear-end doors \n\nOpening and closing the rear-end doors from out- side \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear- \n\nend door swinging open \n\nSliding door button on the center console \n\nSliding door button on the center console 1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right \n\nside of the vehicle \n\nWhen you open a rear-end door, the following can occur: R You or another person can be injured. R A person may be struck by oncoming traf- \n\nfic. \n\nThis is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. # Only open a rear-end door when the traf- fic conditions and surroundings permit. \n\n# Always make sure that the rear-end \n\ndoors are properly closed. \n\n58 \n\nOpening and closing \n\n* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due \n\nto objects obstructing their range of move- ment \n\nWhen the rear-end doors are opened, any objects obstructing the range of movement of the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as the vehicle. # Make sure that there is sufficient clear- ance when opening the rear-end doors. \n\n# Swing the rear-end door to the side until it \n\nengages. \n\nOpening the rear-end doors fully # Open the respective rear-end door outwards \n\nbeyond the first detent (90°). # Open the rear-end door fully. \n\nThe rear-end door will stay in the stop position. \n\nClosing the rear-end doors from outside # Close the left rear-end door firmly from out- \n\nOpening the right rear-end door \n\nside. \n\n# Close the right rear-end door firmly from out- \n\nside. \n\nOpening rear-end doors with door check more than 90° \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear- \n\nend door swinging open \n\nWhen you open a rear-end door, the following can occur: R You or another person can be injured. R A person may be struck by oncoming traf- \n\nfic. \n\n# Pull handle 1. # Swing the rear-end door to the side until it \n\nengages. \n\nOpening the left rear-end door \n\nThis is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. # Only open a rear-end door when the traf- fic conditions and surroundings permit. \n\n# Always make sure that the rear-end \n\ndoors are properly closed. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due \n\nto objects obstructing their range of move- ment \n\n# Make sure that the right rear-end door is open \n\nWhen the rear-end doors are opened, any objects obstructing the range of movement of the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as the vehicle. # Make sure that there is sufficient clear- ance when opening the rear-end doors. \n\nand engaged. \n\n# Pull release handle 1 in the direction of the \n\narrow. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n59 \n\nthe rear-end doors can be damaged as well as the vehicle. # Make sure that there is sufficient clear- ance when opening the rear-end doors. \n\n# Open the rear-end door to about 45°. # Pull the door check in the direction of the \n\narrow and hold it in place. \n\n# Open the rear-end door more than 90° so that \n\nthe door check can no longer engage. \n\n# Release the door check and open the rear-end \n\ndoor fully. \n\nThe % symbol indicates that the rear-end door is unlocked. # To unlock: slide latch 2 to the left. \n\nOpening/closing the rear-end doors from the inside \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rear- \n\nThe % symbol is visible. \n\n# To open: pull opening lever 1 and open the rear-end door. Swing the rear-end door to the side until it engages. \n\nend door swinging open \n\nWhen you open a rear-end door, the following can occur: R You or another person can be injured. R A person may be struck by oncoming traf- \n\n# To close: make sure that the left rear-end door is closed. Pull the rear right door firmly to by the door handle. \n\n# To lock: slide latch 2 to the right. \n\nThe & symbol is visible. \n\nfic. \n\nThis is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. # Only open a rear-end door when the traf- fic conditions and surroundings permit. \n\n# Always make sure that the rear-end \n\ndoors are properly closed. \n\nPartition sliding door \n\nOpening and closing the partition sliding door \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the partition sliding door is not engaged \n\nThe partition sliding door may move on its own while the vehicle is in motion. This can cause you or other people to become trapped. # Before every journey, close the partition \n\n* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due \n\nsliding door and ensure that it is engaged. \n\nto objects obstructing their range of move- ment \n\nWhen the rear-end doors are opened, any objects obstructing the range of movement of \n\n60 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nElectrical step \n\nFunction of the electrical step \n\nPartition from the cab \n\nPartition from the cargo compartment \n\n# To open: turn the key to the left 3 from the cab or push the lever to the right 3 from the cargo compartment. The sliding door is unlocked. \n\n# Push the sliding door as far as it will go to the right 2 from the cab or to the left 1 from the cargo compartment. \n\n# To close: push the sliding door to the left 1 \n\nfrom the cab or to the right 2 from the cargo compartment until it engages. You can lock the sliding door from the cab with the key. \n\nYour vehicle's sliding door may be equipped with an electrical step. Electrical step 1 automatically extends when the sliding door opens, and retracts after the sliding door closes. Electrical step 1 is equipped with object recognition at the front. If the step meets an object while extending, it stops. Once you have removed the object, you must first close the sliding door and then open it again so that the step extends completely. If the electrical step prevents loading, you can block it via object recognition when the sliding door opens. The electrical step then remains retracted and a fork-lift truck or another lifting vehicle can move closer to the cargo compart- ment. % The Step Not Extended See Operator's Man- ual or Sliding Step Not Extended Malfunction  See + message appears on the instrument cluster display. When the vehicle is switched off, a warning tone will sound if object recognition is blocked. The tone lasts for two minutes. When the vehicle is switched on, the warning tone will sound continuously. \n\nVehicles with an instrument cluster (color): if the instrument cluster display shows the Step Not  Retracted See Operator's Manual or Step Not  Extended See Operator's Manual message and a warning tone sounds, electrical step 1 is mal- functioning (/ page 310). If electrical step 1 is malfunctioning, the step may not extend or retract, or do so only partially. After a malfunction occurs, you must retract and \n\nOpening and closing \n\n61 \n\nlock electrical step 1 manually in order to con- tinue your journey (/ page 61). Before passen- gers exit the vehicle, inform them that electrical step 1 may be missing. \n\nReleasing the electrical step in an emergency (manual retraction) \n\n# Fold bars 1 into the step's housing. # Slide the step into its housing. \n\n% When securing the step for the first time, you \n\nmust puncture a foil with the spring cotters. \n\nIf the electrical step does not automatically retract, you must manually retract the step and lock it in order to continue driving. # On the underside of step 2 on both bars 1 remove the spring cotters 3 from the pin. # Remove the washers 4 and detach both bars. \n\n# On both sides, insert spring cotters 1 through the housing's holes and into the step as far as they will go. The step has been secured in its housing. \n\nSide window \n\nOpening and closing the side windows \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- \n\ning a side window \n\nWhen opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is \n\ntouching the side window. \n\n62 \n\nOpening and closing \n\n# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. \n\n# To open completely: briefly press button 1 or \n\n2 beyond the pressure point. Automatic operation will start. \n\n# To close completely: briefly pull button 1 or \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when \n\nclosing a side window \n\n2 beyond the pressure point. Automatic operation will start. \n\nWhen closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body \n\nparts are in the closing area. \n\n# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when \n\nchildren operate the side windows \n\n# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press \n\nor pull button 1 or 2 again. \n\n% If an object blocks a side window during the automatic closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. \n\n% If automatic operation of the side window does not work, there is no automatic reversing func- tion. \n\nChildren could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unatten- ded. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. \n\nAutomatic reversing function of the side windows If an object blocks a side window during the clos- ing process, the side window will open again auto- matically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive- ness. # During the closing process, make sure that no \n\nbody parts are in the closing area. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped \n\ndespite there being reversing protection on the side window \n\nThe reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing \n\npath \n\nR during resetting R when the side window is closed again man- ually immediately after automatic reversing \n\n# To open manually: press and hold button 1 or \n\nThe reversing function cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. \n\n2. \n\n# To close manually: pull and hold button 1 or \n\n2. \n\n# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. \n\nThe windows in the front doors can also be oper- ated automatically. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n63 \n\nVentilating the vehicle before starting a journey (convenience opening) \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- \n\ning a side window \n\nWhen opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is \n\ntouching the side window. \n\nAdjusting the side windows \n\nThe side windows must be readjusted after a mal- function or a voltage supply interruption. # Switch on the power supply (/ page 109). # Push both buttons on the power window and hold for approximately one second after the side window has closed. \n\nRectifying problems with the side windows \n\n# Release the button immediately if some- \n\nbody becomes trapped. \n\nYou can ventilate the vehicle before you start driv- ing. The \"convenience opening\" function can be oper- ated using the SmartKey without switching on the vehicle. The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the driver's or front passenger door. # Press and hold the % button on the Smart- \n\nKey. The following functions are performed: R the vehicle is unlocked R the side windows are opened \n\nA side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause # Check to see if there are any objects in the \n\nwindow guide. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or \n\nfatally injured if reversing protection is not activated \n\nIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are \n\n# To interrupt convenience opening: release the \n\nin the closing area. \n\n% button. \n\nClosing the side windows from the outside (conve- nience closing) \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience clos- ing \n\nWhen the convenience closing feature is oper- ating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. \n\n# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. \n\nIf a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly, you can proceed as follows: # Immediately after the window is obstructed, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for an additional second. The side window will be closed with increased force. \n\nIf the side window is obstructed again and reopens slightly, you can proceed as follows: # Repeat the previous step. \n\n# Press and hold the & button on the Smart- \n\nKey. The following functions are performed: R the vehicle is locked R the side windows are closed \n\n# To interrupt convenience closing: release the \n\n& button. \n\nThe side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. \n\nThe side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature \n\nPossible cause: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. \n\n# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and \n\nreplace it if necessary (/ page 48). \n\n64 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nAnti-theft prevention \n\nFunction of immobilizer \n\nThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. If the key is left inside the vehicle, anyone can start the vehicle. % In the event the engine does not start despite the vehicle's starter battery having sufficient charge, the immobilizer is faulty. Contact a qualified specialist workshop or call 1-800-367-6372 (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). \n\nATA is automatically deactivated in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey. R After pressing the start/stop button with the \n\nSmartKey inside the vehicle. \n\n▌Arming/deactivating ATA (Anti-theft Alarm sys- tem) \n\nActivating \n\nATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) \n\n▌Function of ATA (Anti-theft Alarm system) \n\nIf the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R a side door is opened R the rear-end door is opened R the hood is opened R the interior motion sensor is triggered \n\n(/ page 65) \n\nR the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 65) \n\nATA is automatically armed after approximately five seconds in the following situation: R after the vehicle has been locked with the \n\nSmartKey \n\n# Close all the doors. # Lock the vehicle with the key. \n\nIndicator lamp 1 in the overhead control panel flashes. \n\nDeactivating # Unlock the vehicle with the key. \n\nIndicator lamp 1 in the overhead control panel goes out. \n\n% The vehicle locks again automatically if you do not open a door within 40 seconds after unlocking the vehicle. \n\nStopping the alarm # Press the % or & button on the key. or # Press the Start/Stop button with the key inside \n\nthe vehicle. The alarm stops. \n\n% If the alarm system is armed, a visual and \n\naudible alarm is triggered in the following sit- uations: R A door is opened R The hood is opened \n\nWhen the ATA system is armed, indicator lamp 1 flashes in the overhead control panel. \n\nThe alarm will not be deactivated, even if you immediately close the open door that has trig- gered it, forexample. \n\nOpening and closing \n\n65 \n\nFunction of the tow-away alarm \n\nFunction of the tow-away alarm A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the incli- nation of the vehicle changes when the tow-away alarm is activated. This can be the case if the vehi- cle is raised on one side, for example. \n\nDeactivate the tow-away alarm when locking your vehicle in the following situations: R when loading and/or transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car transporter, for example R when parking the vehicle on a movable sur- \n\nface, such as a split-level garage \n\nThis will prevent false alarms. \n\nArming/disarming the tow-away alarm \n\nArming/disarming # Lock the vehicle with the key. \n\nThe tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 40 seconds: # Open the vehicle with the key. \n\nThe tow-away alarm is deactivated. \n\nInterior motion sensor \n\nFunction If the activated the interior motion sensor detects motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acoustic alarm is triggered. This can happen if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. \n\nThe tow-away alarm is only armed when the follow- ing components are closed: R the driver's door and the front-passenger door R the side doors R the rear-end doors \n\nActivating/deactivating the interior motion sensor \n\nActivating # Close the side windows. # Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or \n\nDeactivating \n\ncoat hangers) is hanging on the inside rearview mirror or on the grab handles on the headliner. This will prevent false alarms. # Lock the vehicle with the key. \n\nThe interior motion sensor is activated after approximately 30 seconds. \n\nThe interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R the driver's door and the co-driver door R the side doors R the rear-end doors \n\nDeactivating # Unlock the vehicle with the key. \n\n# Switch off the power supply (/ page 109). # Press button 1. \n\nThe interior motion sensor automatically switches off. \n\nWhen the button is released, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up for approximately five seconds. \n\n# Lock the vehicle with the key. \n\nThe tow-away alarm is deactivated. \n\nThe tow-away alarm remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again. \n\n66 \n\nOpening and closing \n\nDeactivating \n\n# Switch off the power supply (/ page 109). # Press button 1. \n\nWhen the button is released, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up for about five seconds. \n\n# Lock the vehicle with the key. \n\nThe interior motion sensor is deactivated. \n\nThe interior motion sensor remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again. Deactivate the interior motion sensor when locking your vehicle in the following situations: R if there are people or animals remaining inside R if the side windows remain open R when transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car \n\ntransporter, for example \n\nThis will prevent false alarms. \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n67 \n\nNotes on the correct driver's seat position \n\nR You have a good overview of the traffic condi- \n\ntions. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR Your seat belt sits snugly against your body \n\nand passes across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area. \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nNotes on grab handles \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive \n\nload on the grab handles \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\ncle is in motion \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\nIf you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat. \n\nSeats \n\nAdjusting the front seats manually (without Seat Comfort Package) \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nseat is adjusted by children \n\nChildren could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly if they are unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the \n\nkey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\nEnsure the following when adjusting steering wheel 3, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 1: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's air \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when \n\nadjusting the seat \n\nbag as possible. \n\nR You are sitting in an upright position. R Your thighs are gently supported by the seat \n\ncushion. \n\nR Your legs are not fully extended and you can \n\nreach the pedals easily. \n\nWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. \n\nR The back of your head is supported at eye level \n\nby the middle part of the head restraint. \n\nObserve the safety notes on \"Airbags\" and \"Chil- dren in the vehicle\". \n\nR You can hold the steering wheel with your arms \n\nslightly bent. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driv- \n\nR You can move your legs without any restric- \n\ner's seat not being engaged \n\ntions. \n\nR You can see all of the instrument cluster dis- \n\nThe driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. \n\nplays well. \n\n68 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\nThis could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. \n\nset the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of your head as possible. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\ncle is in motion \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an \n\nincorrect seat position \n\nThe seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning \n\nyour journey. \n\n# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nthe seats back \n\nseat height is adjusted carelessly \n\nIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. \n\nThe seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly \n\nIf head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints \n\ninstalled. \n\n# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. \n\n1 Seat fore-and-aft position 2 Seat height 3 Seat backrest inclination \n\n# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position. Ensure that the seat is engaged. \n\nDo not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n69 \n\n# To adjust the seat height: keep on pressing or pulling lever 2 until the required seat height has been reached. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\n# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nAdjusting the front seats manually (with Seat Com- fort Package) \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\ncle is in motion \n\nseat is adjusted by children \n\nChildren could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly if they are unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\nkey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when \n\nadjusting the seat \n\nWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nseat height is adjusted carelessly \n\nIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. \n\nObserve the safety notes on \"Air bags\" and \"Chil- dren in the vehicle\". \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driv- \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly \n\ner's seat not being engaged \n\nThe driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. \n\nIf head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints \n\ninstalled. \n\n# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. \n\nDo not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of your head as possible. \n\n70 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an \n\nincorrect seat position \n\nThe seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning \n\nyour journey. \n\n# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. \n\n# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 2 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. \n\n# To adjust the seat height: pull or push lever 3 until the desired position has been reached. # To adjust the seat cushion inclination: rotate handwheel 4 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 5 and slide the seat into the desired position. \n\n# To check for safety: ensure that the seat is \n\nengaged. \n\n# To adjust the seat suspension: take your \n\n* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving \n\nthe seats back \n\nweight off the seat. \n\n# Using handwheel 6, set the body weight \n\nThe seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. \n\n(88 lb (40 kg) to 265 lb (120 kg)) so that the seat suspension works optimally. If you set a higher weight, the seat suspension will become firmer. The seat will then not vibrate as much. If the seat vibrates often and significantly, you can engage it in the lower area. \n\n# To engage vibration limiting: turn lever 7 \n\nupwards. The next time the seat vibrates, it will engage. # To release vibration limiting: turn lever 7 to \n\nthe right. The seat can vibrate. \n\nAdjusting the front seat electrically \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nseat is adjusted by children \n\nChildren could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly if they are unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the \n\nExample image of comfort suspension seat \n\n1 Seat cushion length 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion inclination 5 Seat fore-and-aft position 6 Seat suspension 7 Vibration limiting \n\nkey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\nThe seats can be adjusted when the vehicle is switched off. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when \n\nadjusting the seat \n\n# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front part of the seat cushion for- wards or backwards. \n\nWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n71 \n\n# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. \n\nObserve the safety notes on \"air bags\" and \"Chil- dren in the vehicle\". \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driv- \n\ner's seat not being engaged \n\nThe driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\nincreased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints \n\ninstalled. \n\n# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. \n\nDo not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear passenger compartment seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclina- tion of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an \n\nincorrect seat position \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\ncle is in motion \n\nThe seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before beginning \n\nyour journey. \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\n# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nseat height is adjusted carelessly \n\n* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving \n\nthe seats back \n\nIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. \n\nThe seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly \n\nIf head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an \n\n72 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\nOperating the memory function \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem- \n\nory function is used while driving \n\nIf you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the \n\ndriver's side when the vehicle is station- ary. \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment when \n\n1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position \n\n# Save the settings with the memory function \n\n(/ page 72). \n\nadjusting the seat with the memory func- tion \n\nWhen the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the \n\nmemory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. \n\nSetting 4-way lumbar support \n\n# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi- ately release the memory function posi- tion button. The adjustment process is stopped. \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the mem- ory function is activated by children \n\nChildren could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unat- tended. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. \n\n1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer \n\n# Use buttons 1 to 4 adjust the backrest con- \n\nThe memory function can be used when the vehi- cle is switched off. \n\nStoring seat settings Seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can adjust the seat and the backrest. \n\ntour individually to your spine. \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n73 \n\n# Adjust the seat to the desired position. # Press memory button M together with one of \n\nthe preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. \n\n# To call up: press and hold memory position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front seat is in the stored position. \n\nYou can rotate the driver's and front passenger seats by 50° and 180°. The seats engage both in and opposite to the direction of travel as well as at 50° towards the exit. # Ensure that the parking brake is applied and the brake lever is down as far as it will go (/ page 140). \n\n# When rotating the seat, open the respective \n\nRotating the front seats \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the driver's seat and front passenger seat are not engaged \n\nfront door in order to avoid a collision with the door trim. \n\n# Adjust the steering wheel in such a way that there is sufficient clearance to rotate and adjust the driver's seat (/ page 79). \n\n# Slide the front passenger seat forward before \n\nIn this situation, the restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. # Engage the driver's seat and front \n\npassenger seat in the direction of travel before you start the vehicle. \n\nrotating it (/ page 67). \n\n# To rotate the seat: push lever 1 towards the door and rotate the seat slightly inwards. The turning device will be unlocked. \n\n# Release lever 1 again. # Rotate the seat outwards or inwards into the \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\nrequired position. \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\ncle is in motion \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\n74 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\nMoving the co-driver bench seat surface forwards and backwards \n\n# Remove key 1 from the partition sliding door. # Press the push button on catch 2 and fold \n\n# To fold the seat surface forward: lift seat sur- \n\nseat cushion 3 up or down. \n\nface out of front anchorage 1. \n\n# Release push button on catch 2 when seat \n\n# Pull the seat surface out of rear anchorage 2 \n\ncushion 3 reaches its end position. \n\nand move it slightly forwards. \n\n# Fold the rear edge of the seat surface \n\nupwards. \n\n# Move seat cushion 3 until it has locked. The push button on catch 2 must be completely flush with the seat frame. \n\n% You can stow individual objects in the stowage compartment beneath the co-driver bench seat. \n\n# To fold away the seat surface: fold the rear edge of the seat surface downwards. \n\n# Slide the seat surface under the seat backrest \n\ninto rear anchorage 2. \n\n# Push the front seat surface downwards until it \n\nengages in the front anchorage 1. \n\nFolding the folding seat up or down \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury when using the folding seat due to inserted key \n\nInstalling and removing the rear bench seat \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect installation of the rear bench seat \n\nIf the rear seat is unsuitable, the seat belts may not perform their intended protective function. # Install the rear seat bench as described and only in the direction of travel. # Installation of the rear bench seat in a face-to-face position is not permitted. # Use only rear bench seats that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. \n\nThe key in the lock of the partition wall sliding door may come into contact with the person on the folding seat. # Always remove the key before a person \n\nsits on the folding seat. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench \n\nseat is not locked in place \n\nIf the rear bench seat is not stable, it may tip over during a journey. # Before setting off, ensure that the rear \n\nbench seat is engaged. The red indicator tabs must not be visible on the release handle. \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n75 \n\n# If the red indicator tabs are visible on the release handle, re-engage the rear bench seat. \n\n3 Third row of seats: three-person rear bench \n\nseat with strut \n\n4 Fourth row of seats: four-person rear bench \n\nseat with strut \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury when installing and removing the rear bench seat \n\n# Install the three-person rear bench seat on the \n\nthird seat row 3. \n\nWhen you install or remove the rear bench seat, body parts such as feet may become trapped when the rear bench seat is tipped. # When installing and removing the rear bench seat, ensure that there are no body parts between the rear bench seat and the floor. \n\n# Install the four-person rear bench seat on the \n\nfourth seat row 4. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the rear bench seat roll- \n\ners due to misuse \n\nIf the rear bench seat is used improperly or removed incorrectly, the rear bench seat roll- ers may be damaged. # If the rear bench seat is in the seat shell, do not pull it towards the rear-end door. Roll the rear seat only beside the seat shells. \n\nVehicles with three rows of seats \n\n1 First row of seats 2 Second row of seats 3 Third row of seats: four-person rear bench \n\nseat with strut \n\n# Do not roll or use the rear bench seat as a means of transport when removed. \n\n# Install the four-person rear bench seat on the \n\nthird seat row3. \n\nInstallation position of three-person and four-per- son rear bench seat with strut The three-person rear bench seat is available with or without a strut. The four-person rear bench seat is available only with a strut. The strut is located on the rear side of the rear bench seat. Install the three-person rear bench seat with strut only in the third seat row (above the rear axle). Install the four-person rear bench seat only on the last row of seats. \n\nRemoving the rear bench seat \n\nVehicles with four rows of seats \n\n1 First row of seats 2 Second row of seats \n\nPerform these tasks carefully with the assistance of a second person. # To remove the covers of the seat shells: push retaining clip 1 in the direction of the arrow and detach cover 2 by pushing it to the top rear at an angle. \n\n76 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n# Pull the bench seat backwards again using \n\nrelease handle 2. \n\n# Tilt the bench seat slightly backwards and pull \n\nit out of the seat shells. \n\n# To remove or store the bench seat, place it \n\nnext to the seat shells and roll it towards the rear doors. \n\nor # Lift the bench seat out from the side to store \n\nit. \n\n% It may be necessary for the bench seats in \n\nfront or behind to be removed. \n\n# Push release handle 2 for the bench seat all the way down and hold it there. At the same time, tilt the bench seat backwards slightly using the release handle and pull it slightly backwards. \n\n# Let go of the release handle. \n\nThe locks on the bench seat legs will be unlocked and red indicator tabs 3 on the housing of release handle 2 will be visible. # Hold the unlocked bench seat by grab han- \n\ndles 1 and pull backwards slightly. \n\n# To attach the covers of the seat shells: hold \n\ncover 3 such that retaining lug 1 is pointing towards rear seat anchorage 2. \n\n# Insert cover 3 into rear seat anchorage 2 by pushing it downwards at an angle and then clip it to the seat shell. \n\n# After removing the rear bench seats, ensure \n\nthat the rear bench seats stand firmly and can- not tip over when in storage. \n\nPlease note that the metallic seat support in the vehicle floor will heat up during a journey if the rear seating has been removed. \n\n# Tilt bench seat 1 backwards and pull it out of \n\nthe seat shells. \n\n% If the bench seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, the bench seat may be wedged in the seat anchorage. This can happen if the bench seat is tilted too far backwards. \n\nIf the seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, proceed as follows: # Tilt the bench seat forwards without engaging \n\nit. \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n77 \n\nInstalling the rear bench seat \n\n# Tilt the bench seat forwards firmly until the locks on the front legs of the bench seat engage audibly. The locks on the front legs of the bench seat will now be locked and the red indicator tabs on the housing of release handle 1 should no longer be visible. \n\n% If the red indicator tabs on the release handle housing are visible, the bench seat is not cor- rectly engaged. \n\nIf the bench seat is not correctly engaged, you can rectify this situation as follows: # Unlock the bench seat again and tilt it for- \n\nwards firmly until the locks on the bench seat front legs engage audibly. \n\nWarning notice on the rear bench seat \n\n# Attach the covers of the seat shells as descri- bed under \"Removing the rear bench seat\". \n\nSecure engagement of the rear bench seat is guar- anteed only if the seat anchorages are kept clean and free of objects. % In vehicles registered as passenger vehicles, observe the maximum permitted number of seats. \n\nAdjusting the seat backrest of the rear bench seat \n\n# Remove the covers of the seat shells as descri- bed under \"Removing the rear bench seat\". # Ensure that there are no objects in the seat \n\nanchorages and seat shells. \n\n# Position the bench seat behind the installation \n\nposition. \n\n# Hold the bench seat by the grab handles and \n\ntilt it backwards. \n\n# Roll the bench seat forwards on the level plas- \n\ntic carriers. \n\n# Ensure that the rear legs of the bench seat are \n\nengaged. \n\n% If a partition is installed: the rear bench seat must not come into contact with the partition at any time. \n\n# Move the seat backrest to the desired position. \n\n78 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\nHead restraints \n\n▌Adjusting the head restraint manually \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\ncle is in motion \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly \n\nHead restraint (example of luxury head restraint on the driver's seat) \n\n# To raise: pull the head restraint upwards into the desired position and ensure that it engages. \n\n% Use the head restraint only when it is \n\nengaged. \n\nIf head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints \n\ninstalled. \n\n# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. \n\n# To lower: press release button 1, slide the head restraint downwards into the desired position and ensure that it engages. \n\n% Use the head restraint only when it is \n\nengaged. \n\n# To move forwards: press release button 2 and pull the head restraint forwards until it engages in the desired position. \n\n# To move backwards: press release button 2 \n\nand slide the head restraint backwards into the desired position. \n\nDo not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of your head as possible. \n\n# To remove: press release button 1 and pull \n\nthe head restraint up and out. \n\n# To install: press the head restraint with detent into the holes on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel until it engages. \n\nSwitching the seat heating on and off \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly \n\nswitching on the seat heating \n\nRepeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- ding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n79 \n\ntemperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat \n\nSteering wheel \n\nAdjusting the steering wheel \n\nheating. \n\nTo protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nobjects or documents when the seat heat- ing is switched on \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nWhen the seat heating is switched on, over- heating may occur due to objects or docu- ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\ncle is in motion \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to \n\nRequirements:  R The power supply has been switched on. \n\nunlocked steering wheel \n\nThe steering wheel may move unexpectedly if it is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion. # Make sure that the steering wheel is \n\nlocked before driving off. \n\n# Never unlock the steering wheel when \n\nthe vehicle is in motion. \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel \n\nChildren could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. \n\n# To switch on: press button 1. \n\nAll indicator lamps on the button light up. # To lower the level: press button 1 until the \n\nrequired heating level is reached. Depending on the heating level, one to three indicator lamps light up. \n\n# To switch off: press button 1 until all indica- \n\ntor lamps are off. \n\n% The seat heating automatically switches back out of the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off. \n\n80 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\nAdjusting the steering wheel \n\nStorage compartment with cover, depending on specification \n\n3 Center console storage compartment with \n\nUSB port, charging interface, NFC interface and 12 V socket \n\n4 Storage compartment above windshield (sub- ject to a maximum load of 5 lb (2.5 kg)) 5 Co-driver side storage compartment (subject \n\nto a maximum load of 11 lb (5 kg)) \n\n6 Cup holders (/ page 80) 7 Storage compartment in the doors \n\nInformation about the bottle holder \n\n1 Lever 2 Steering column height 3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment \n\n# To unlock: swing lever 1 down as far as it will \n\ngo. The steering wheel is unlocked. \n\n# To lock: pull lever 1 up as far as it will go. \n\nThe steering wheel is locked. \n\nStowage areas \n\nOverview of the front stowage compartments \n\n▌Overview of the front storage compartments Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 208). \n\n1 Bottle holder in the front doors (example: front \n\npassenger door) \n\nCup holders \n\nOverview of cup holders in the center console \n\n& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury \n\nwhen using the cup holder while the vehi- cle is moving \n\n1 Lockable compartment above windshield (sub- \n\nject to a maximum load of 4 lb (2 kg)) \n\n2 Windshield storage compartment with two cup \n\nThe cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be dis- tracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehicle \n\nis stationary. \n\nholders/ashtray storage space \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n81 \n\n# Only use the cup holder for containers of \n\nthe right size. \n\n# Close the container, particularly if the liq- \n\nuid is hot. \n\n# To open: press the cup holder 1 or 2. # Fold out the cup holder. # To close: slide the cup holder 1 or 2 back in \n\nuntil it engages. \n\nThe cup holders for the driver and front passenger are in the center console. The key holder 1 for vehicles with a reduced antenna detection range (KEYLESS-START) is loca- ted in the driver's cup holder. For vehicles with manual transmission, the key holder is located in the front passenger's cup holder. \n\nAshtray and cigarette lighter \n\nUsing ashtrays \n\n# Place the closed ashtray in a cup holder in the \n\nwindshield stowage compartments. \n\n# Check that the ashtray is seated securely. % Do not place the ashtray in the center console cup holders. It cannot sit securely here. \n\nOpening the cup holder in the rear passenger com- partment \n\nUsing the cigarette lighter in the center console \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to cup holder \n\nbeing extended when exiting the vehicle \n\n& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from hot \n\ncigarette lighter \n\nYou may bump into the cup holder. # Before getting out of the vehicle, push the cup holder back under the rear bench seat. \n\nYou can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to \n\nobjects, for example \n\n# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the \n\nknob. \n\n# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. # Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n82 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is switched on. \n\n% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehi- \n\ncle has additional 12 V sockets: R In the lower control panel in the front cen- \n\nter console \n\nR In the driver's seat R In the cargo compartment \n\nUsing the 115 V socket in the lower control panel \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam- aged connecting cables or sockets \n\n# Press in cigarette lighter 1. \n\nThe cigarette lighter will pop out when the heating element is red-hot. \n\nIf a suitable device is connected, the 115 V socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the connecting cable or the 115 V socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet, you could receive an electric shock. # Only use dry and damage-free connect- \n\ning cables. \n\n# When the ignition is switched off, ensure \n\nthat the 115 V socket is dry. \n\nSockets \n\nUsing the 12 V sockets \n\nRequirements:  R Only devices with a maximum power consump- \n\ntion of 180 W (15 A) may be connected. \n\n12 V socket in storage compartment \n\n# If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets pulled out of the paneling, immediately have the socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialized workshop. \n\n# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor- \n\nrect handling of the socket \n\nYou could receive an electric shock: R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects \n\ninto the socket. \n\n# Do not reach into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the \n\nsocket. \n\n# Open the lid of the storage compartment in the \n\nRequirements:  R The devices must be equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. \n\ncenter console . \n\nR Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts \n\n# Fold up cover 1 of the socket. # Insert the plug of the device. \n\nare permitted. \n\nR Do not use multiple socket outlets. \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n83 \n\nWirelessly charging the mobile phone and cou- pling with the exterior antenna \n\nNotes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects \n\nbeing stowed incorrectly \n\n# Open flap 3. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket \n\n1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. \n\nIf you will not be using the 115 V power socket, keep the flap closed. \n\nIf objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they can- not be thrown around in such situations. \n\n# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. \n\n# Close the lockable storage spaces before \n\nstarting a journey. \n\nCharging a mobile phone using the USB port in the rear passenger compartment \n\n# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. \n\nComply with the instructions for loading the vehi- cle (/ page 208). \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment \n\nPlacing other objects in the mobile phone stor- age compartment could constitute a fire haz- ard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. \n\n# Place the mobile phone in stowage compart- ment 1 and connect it to USB port 2 to charge. \n\n* NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- ing them in the mobile phone storage compartment \n\nIf objects are placed in the mobile phone stor- age compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compartment. \n\n84 \n\nSeats and stowage \n\n* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow- age compartment caused by liquids \n\nIf liquids enter the mobile phone stowage com- partment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile \n\nMalfunctions during charging are shown in the media display of the multimedia system. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. \n\nusing clean, lukewarm water. \n\nphone stowage compartment. \n\nInstalling or removing the floor mats \n\nObserve the following notes on wireless charging: R The charging function is only available when \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects \n\nin the driver's footwell \n\nthe drive system has been started. R In some cases, it may not be possible to \n\ncharge small mobile phones at every position of the mobile phone compartment. \n\nR It may not be possible to charge large mobile phones that do not rest in the mobile phone receptacle. \n\nObjects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. \n\nR The mobile phone can warm up during the \n\ncharging process. This depends on the applica- tions (apps) currently running. \n\nR For more efficient charging, the protective case should be removed from the mobile phone. Protective cases designed for wireless charging are an exception. \n\n# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. \n\n# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. \n\nR When charging, the mat should be used if pos- \n\nsible. \n\nCharging the mobile phone wirelessly in the front \n\nRequirements:  R The mobile phone must be suitable for wireless \n\ncharging. \n\n# To install: press pushbuttons 1 onto holders \n\n2. \n\n# To remove: pull the floor mats off holders 2. \n\n# Open the flap of stowage compartment 1 \n\nabove the media display. \n\n# Place the mobile phone as centrally as possi- ble with the display facing upwards on the marked surface of mat 2. When the charging symbol is shown in the mul- timedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. \n\nLight and vision \n\n85 \n\nLighting \n\nNotes on changing the lights when driving abroad \n\nVehicles with halogen or static LED headlamps: Changing the headlamps is not necessary. The legal requirements will also be fulfilled in countries with left and right-hand traffic. \n\n% Leaving the parking lights on for several hours \n\ndrains the battery. If the battery condition of charge is very low, the parking lights will switch off automatically to enable the next vehicle start. \n\n▌Automatic driving lights function \n\nInformation about lighting systems and your responsibility \n\nThe vehicle's various lighting systems are only aids. The vehicle driver is responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibil- ity, statutory conditions and traffic conditions. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility \n\nWhen the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visi- bility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to \n\nL. \n\nLight switch \n\n▌Operating the light switch \n\nThe automatic driving lights are only an aid. Responsibility for vehicle lighting rests with you. Turn the light switch from à to L immedi- ately in the event of fog, snow or spray. Otherwise, the driving light will be temporarily interrupted. To switch the automatic driving lights on: R Turn the light switch to the à position. \n\n# 1 T Activates or deactivates parking \n\nSwitch the power supply on: the parking lights will automatically switch on or off depending on the brightness of the ambient light. The daytime running lights are switched on when the vehicle is started. The parking lights and the low beam also switch on or off depending on the brightness of the ambient light. When the low beam is switched on, the L indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will also switch on. \n\nlights and license plate and instrument lighting. \n\n# 2 à Activates or deactivates automatic \n\n▌Activating/deactivating the fog lights \n\ndriving lights/daytime running lights (preferred light switch position). \n\nRequirements:  R The light switch is in the L or à posi- \n\n# 3 L Activates or deactivates low beam/ \n\ntion. \n\nhigh beam. \n\nR The vehicle has been switched on or started. \n\n# 4  N Activates or deactivates fog light. # 5  R Activates or deactivates rear fog \n\n# To switch the fog light on or off: press button \n\n7. \n\nlight. \n\n# To switch the rear fog light on or off: press but- \n\n# 6 Applies or releases the electric parking \n\nton 6. \n\nbrake (/ page 142). \n\n% If you hear a warning tone when exiting the \n\nvehicle, the lights may still be on. \n\nComply with the country-specific regulations for using the rear fog lamp. \n\n% The turn signal light, the high beam and the \n\nhigh-beam flasher are operated with the com- bination switch (/ page 86). \n\n86 \n\nLight and vision \n\nOperating the combination light switch \n\nWhen significant steering movements are made, the combination switch will automati- cally reset itself. \n\n# To indicate briefly: tap the combination switch briefly in the required direction 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal lamp will flash three times. \n\nSwitching the hazard warning light system on/off \n\n1 High beam 2 Right turn signal light 3 Headlamp flashing 4 Left turn signal light \n\n# Use the combination switch to select the \n\ndesired function. \n\nSwitching on high beam # Switch on the low beam (/ page 85). # Push the combination switch forwards 1. The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will light up. The combination switch will return to its starting position. \n\n% In the à position, the high beam switches on only in darkness and when the vehicle is switched on. \n\n# Press button 1. \n\nIf you operate a turn signal indicator while the haz- ard warning light system is switched on, only the turn signal lamps on the relevant side of the vehi- cle will light up. % The hazard warning light system will work even when the vehicle has been switched off. \n\n# To switch off: push the combination switch for- wards 1 or briefly pull it in the direction of arrow 3 (the action for headlamp flashing switches high beam off). The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will go out. The combination switch will return to its starting position. \n\nCornering light function \n\n% Vehicles with Highbeam Assist: when High- \n\nbeam Assist is active, it controls the activation and deactivation of the high beam (/ page 87). \n\nHeadlamp flashing # Briefly pull the combination switch in the direc- \n\ntion of arrow 3. \n\nThe cornering light improves the illumination of the roadway over a wide angle in the turning direction, e.g. enabling better visibility in tight bends. \n\nTurn signal light # To indicate: push the combination switch in the required direction 2 or 4 until it engages. \n\nLight and vision \n\n87 \n\nThe function is active under the following condi- tions: R The speed is less than 37 mph (60 km/h) and the indicator has been switched on or the steering wheel is turned. \n\nR The speed is between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) and the steering wheel is turned. \n\nThe cornering light may still light up for a short time but is switched off automatically after a maxi- mum of three minutes. % When reverse gear is engaged, the lighting \n\nswitches to the opposite side. \n\nHighbeam Assist \n\nAt speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h), the system will switch to the following setting: R If no other road users are detected, high beam \n\nwill switch on automatically. \n\nAt speeds lower than 16 mph (25 km/h) or if there is sufficient street lighting, the system will switch to the following setting: R High beam will automatically switch off. \n\nSystem limits Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take the road, weather or traffic conditions into consideration. The detection of obstacles may be restricted if: R visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or snow. R the sensors are dirty or covered. \n\n▌Adaptive Highbeam Assist function \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- \n\ntive Highbeam Assist \n\nAdaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, \n\ne.g. by a barrier \n\nAdaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for ensuring correct vehicle lighting in accordance with the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. \n\n▌Switching Highbeam Assist on/off \n\nRequirements:  R The light switch is in the à position. \n\nOn very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic con- ditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. \n\n# To switch on: switch on high beam using the \n\ncombination switch. When the high beam is switched on automati- cally in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the instrument cluster display. # To switch off: switch off high beam using the \n\ncombination switch. \n\nSetting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time \n\nRequirements:  R The light switch is in the à position. \n\nThe Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following settings: R Low beam R High beam \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay \n\n# Set a switch-off delay time. \n\nThe system detects that vehicle lights are approaching in the opposite direction or driving ahead of the vehicle. \n\nWhen the vehicle is switched off, the exterior light- ing will be activated for the set time. \n\n88 \n\nLight and vision \n\nActivating and deactivating the surround lighting \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Light 5 Locator Lighting \n\nAdjusting the interior lighting for body manufac- turer add-on equipment \n\n# Activate or deactivate the function. \n\nThe surround lighting will remain on for 40 sec- onds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting will be deactiva- ted and the automatic driving lights activated. \n\nAdjusting the interior lighting \n\nAdjusting the interior lighting \n\nVariants 1 and 2 combined \n\n1 p Switches the front left reading lamp \n\non/off \n\n2 | Activates/deactivates automatic interior \n\nlighting control \n\n3 c Switches the front interior lighting \n\non/off \n\n4 w Switches the body manufacturer lamps \n\non/off \n\n5 p Switches the front right reading lamp \n\non/off \n\nVersions 1 to 4 \n\n# To switch the front left reading lamp on/off:  \n\npress button 1. \n\n# 1 p Switches the front-left reading lamp \n\non/off \n\n# 2 To switch off automatic interior lighting  \n\ncontrol: press the | button. The interior lighting will switch on automatically if you: R Unlock the vehicle R Open a door \n\n# To deactivate automatic interior lighting con- \n\ntrol: press button 2. Interior lighting control will switch on automati- cally if you do the following, for example: R Unlock the vehicle R Open a door \n\n# To switch the front interior lighting on/off:  \n\npress button 3. \n\n# 3 c Switches the (front) interior lighting \n\non/off \n\n# 4 w Switches the rear passenger com- partment/cargo compartment lamp on/off # 5 p Switches the front-right reading lamp \n\non/off \n\n# To switch body manufacturer lamps on/off:  \n\npress button 4. R Your vehicle may be equipped with a func- tional feedback system: w will light up in red if the body manufacturer lamps are switched on. \n\nR If the body manufacturer lamps have been switched on manually, they will also remain switched on for an extended period of time after locking. \n\nLight and vision \n\n89 \n\n% This period of time is shortened if there is undervoltage in the starter battery. \n\nopens, the passenger compartment will be illuminated (undimmed). \n\n% If the body manufacturer lamps have been \n\nR Driving mode \n\nswitched off automatically to protect the bat- tery, restart the vehicle before switching them on again. \n\n% The body manufacturer lamps can be switched on only when the battery voltage is stable. # To switch the front right reading lamp on/off:  \n\npress button 5. \n\nAdjusting interior lighting on bus equipment \n\nIf all doors are closed and the vehicle is traveling faster than walking pace, the passenger compartment will be illuminated (dimmed). \n\nR Automatic off mode \n\nIf automatic interior lighting control 3 is deactivated, thereby activating automatic off mode, the passenger compartment will be continuously illuminated (dimmed). \n\nWhen the bus function is activated, the modes can be selected via button 5 that switches passenger compartment lighting on/off. Passenger compart- ment lighting will then be deactivated completely. When button 5 is pressed again to switch passenger compartment lighting on/off, the bus function will again be in one of the modes. R If automatic interior lighting control 3 was previously activated, automatic off mode will be inactive again. \n\nR If automatic off mode was not previously acti- vated, either driving or stop mode will be active. \n\n1 i Activates/deactivates the bus function 2 p Switches the front left reading lamp \n\non/off \n\n3 | Activates/deactivates automatic interior \n\nlighting control \n\n4 c Switches the front interior lighting \n\non/off \n\n5 w Switches passenger compartment light- \n\ning on/off \n\n6 p Switches the front right reading lamp \n\non/off \n\n7 j Activates/deactivates reading lighting in \n\nthe passenger compartment \n\n# To activate the bus function: press button 1. \n\nThe LED will light up. The bus function will be in one of the following modes: R Stop mode \n\nIf the vehicle comes to a standstill at a stop, for example, and the passenger door \n\n% The bus function can be operated independ- ently of button 5 that switches passenger compartment lighting on/off. The passenger compartment lighting must not be switched on beforehand. \n\n# To deactivate the bus function: press button \n\n1. The LED will not light up. \n\n# To switch the front left reading lamp on/off:  \n\npress button 2. \n\n# To deactivate automatic interior lighting con- \n\ntrol: press button 3. Interior lighting control will switch on automati- cally if you do the following, for example: R Unlock the vehicle R Open a door \n\n# To switch the front interior lighting on/off:  \n\npress button 4. \n\n# To switch passenger compartment lighting on  \n\nor off: press button 5. \n\n# To switch the front right reading lamp on/off:  \n\npress button 6. \n\n90 \n\nLight and vision \n\n# To activate reading lighting in the passenger  \n\ncompartment: press button 7. The LED will light up. Passengers will be able to switch the reading lamps on and off. \n\nThis may damage the retina in the following sit- uations: R If you look directly into the unfiltered laser beam of the motion detector for an exten- ded period. \n\n# To deactivate reading lighting in the passenger  \n\ncompartment: press button 7. The LED will not light up. Passengers will no longer be able to operate the reading lamps. \n\nR If you look directly into the laser beam of the motion detector with optical instru- ments, such as glasses or magnifying glasses. \n\n# Never look directly into the motion detec- \n\ntor. \n\nSwitching the reading lamp above the passenger seat on and off (bus equipment) \n\n# Press the p button above the passenger \n\nseat. \n\nThe motion detector is located in the cargo com- partment behind the partition, in the middle of the roof. \n\nRear interior lighting \n\n1 Position of motion detector \n\n# 1  Switches rear compartment/cargo com- \n\npartment lamp on or off \n\nMotion detector \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to laser beam \n\nof the motion detector \n\nThe motion detector emits non-visible radiation from LEDs that are classified as class 1M lasers. \n\nIf the vehicle is equipped with a motion detector, the cargo compartment lamp is also activated via the motion detector. If the motion detector detects movement in the cargo compartment while the vehicle is stationary, the cargo compartment lamp will switch on for approximately two minutes. The cargo compartment lamp will be switched on via the motion detector in the following situations: R The vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is applied and you are not depressing the brake pedal. \n\nR Vehicles with automatic transmission: the \n\nselector lever is in position j and you are not depressing the brake pedal. \n\nR The vehicle has not been locked from the out- \n\nside using the key. \n\nIf no change to the vehicle, such as a door open- ing, is detected over several hours, the motion detector will automatically switch off. This prevents the battery from discharging. \n\nLight and vision \n\n91 \n\nSwitching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay \n\n# Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. \n\nIf the function is active, the interior lighting will switch on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or switched off. \n\nfrom top to bottom and back again when the vehi- cle starts. For this to work, low beam needs to have been switched on before the vehicle is star- ted. Bulbs and lamps are major elements in vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure that they are always working. Have the headlamp setting checked regu- larly. If the new light source also does not light up, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nChanging bulbs \n\nInstructions for replacing illuminants \n\nReplacing front light bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts whilst replacing a bulb \n\n▌Overview of illuminant types You can replace the following light sources. \n\nBulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these component parts. # Allow the component parts to cool down \n\nbefore replacing the bulbs. \n\nImportant safety notes R Before changing the bulbs, switch off the vehi- cle's lighting system. This will prevent a short circuit. \n\nR Use only spare bulbs of the same type and with \n\nthe correct voltage. \n\nR Use bulbs only in enclosed lamps that have \n\nbeen designed for them. \n\nR Do not use any illuminant that has been drop- ped or has scratches on its glass tube. Other- wise, the illuminant may explode. \n\nR The illuminant may explode under the following \n\nHalogen headlamps \n\n1 High beam/daytime running lights: \n\nH15 55 W/15 W \n\n2 Low beam/perimeter light: H7 55 W/W 5 W 3 Turn signal light: 3457 NAK  28 W \n\nconditions: \n\n▌Replacing halogen headlamps \n\n- \n- \n- \n\nif it is hot and you touch it if you drop it if you scratch it \n\nRequirements:  R Low beam: bulb type H7 55 W R High beam/daytime running lamps: bulb type \n\nR Stains on the glass tube will reduce the service life of the illuminant. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube with alcohol or spirits while it is cold and wipe it down with a lint-free cloth. R Protect light bulbs from humidity and do not \n\nH15 55 W/15 W \n\nR Perimeter lights: bulb type W 5 W R Turn signal lights: bulb type 3457 NAK  28 W \n\nbring them into contact with liquids. Always ensure the bulbs are firmly secured. If your vehicle is equipped with LED modules, you can check this as follows: the light cone will move \n\n92 \n\nLight and vision \n\n▌Additional turn signal light \n\nRequirements:  R Additional turn signal light (all-wheel drive vehi- \n\ncles): bulb type P 21 W \n\n1 Low beam/perimeter light housing cover 2 High beam/daytime running lamps housing \n\ncover \n\n3 Turn signal light socket \n\n# Switch off the lighting system. # Low beam/perimeter light: remove housing \n\ncover 1 towards the rear. \n\n# Pull out the socket towards the rear. # Remove the bulb from the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket such that \n\n# Switch off the lighting system. # Unscrew screws1 and remove light lens 2. # Gently turn the light source counter-clockwise \n\nand take it out of the socket. \n\n# Insert the new light source into the socket and \n\nturn it clockwise. \n\nthe base of the bulb rests fully against the base of the socket. \n\n# Position light lens2 and tighten screws1. \n\n# Align and insert the socket. # Attach housing cover 1. # High beam/daytime running lamps: remove \n\nhousing cover 2 towards the rear. \n\n# Turn the socket counter-clockwise and pull it \n\nout. \n\nReplacing rear light bulbs (Cargo Van and Passenger Van) \n\n▌Overview of rear bulb types (Cargo Van and Passenger Van) You can replace the following bulbs. \n\n# Remove the bulb from the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket such that \n\nthe base of the bulb rests fully against the base of the socket. \n\n# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise. # Attach housing cover 2. # Turn signal light:  # Turn socket 3 counter-clockwise and remove \n\nit. \n\n# Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and \n\ntake it out of the socket. \n\n# Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it \n\nclockwise. \n\n# Insert socket 3 and turn it clockwise. \n\nVehicles with standard tail lamps \n\n1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light: P 21 W \n\nLight and vision \n\n93 \n\n2 Backing up light: P 21 W 3 License plate lamp: W 5 W 4 Rear fog light: P 21 W \n\n# Switch off the lighting system. # Open the rear-end door. \n\nYou can replace the following bulbs. \n\nVehicles with partial LED tail lamps \n\n1 Backing up light: P 21 W 2 License plate lamp: W 5 W 3 Rear fog light: P 21 W \n\n▌Changing the tail lamps (Cargo Van and Passenger Van) \n\nRequirements:  R Brake lights/tail lights/perimeter lights: bulb \n\ntype P 21 W \n\nR Backing up lights: bulb type P 21 W R Rear fog lights: bulb type P 21 W \n\n# To remove: loosen screws 1 and pull out the \n\ntail lamp in the direction of the arrow. # Remove the plug from bulb mount 3. # Loosen screws 2 and remove bulb mount 3 \n\nfrom the tail lamp. \n\n# Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and \n\ntake it out of the socket. \n\n# Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it \n\nclockwise. \n\n# To install: set bulb mount 3 on the tail lamp \n\nand screw in screws 2. \n\n# Press the plug into bulb mount 3. # Insert the tail lamp and screw in screws 1. \n\n1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light 2 Backing up light 3 Rear fog light \n\n94 \n\nLight and vision \n\n▌License plate lamp \n\nRequirements:  R License plate lamp: light bulb type W 5 W \n\n5 Backing up light: P 21 W 6 Rear fog light (driver's side): P 21 W 7 License plate lamp: R 5 W \n\n▌Replacing the tail lamps on the chassis \n\n# Switch off the lighting system. # Place a screwdriver, for example, at opening \n\n2 between lamp 3 and panel 1 and care- fully pry off lamp 3. \n\nRequirements:  R Rear fog lights: bulb type P 21 W R License plate lighting: bulb type R 5 W R Backing up lights: bulb type P 21 W R Turn signal lights: bulb type PY 21 W R Clearance lamps: bulb type R 5 W R Brake lights: bulb type P 21 W R Tail lights: bulb type R 5 W \n\n# Remove lamp 3 from panel 1. # Rotate the bulb holder by around 45° and \n\ndetach it from the lamp. \n\n# Remove the light bulb. # Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. # Insert the bulb holder into the lamp and rotate \n\nit by around 45°. \n\n# Insert the lamp into the panel opening until it \n\nengages. \n\nReplacing rear light bulbs (chassis) \n\n▌Overview of rear light source types (chassis) You can replace the following light sources. \n\n1 Light lens 2 Screws 3 Rear fog light 4 License plate lamp 5 Backing up light 6 Turn signal light 7 Clearance lamp 8 Brake light 9 Tail light \n\n# Switch off the lighting system. # Unscrew screws 2 and remove light lens 1. # Remove the plug from the bulb mount. # Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and \n\ntake it out of the socket. \n\nVehicles with standard tail lamps \n\n1 Clearance lamp: R 5 W 2 Tail light: R 5 W 3 Brake light: P 21 W 4 Turn signal lights: PY 21 W \n\n# Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it \n\nclockwise. \n\n# Position light lens 1 and tighten screws 2. \n\nLight and vision \n\n95 \n\nReplacing interior light bulbs \n\nWindshield wipers \n\n▌Replacing rear interior lamps \n\nSwitching the windshield wipers on and off \n\nRequirements:  % For the standard bulb failure indicator function to work correctly, only lights bulbs must be used that are the same type and power as those installed during production. \n\n1 î Single wipe / wiping with washer fluid 1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal \n\nVehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping, normal \n\n# Switch off the interior lighting. # Press in catch spring of lens 1 with a suitable object e.g. a screwdriver, and then lever off the lens with the lamp housing. \n\n# To pull back lens from the lamp housing: press \n\n3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent \n\nVehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping, frequent \n\n4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast \n\nthe lugs of lens 2 inwards. \n\n# Remove light bulb 3 from the lamp housing. # Insert the new light bulb. # Insert the lens in the lamp housing until it \n\nengages. \n\n# Place the lens with the lamp housing in posi- \n\ntion and engage it. \n\n# Turn the combination switch to the corre- \n\nsponding position 1 – 5. \n\n# Single wipe/washing: press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer fluid \n\n96 \n\nLight and vision \n\nSwitching the rear window wiper on and off \n\nReplacing the wiper blades  % If the wiper blades are worn out, they will no longer wipe the windshield properly. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring and fall. \n\n1 ô Single wipe/wash 2 è Intermittent wiping \n\n# Single wipe: press button 1 to the pressure \n\npoint. \n\n# Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 \n\nbeyond the pressure point. \n\n# To switch intermittent wiping on or off: press \n\n# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield. # Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade \n\naway from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go. \n\nbutton 2. The è symbol will appear on the instrument cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on. \n\n# Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the \n\narrow until it engages. \n\n# Fold the wiper blade back onto the wiper arm. # Remove the wiper blade 1 from the wiper \n\nReplacing the windshield wiper blades \n\narm. \n\n# Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nwiper arm 3. \n\nwindshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced \n\nIf the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. \n\nWhen doing so, take into account the different lengths of the wiper blades: R Driver's side: long wiper blade R Front passenger side: short wiper blade \n\n# Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages. # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from using the \n\nwindshield wipers when the hood is open \n\nReplacing the windshield wiper blades (WET WIPER SYSTEM) \n\nIf the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood. \n\n& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the \n\nwindshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced \n\nIf the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. \n\nLight and vision \n\n97 \n\n# Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. \n\n# Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages. # Fold the wiper blade back onto the wiper arm. # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from using the \n\nwindshield wipers when the hood is open \n\nReplacing rear window wiper blades \n\nIf the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood. \n\nReplacing the wiper blades  % If the wiper blades are worn out, they will no longer wipe the windshield properly. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring and fall. \n\n# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the rear window. # Press both retaining clips 2 together in the direction of the arrow and swivel the wiper blade away from the wiper arm. \n\n# Pull wiper blade 1 upwards out of the holder \n\non wiper arm 3. \n\n# Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on \n\nwiper arm 3. \n\n# Push new wiper blade 1 onto wiper arm 3 \n\nuntil the retaining clips engage. \n\n# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield. # Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade \n\n# Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the rear window. \n\naway from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go. \n\nMirrors \n\nOperating the outside mirrors \n\n# Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the \n\narrow until it engages. \n\n# Remove wiper blade 1 from the wiper arm in \n\nthe direction of arrow 4. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion \n\n# Carefully remove hose 5 from the wiper \n\nblade. \n\n# Attach hose 5 to the new wiper blade. # Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on \n\nwiper arm 3. \n\nYou could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head \n\nrestraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion \n\nR If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- \n\nWhen doing so, take into account the different lengths of the wiper blades: R Driver's side: long wiper blade R Front passenger side: short wiper blade \n\ncle is in motion \n\n# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, \n\n98 \n\nLight and vision \n\nsteering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. \n\n# Fold the outside mirrors in and out elec- \n\ntrically only. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- \n\n# Fold in the outside mirrors before wash- ing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. \n\njudgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror \n\n# Before setting off, switch on the power supply \n\nThe outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoulder to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you. \n\nor the vehicle. \n\n# To fold in or out: briefly press button 2. # To select: use button 1 or 3 to select the \n\noutside mirror to be adjusted. \n\n# To set: use button 4 to set the position of the \n\nmirror glass. \n\n# To engage an outside mirror that has been  \n\nAdjusting the outside mirrors manually # Adjust the outside mirrors to the correct posi- \n\ntion manually. \n\n# To engage an outside mirror that has been  \n\npushed out of position: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage in position. The outside mirror is set in the correct position. \n\npushed out of position: push the outside mirror into position manually. \n\nAdjusting the outside mirrors electrically \n\nHeating the outside mirrors # Vehicles without a rear window heater: at low temperatures, the mirror heater will switch on automatically once the vehicle has been star- ted. \n\n# Vehicles with a rear window heater: at low tem- peratures, the mirror heater will switch on automatically once the vehicle has been star- ted. The mirror heater can also be switched on together with the rear window heater using the rear window heater button. \n\nUsing the digital inside rearview mirror \n\nExample image \n\n* NOTE Damage to the electric outside mir- \n\nrors \n\nThe vehicle may be equipped with a digital inside rearview mirror. This uses a camera on top of the roof at the rear to provide a better view to the rear. The inside rearview mirror can be used either as a standard inside rearview mirror or as a display. To prevent glare from the digital inside rearview mirror, first set the digital inside rearview mirror as the standard inside rearview mirror. \n\nIf you fold or unfold the electric outside mirrors by hand, you may damage the outside mirrors and the outside mirrors will not engage prop- erly. If the outside mirrors are not folded in when the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash, the brushes may forcibly fold in and damage the outside mirrors. \n\nLight and vision \n\n99 \n\nDigital image noise may occur on the display under certain circumstances in unfavorable ambient light. Certain types of sunlight, e.g. sun low on the hori- zon or light from another intense light source, can reduce the display's contrast and cause it to become too bright. In such situations, objects on the display may be obscured or difficult to see. In these cases, be particularly careful and adapt your driving style accordingly. Drivers must always wear the necessary personal visual aids required for them to drive a vehicle. Drivers with presbyopia (age-related long-sighted- ness) should, if necessary, wear visual aids with multifocal lenses to be sufficiently able to see traf- fic including via the displays. % If the camera on top of the roof at the rear is dirty, the image may be impaired. In this case, clean the camera manually with a damp cloth. Observe the notes on cleaning the digital inside rearview mirror (/ page 224). # To use the standard inside rearview mirror:  \n\n# To activate, put the vehicle in reverse gear or \n\npress button 5. \n\n# To deactivate, take the vehicle out of reverse \n\ngear or press button 5 again. \n\nError mode of the digital inside rearview mirror If a system error occurs, e.g. if the camera fails, a crossed-out camera will appear at the top left of the display and no camera image will be visible in the mirror. # Switch to the standard inside rearview mirror if \n\nthere is a system error. \n\nIf the vehicle is equipped with a rear view camera with image in the inside rearview mirror and a sys- tem error occurs, a crossed out camera with the number 2 will appear on the left side of the display. In this case, no camera image is available for maneuvering. \n\nSetting anti-glare mode for the inside rearview mir- ror \n\nmove the switch to position 1. \n\n# To use the display: move the switch to position \n\n2. \n\nAdjusting the display brightness % The digital inside rearview mirror is equipped with light sensors on the front and back and automatically adjusts the brightness of the dis- play to the ambient light. Do not cover the light sensors, e.g. with a sticker. \n\n# Press menu button 3 once. # Press button 4 to reduce the display bright- \n\nness. \n\nor # Press button 5 to increase the display bright- \n\nness. \n\n# Fold anti-glare lever 1 in the direction of the \n\narrow. \n\nAdjusting the angle of the camera # Press menu button 3 twice. # Press button 4 to move the angle down- \n\nwards. \n\nor # Press button 5 to move the angle upwards. \n\nActivating and deactivating the rear view camera image The vehicle may be equipped with a rear view cam- era with image in the inside rearview mirror. \n\n100 Climate control \n\nOverview of climate control systems \n\nHeating system overview \n\n1 Sets the temperature 2 / Switches the rear passenger compart- \n\nment heating on/off \n\n3 ¤ Switches the rear window defroster \n\non/off (/ page 105) \n\n4 O Switches footwell air distribution on/off 5 ¬ Switches windshield demisting on/off \n\n(/ page 104) \n\n6 Vehicles with stationary heater or heater boos- ter: & switches the stationary heater or heater booster on/off (/ page 107) \n\n7 Sets the airflow % The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activated. \n\nClimate control 101 \n\nTEMPMATIC overview \n\n1 w Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 K Sets the airflow 4 Î Vehicles with windshield heaters: switches the windshield heater on/off (/ page 105) \n\n5 Vehicles with stationary heaters or booster \n\nheaters: & switches the stationary heater or booster heater on/off (/ page 107) 6 Vehicles with a rear window defroster: ¤ switches the rear window defroster on/off (/ page 105) \n\n7 h Switches air-recirculation mode on/off \n\n(/ page 104) \n\n8 ¬ Switches windshield demisting on/off \n\n(/ page 104) \n\n9 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 104) A ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off \n\n(/ page 103) \n\nB / Vehicles with dual-zone climate control systems: adjusts the rear passenger compart- ment climate control/heating (indicator lamp flashes) (/ page 103) \n\n% The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activated. \n\n102 Climate control \n\n3-zone automatic climate control overview \n\n1 w Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 K Sets the airflow 4 Î Vehicles with windshield heater: switches the windshield heater on/off (/ page 105) \n\n5 Vehicles with stationary heaters or booster \n\nheaters: & switches the stationary heater or booster heater on/off (/ page 107) 6 Vehicles with a rear window heater: ¤ switches the rear window heater on/off (/ page 105) \n\n7 h Switches air-recirculation mode on/off \n\n(/ page 104) \n\n8 ¬ Switches windshield defrosting on/off \n\n(/ page 104) \n\n9 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 104) A ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off \n\n(/ page 103) \n\nB à Sets climate control to automatic mode, front (/ page 103) and rear (/ page 103) C 0 Activates/deactivates synchronization \n\nOperating climate control systems \n\nSwitching the climate control system on/off \n\n# To switch on: set the airflow to 1 or higher on \n\nthe front-compartment menu. \n\n# To switch off: set the airflow to 0 or OFF on the \n\nfront-compartment menu. OFF will appear on the climate control system display. \n\n% When the climate control system is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch the climate control system off only briefly. \n\n% If the front-compartment system has already been switched on and the rear passenger compartment system has been switched off, you can switch it on by turning up the blower on the rear passenger compartment menu. If the front-compartment system is switched on, the rear passenger compartment system will automatically switch on as well. \n\n(/ page 104) \n\nD / Vehicles with dual-zone climate control systems: adjusts the rear-compartment cli- mate control/heating (indicator lamp flashes) (/ page 103) \n\n% The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activated. \n\nClimate control 103 \n\nSetting the rear-compartment climate control \n\nSwitching the A/C function on/off \n\nRequirements:  R The climate control system has been switched \n\nRequirements:  R The climate control system has been switched \n\non (/ page 102). \n\non (/ page 102). \n\nSetting the temperature and airflow with dual-zone and 3-zone automatic climate control: # Press the / button. \n\nThe indicator lamp on the / button and the / symbol on the climate control system display will flash. The display will switch to the temperature and the blower on the rear menu. \n\nThe A/C function controls the climate and dries the air inside the vehicle. # Press the ¿ button. % Switch off the A/C function only briefly. Other- wise, the windows could fog up more quickly. % Condensation may leak from the underside of the vehicle in cooling mode. This is not a sign of a defect. \n\n# Use the w and K rocker switches to set the required temperature and airflow on the rear-compartment menu. \n\nAutomatically regulating climate control \n\n% If there are significant differences between the temperature settings of the front and rear sys- tems, these cannot be regulated accurately. % If the rear-compartment climate control has been switched off, you can switch it on auto- matically by pressing the 0 button. \n\nDepending on the vehicle equipment, climate con- trol will switch on the roof-mounted air condition- ing system or rear-compartment heating as required: R Vehicles with a roof-mounted air conditioning  system: the rear compartment can only be cooled. \n\nR Vehicles with rear-compartment heating: the rear compartment can only be heated. \n\nSwitching off rear-compartment climate control via dual-zone and 3-zone automatic climate control: # Press the / button. # If the indicator lamp on the / button and \n\nthe / symbol on the climate control system display flash, set the airflow to 0 on the rear- compartment menu. \n\n% Indicator lamp on: rear-compartment climate \n\nRequirements:  R The climate control system has been switched \n\non (/ page 102). \n\nSwitching on automatic climate control In automatic mode, the temperature, airflow and air distribution are regulated and kept constant. # Press the à button. \n\nThe display will show the temperature. The air- flow and air distribution will disappear from the display. If the rear passenger compartment climate control has been switched on, the setting for the rear passenger compartment will be car- ried over. \n\nSwitching off automatic climate control # Use the K rocker switch to change the air- flow setting or the _ button to change the air distribution (/ page 104). The other setting will remain unaffected by the change. \n\nAutomatically controlling climate control in the rear compartment \n\ncontrol has been switched on. Indicator lamp off: rear-compartment climate control has been switched off. Indicator lamp flashes: the setting mode of the rear-compartment climate control is active. \n\nRequirements:  R Rear-compartment climate control has been \n\nswitched on (/ page 103). \n\nIn automatic mode, the temperature, airflow and air distribution are regulated and kept constant. # Press the / button. # Press the  à button. \n\n104 Climate control \n\n% Even if the front-compartment system is in \n\n% If the rear passenger compartment climate \n\nautomatic mode, the rear-compartment sys- tem can exit automatic mode if you adjust the blower on the rear-compartment menu. % If the air is cooled and the driver's, front \n\ncontrol has been switched off, you can switch it on automatically by pressing the 0 but- ton. \n\npassenger or sliding door is opened, the rear air conditioning system blower will be turned down after around 15 minutes. When all doors have been closed again, the blower will be reset to the previous setting after around one minute. \n\nDefrosting the windows \n\nWindows fogged up on the inside # Vehicles with a heating system: press the \n\n ¬ button. When windshield defrosting is switched on, the temperature and airflow cannot be adjusted. \n\nInformation on the air distribution settings \n\nThe symbols on the display indicate the vents through which the air is being directed. TEMPMATIC b Defroster and center air vents _ All vents P Center vents S Center and footwell vents \n\nTHERMOTRONIC ¯ Defroster vent b Defroster and center air vents _ All vents a Defroster and footwell vents P Center vents S Center and footwell vents O Footwell vents \n\n# Close the front air vents (/ page 105). # Vehicles with TEMPMATIC or THERMOTRONIC: press the ¿ button and, if necessary, use the _ button to direct the air onto the windshield ¯. \n\n# Increase the airflow as necessary and close \n\nthe front air vents (/ page 105). # If the windows remain fogged up: press \n\nthe ¬ button. When windshield defrosting is switched on, the temperature and airflow cannot be adjusted. ¬ or no symbol will appear on the climate control system display. \n\n# Vehicles with a windshield heater: press \n\nthe Î button. \n\nDepending on operation, you can achieve faster defrosting and drying of the windshield with the following settings: R Use the _ button to direct air onto the \n\nwindshield ¯. \n\nSetting the air distribution \n\nR Set the temperature w and the airflow \n\nRequirements:  R The climate control system is switched on. \n\n# Press the  _ button repeatedly until the \n\ndesired air distribution appears in the air con- ditioning system display. \n\nK to maximum using the rocker switches. \n\nR Close the front air vents (/ page 105). R Switch on the windshield heater Î \n\n(/ page 105). \n\nR Switch off the rear-compartment climate con- \n\ntrol /(/ page 103). \n\nSwitching the synchronization function on/off \n\nRequirements:  R The climate control system has been switched \n\non (/ page 102). \n\nThe synchronization function controls the climate control function centrally. The settings for the tem- perature and airflow in the front zone are automati- cally adopted for the rear zone. # Press the 0 button. \n\nR For vehicles with heating systems: set the air distribution so that LEDs O and ¬ are off (/ page 100). \n\nWindows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers (/ page 95). \n\nSwitching air-recirculation mode on/off \n\n# Press the h button. \n\nThe interior air will be recirculated. \n\nClimate control 105 \n\nAir-recirculation mode will switch off automatically. % When air-recirculation mode is switched on, \n\n# If necessary, direct the airflow to another \n\narea of the vehicle interior. \n\nthe windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. \n\nAir-recirculation mode will automatically switch on in the following cases: R In high outside temperatures R While the vehicle is driving through a tunnel \n\n(vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control and navigation only) \n\nR When the wipe-wash function is switched on \n\n(/ page 95) \n\nThe indicator lamp on the h button will not light up in this case. After a maximum of 30 minutes, outside air will automatically be intro- duced again. \n\nSwitching the windshield heater on and off \n\n% In the event of high outside temperatures, the \n\nwindshield heater may not switch on. \n\n# Press the Î button. \n\nIf the indicator lamp on the button lights up, the windshield heater has switched on. % The windshield heater switches off automati- \n\n# To open or close: hold the center 2 of the air vent 1 and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go. \n\n# To set the air direction: hold the center 2 of the air vent 1 and swivel it upwards, down- wards, to the left or to the right. \n\ncally after a few minutes. \n\n% If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible to switch the windshield heater on. If the battery voltage becomes too low while the windshield heater is in operation, the wind- shield heater will switch off automatically. \n\nSwitching the rear window heater on or off \n\n# Press the ¤ button. \n\nIf the indicator lamp lights up, the rear window heater is switched on. \n\nOperating air vents \n\nAdjusting the front-compartment air vents \n\n# To open or close: turn the adjustment \n\nwheels 1 on the high-power air vents to the left or right as far as they will go. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to \n\nbeing too close to the air vents \n\nVery hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. \n\n% Cooled air will flow out of the high-power air vents. Heating will not be possible. Open the high-power air vents only in summer during cooling mode and keep them closed in winter. \n\n106 Climate control \n\nAdjusting air vents in the roof air duct \n\nIn vehicles with a rear air conditioning system, adjustable air vents have been integrated in the roof air duct. # To adjust the airflow: if necessary, open or close the air flaps in the air vents 1. \n\nDepending on the vehicle equipment, there will be an air duct or a heater with additional air vents in the rear footwell on the left-hand side 1. No objects may be placed there. Occupants must maintain a sufficient distance due to the warm air flow and air intake. \n\n# To adjust the air distribution: turn the air vents \n\n1 to the required position. \n\nAuxiliary heating \n\nNotes about auxiliary heating \n\nInformation about air vents in the rear passenger compartment \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- \n\nous exhaust gases \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to \n\nbeing too close to the air vents \n\nVery hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. \n\nIf the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. # Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extrac- tion system, e.g. in garages. \n\n# If necessary, direct the airflow to another \n\narea of the vehicle interior. \n\n# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running. \n\n# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases \n\nFlammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # When the stationary heater is switched \n\non, make sure that: \n\nClimate control 107 \n\nR Hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials. R The exhaust gas can flow out of the \n\nstationary heater exhaust pipe unhin- dered. \n\nR The exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating \n\nIf the auxiliary heating is not used for a long time, it may be damaged. # Switch on the auxiliary heating at least once a month for about ten minutes. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating due \n\nto overheating \n\nIf the flow of hot air is blocked, the auxiliary heating may overheat and switch off. # Do not block the flow of hot air. \n\nheating can work. The auxiliary heating automati- cally adapts its operating mode to the outside tem- perature and weather. It is therefore possible that the auxiliary heating may switch from ventilation to heating mode or from heating to ventilation mode. When the engine is running, auxiliary ventilation is not active. Auxiliary heating automatically switches itself off after a maximum of 50 minutes. You can- not use the \"auxiliary ventilation\" operating mode to cool the air inside the vehicle to below the out- side temperature. Auxiliary heating helps to heat up the vehicle while the engine is running and at low outside temperatures. Operating the hot-water auxiliary heater draws power from the vehicle battery. Therefore, drive a reasonably long distance after heating or ventilat- ing the vehicle twice in succession at most. Auxiliary heating can be activated only at tempera- tures below 40 °F (4.5 °C). \n\n▌Switching the hot-water auxiliary heater on/off with the button \n\n% Vehicles with a modified fuel display: if an \n\nexternally operated consumer is connected via the cable for the auxiliary heating, this is not taken into consideration on the \"remaining range\" display of the on-board computer. In this case, observe the fuel display. The fuel display reflects the actual fill level. \n\nIf you are transporting hazardous materials, com- ply with the relevant safety regulations. Place objects a sufficient distance from the auxiliary heating outlet opening. Auxiliary heating works independently of the engine and complements the climate control sys- tem in the vehicle. Auxiliary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the set temperature. \n\nRequirements:  R The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level. \n\n# To switch the auxiliary heating on and off:  \n\npress the & button. \n\n# To activate the specified temperature: switch on the vehicle and press the & button. # To deactivate the specified temperature: press \n\nthe & button. \n\n# To set the specified temperature: set the tem- perature using the w button and press the & button. \n\nColors of the indicator lamp: R Blue: stationary ventilation has been switched \n\non. \n\nR Red: the stationary heater has been switched \n\nHot-water auxiliary heater \n\non. \n\n▌Function of the hot-water auxiliary heater The hot-water auxiliary heater complements your vehicle's climate control system, and has a heater booster, auxiliary heating and auxiliary ventilation function. In addition, the auxiliary heating system heats the engine coolant to protect the engine and save fuel during the warming-up phase. The auxili- ary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the set temperature. It is not dependent on the heat output of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must have been filled above the reserve fuel level so that the auxiliary \n\nR Yellow: a departure time has been preselected. \n\nThe stationary heater or stationary ventilation switches off after a maximum of 50 minutes. # To activate the heater booster mode: switch on \n\nthe vehicle and press the & button. # To switch off heater booster mode: press \n\nthe & button. \n\n108 Climate control \n\n▌Setting the hot-water auxiliary heater using the on-board computer \n\nRequirements:  R The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level. R The vehicle is switched on. \n\nFAIL appears on the remote control display ¯ \n\nPossible cause: R The auxiliary heating has malfunctioned. \n\n# Have the auxiliary heating checked at a quali- \n\nfied specialist workshop. \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Settings  5 Heating \n\nOperating cargo compartment ventilation \n\nSetting the switch-on time # Select Settings. # Select the desired departure time. \n\nActivating the departure time # Activate the departure time by ticking the box. % Ensure that A, B and C each correspond to a \n\nprogrammed departure time. \n\n% The programmed time will remain set only until \n\nthe next time the vehicle is started. \n\nSelecting a programmed time # Set the required programmed time – A, B or C. \n\n% The required programmed time – A, B or C – will appear only if the box to activate the departure time is ticked. \n\n# Select the required programmed time by swip- \n\ning left or right, e.g. A, B or C. \n\n▌Rectifying problems with the hot-water auxiliary heater \n\nFAIL ¨ appears on the remote control display Possible cause: R Signal transmission between transmitter and \n\nreceiver is malfunctioning. \n\nIf your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator, you can admit fresh air to the cargo compartment, or extract air from it as well. # Switch on the vehicle. # To switch on and extract: press switch 1 at \n\nthe top. The roof ventilator will remove used air from the cargo compartment. \n\n# To switch on and admit fresh air: press switch \n\n2 at the bottom. The roof ventilator will feed fresh air into the cargo compartment. \n\n# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, \n\nmoving closer if necessary. \n\n# To switch off: place the switch in the center \n\nposition. \n\nFAIL appears on the remote control display \n\nPossible cause: R The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. \n\n# Charge the starter battery. \n\nPossible cause: R The fuel tank is not filled up to the reserve \n\nlevel. \n\n# Refuel at the nearest gas station. \n\nDriving \n\nSwitching on power supply or vehicle with the start/stop button \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust \n\ngases \n\nCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable \n\nmaterial in the engine compartment or the exhaust system \n\nFlammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. \n\nDriving and parking 109 \n\nRequirements:  R The key is in detection range of the antenna (/ page 47) and the key battery is not dis- charged. \n\nR In addition, the following applies for vehicles with a reduced detection range: The key is located in the key holder provided in the driv- er's cup holder (/ page 80). \n\n# To switch on the power supply: Press button \n\n1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers. \n\nThe power supply is switched off again when one of the following conditions is met: R The driver's door is open. R You press button 1 twice. \n\n# To switch on the vehicle: Press button 1 \n\ntwice. \n\nThe indicator lamps appear in the instrument clus- ter. The vehicle is switched off again if one of the fol- lowing conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes. R You press button 1 once. \n\n110 Driving and parking \n\nStarting the engine \n\n▌Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press but- tons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example \n\nR Switch systems on or off and endanger \n\nother road users \n\nUnsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat- \n\ntended. \n\n# Always correctly secure animals while \n\ndriving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier. \n\nRequirements:  R The key is in detection range of the antenna (/ page 47) and the key battery is not dis- charged. \n\nR In addition, the following applies for vehicles with a reduced detection range: The key is located in the key holder provided in the driv- er's cup holder (/ page 80). \n\n# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the \n\ntransmission to position j or i. \n\n# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 \n\nonce. \n\n# If the vehicle does not start: Switch off unnec- essary consumers and press button 1 once. # If the vehicle still does not start and the display messagePlace Key in Marked Space See  Operator's Manual appears in the instrument cluster: Start the vehicle in emergency opera- tion mode. \n\n▌Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services \n\n▌Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey % Remote engine start may not be available in all Sprinter models. The availability of the func- tion for the Sprinter depends on the services offered by \"Mercedes me\". \n\nEnsure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting by smartphone. \n\nR It is safe to start and run the engine where \n\nyour vehicle is parked. \n\nR The fuel tank is sufficiently filled. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. \n\nDriving and parking 111 \n\n▌Starting vehicle (Remote Online) \n\n& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine \n\n▌Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nLimbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin- tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. \n\nRequirements  R The park position j is engaged. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched \n\noff. \n\nR The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\n# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. \n\nvehicle. \n\nAfter every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. \n\nYou can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. The vehicle must be started once with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. You can stop the vehi- cle again at any time. % Further information can be found in the smart- \n\nphone app. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\nIf the vehicle does not start and the Place Key in  Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears in the instrument cluster, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. \n\nTo prevent the engine from starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the soft top. \n\n# Remove key 1 from your key ring. # Insert key 1 in the slot. \n\nThe vehicle is started after a brief time. \n\n112 Driving and parking \n\n# Leave the key inserted during the entire jour- \n\nDriving tips \n\nney. If you pull key 1 out of the slot, the engine continues to run. \n\n# Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist \n\nworkshop. \n\nIf the vehicle does not start: # Leave key 1 in the slot. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle with the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button. \n\nBreaking-in notes \n\nProtect the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) by: R Driving at varying road and engine speeds. R Shifting to the next highest gear at the very lat- est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. \n\n▌Notes on driving \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects \n\nin the driver's footwell \n\nObjects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. \n\n# When using floor mats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the ped- als. \n\n# Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets \n\non top of one another. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- \n\nrect footwear \n\nR Avoiding stress on the vehicle such as driving \n\nat full throttle. \n\nR Not shifting manually to a lower gear to brake. R After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), gradually \n\nincreasing the engine speed and accelerating the vehicle up to full speed. \n\nR Vehicles with automatic transmission: not \n\ndepressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). \n\nIncorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers \n\nThere is a risk of an accident. # Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. \n\nThis also applies if the engine or parts of the drive- train have been replaced. Also observe the following breaking-in notes: R After the vehicle has been delivered or after \n\nrepairs, the sensor system of the ESP® driving safety system adjusts itself automatically after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. \n\nR New or exchanged brakepads, brake discs and tires only provide optimal braking and bonding after several hundred kilometers. Until then, compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure to the brake pedal. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is \n\nswitched off while driving \n\nIf you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the vehicle while driv- \n\ning. \n\n& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust \n\ngases \n\nCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. \n\nDriving and parking 113 \n\n# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- \n\nous exhaust gases \n\nIf the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running. \n\n# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. \n\nR Observe the legal requirements for the country \n\nin which you are driving. \n\nR While driving, only operate mobile communica- tions equipment when the traffic conditions permit it. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to over- \n\nheated brake system \n\nIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal during while driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not press the brake pedal and accel- \n\nerator pedal simultaneously while driving. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alcohol and drugs while driving \n\nDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. \n\nOn long and steep downhill gradients, you should change down to a lower gear in good time. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. \n\n* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by \n\ncontinuously depressing the brake pedal \n\n# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- \n\nously whilst driving. \n\n# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury from \n\noperating mobile communications equip- ment \n\nIf you operate mobile communication equip- ment when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The probability of a serious or even fatal acci- dent increases greatly if you operate mobile communication equipment when driving. # Only operate mobile communication \n\nequipment when the vehicle is stationary. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine \n\nwhen pulling away \n\n# Do not warm up the engine while the \n\nvehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- ately. \n\n# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter \n\ndue to non-combusted fuel \n\nFor your own safety, observe the following points when operating mobile communications equip- ment: \n\nThe engine is not running smoothly and is mis- firing. Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter. \n\n114 Driving and parking \n\n# Only depress the accelerator pedal \n\n▌Notes on the limit speed \n\nslightly. \n\n# Have the cause rectified immediately at a \n\nqualified specialist workshop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance \n\nIf the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear- \n\nance. \n\n# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. \n\n# Observe the changed vehicle height with \n\nadd-on roof equipment. \n\n▌Exhaust emission monitoring Specific engine systems are designed to keep poi- sonous components of exhaust gases within legal limits. These systems only work optimally if they are maintained exactly according to manufacturer's specifications. It is for this reason that all work on the engine should only be performed by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz Center technicians. Under no circumstances should engine settings be changed. In addition, all specific maintenance work must be performed at regular intervals and in compliance with the service regulations of the dealer named in the imprint. Refer to the Mainte- nance Booklet for details. \n\n▌Notes on short-distance trips If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-dis- tance driving, fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and cause engine damage. If you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20 minutes every 480 km (300 miles). This facilitates the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter. \n\nExceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed \n\nrating required for your vehicle. \n\nYou must find out about the maximum permissible speed for the tires (tire and tire pressure). Observe the legal requirements for tires for the country in which you are staying. % Vehicles with tachograph: due to the different certification requirements for the tachograph and instrument cluster, the displayed speeds may differ. Please keep to the speed display in the instrument cluster. \n\nYou can permanently limit the speed of your vehi- cle. Mercedes-Benz recommends a qualified specialist workshop for programming the limit speed. Note that you cannot exceed a programmed limit speed when overtaking. On downhill gradients, the limit speed may be exceeded. Apply the brakes if necessary. Display messages indicate that you are approach- ing the limit speed. % For buses, the speed is limited to 60 mph \n\n(100 km/h) at the factory. When overtaking, bear in mind that the limit speed cannot be exceeded. \n\n▌Information about driving abroad \n\nService An extensive Mercedes-Benz service is also availa- ble abroad. Nevertheless, please remember that services facilities or spare parts may not be availa- ble immediately. The relevant workshop directories are available from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\nFuel In some countries, only fuels with an increased sul- fur content are available. \n\nDriving and parking 115 \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends installing a fuel filter with a water separator for countries with an increased water content in diesel. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Infor- mation about fuel can be found in the \"Fuel\" sec- tion (/ page 276). \n\n▌Information about transport by rail Transporting your vehicle by rail may be subject to certain restrictions or require special measures to be taken in some countries due to varying tunnel heights and loading standards. You can obtain information about this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\n▌Information on brakes \n\n& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci- dent due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces \n\nIf you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road surfa- ces to increase the engine braking effect. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to the \n\nbrake system overheating \n\nIf you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. \n\n* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by \n\nso that the engine is running at a medium to high engine speed (/ page 126). \n\n% Change the shift range in good time when \n\ncruise control is activated. Observe the driving tips (/ page 112). \n\nYou thereby make use of the braking effect of the engine and do not have to brake as often to main- tain the speed. This relieves the load on the service brake and prevents the brakes from over- heating and wearing too quickly. \n\nHeavy and light loads If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. The brakes cool down more quickly in the airflow. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. The brakes will grip better as a result. \n\nWet road surfaces If you have been driving for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed response when you first apply the brakes. This may also occur after driving through a car wash or deep water. You must depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. While paying attention to the traffic conditions, you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This heats the brake disks so that they dry more quickly, which protects them against corrosion. Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads: R a layer of salt on the brake disks or brake lin- \n\nings can increase braking distances considera- bly, or braking may happen on only one side R maintain an especially large safe distance to \n\ncontinuously depressing the brake pedal \n\nthe vehicle in front \n\n# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- \n\nously whilst driving. \n\nTo remove the layer of salt: R apply the brakes from time to time, paying \n\n# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. \n\nattention to traffic conditions \n\nR carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of \n\nDownhill gradients \n\na journey and after the start of a new journey \n\nOn long and steep downhill gradients you should observe the following instructions: R in vehicles with an automatic transmission, \n\nshift down to shift ranges 2 or 1 in good time \n\nChecking the brake lining thickness In addition to monitoring using the brake lining wear sensor, regularly monitor and check all of the brake linings by performing a visual inspection to look for material wear on the pads. \n\n116 Driving and parking \n\nIf you are unable to check the brake lining wear on the inside of the wheels, remove the wheels if you possess the required skills, or visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop. If the brake lining material thickness is less than 0.12 in (3 mm), have the brake linings checked and replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, if nec- essary. Do not solely rely on the brake lining wear sensor. It is also strongly recommended that you have the brake linings checked at a qualified specialist workshop, not only at every service displayed by the maintenance interval display, but also prior to long journeys and whenever the wheels are removed. In the following situations, check the brake linings: R at every service according to maintenance \n\n# If the wheels lock, immediately release the parking brake as much as required for the wheels to turn again. \n\nWhen driving on wet roads or dirt-covered surfa- ces, road salt or dirt may get into the parking brake. This causes corrosion and a reduction of braking force. In order to prevent this, drive with the parking brake lightly applied from time to time. When doing so, drive for a distance of approx- imately 300 ft at a maximum speed of 13 mph (20 km/h). The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. \n\n▌Information about driving on wet roads \n\ninterval \n\nHydroplaning \n\nR before long journeys R every time a tire is replaced R during regular visual inspections for your own \n\nsafety \n\nNew brake disks and brake linings New brake linings and brake disks only reach their optimal braking effect after a few hundred miles (a few hundred kilometers). Until then, compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only have brake linings and brake disks which are approved by Mercedes-Benz instal- led on your vehicle. Other brake disks or brake linings may compro- mise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake linings when replacing brake disks. \n\nVehicles with a manual parking brake \n\n& WARNING Risk of skidding or an accident \n\nby braking with the parking brake \n\nIf you have to brake your vehicle with the park- ing brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels may lock. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. # Only brake the vehicle with the parking brake if the service brake has failed. # In this case, do not apply the parking \n\n& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning because \n\ntire tread is too low \n\nDepending on the depth of the water on the roadway, aquaplaning can occur despite suffi- cient tire tread depth and low speed. # Avoid tire ruts and brake carefully. \n\nTherefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in which hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows: R Reduce your speed R Avoid tire ruts R Brake carefully \n\nDriving on flooded roads Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible depth of water to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. Otherwise, you can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind the fol- lowing: R The water level of standing water may not be above the lower edge of the front bumper. R You may drive no faster than walking pace. \n\nObserve the notes on fording while off-road for all- wheel drive vehicles (/ page 117). \n\nbrake with too much force. \n\nDriving and parking 117 \n\n▌Information about driving in winter \n\n& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- \n\nous exhaust gases \n\nIf the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are running. # Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. \n\nAn accumulation of snow and ice, particularly when frozen, in the area around the air intake, moving parts, the axles, and the wheel wells may cause the following problems: R Obstruction of the air intake R Damage to vehicle parts R Malfunctions due to restriction of the mobility intended by the design (e.g. reduced steering movement) \n\nIf there is any damage, inform a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n▌Information about driving off-road \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident if you do not \n\nkeep to line of fall on inclines \n\n& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci- dent due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces \n\nIf you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road surfa- ces to increase the engine braking effect. \n\nVehicles with automatic transmissions are permit- ted to roll when in neutral i for only a short time. Allowing the wheels to roll for longer, e.g. when towing, causes transmission damage. If the vehicle threatens to skid, or cannot be brought to a standstill when traveling at a low speed, you can stabilize the vehicle using the fol- lowing measures: R Shift the automatic transmission to neutral i. R Try to maintain control of the vehicle using cor- \n\nrective steering. \n\nDrive particularly carefully on slippery roads. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneu- vers. Have your vehicle winterized at a qualified special- ist workshop in good time at the onset of winter. Observe the notes on snow chains (/ page 244). Regularly check the vehicle and remove snow or ice when traveling in wintry conditions. \n\nIf you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. # Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from acceleration \n\nforces during off-road driving \n\nYou could be thrown from your seat, for exam- ple. # Always wear your seat belt even when \n\ndriving off-road. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury to the hands when \n\ndriving over obstacles \n\nIf you drive over obstacles or in tire ruts, the steering wheel may whip around. # The steering wheel must always be held \n\nsecurely with both hands. \n\n# Always hold the steering wheel so that your thumbs are on the outer rim of the steering wheel. \n\n# When driving over obstacles, expect \n\nincreased steering forces at short notice. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire caused by flamma- ble material on hot exhaust system com- ponents \n\nFlammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. \n\n118 Driving and parking \n\n# When driving on an unpaved road or off- road, check the vehicle underside regu- larly. \n\n# In particular, remove trapped plant parts \n\nor other flammable material. \n\n# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle after driving \n\noff-road \n\nForeign bodies, such as stones and branches, could become trapped on the vehicle under- side or on wheels and tires while you are driv- ing and cause damage to the vehicle. Foreign bodies could cause the following dam- age: R Damage the suspension, the fuel tank or \n\nthe brake system \n\nR Cause imbalances and thus vibrations \n\n# Regularly remove any trapped foreign bodies, e.g. stones and branches. # After driving off-road, check carefully \n\nwhether there is any damage to the vehi- cle. \n\n# If there is damage, have the vehicle \n\nchecked at a qualified specialist work- shop. \n\noil, can get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure, including as a result of increased wear. The brak- ing characteristics will vary depending on the material that has got into the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice a reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjust your driving style to the changed braking characteristics. Driving off-road or on construction sites increases the possibility of vehicle damage which may in turn lead to the failure of certain major assemblies and systems. Adapt your driving style to the off-road driving conditions. Drive carefully. Have any vehicle damage rectified at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. When driving on rough cross-country terrain, do not shift the transmission to neutral and do not disengage the clutch. You could lose control when attempting to brake the vehicle with the service brake. If your vehicle cannot manage an uphill incline, drive back down in reverse gear. When loading your vehicle for off-road driving or on a construction site, keep the vehicle's center of gravity as low as possible. \n\nCheck-list before off-road driving R Check the fuel and DEF® levels (/ page 176) \n\nand refill if necessary (/ page 133). \n\nWhen driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the vehicle underside, wheels and tires at regular intervals. In particular, remove any trapped foreign bodies, e.g. stones and branches. Observe the following notes regarding foreign bod- ies of this kind: R They may damage the suspension, the fuel \n\ntank or the brake system. \n\nR They may cause imbalances and thus vibra- \n\nR Engine: check the oil level and add oil if neces- sary (/ page 216). Before driving up or down extreme inclines or slopes, fill the oil to the maximum level. \n\n% If you drive up or down extreme inclines or slopes, the 4 symbol may appear in the instrument cluster. The engine operating safety is not put at risk if you have filled the engine oil to the maximum level before the journey. \n\ntions. \n\nR Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is working \n\nR They may be flung out from the vehicle when \n\n(/ page 261). \n\nyou continue driving. \n\nIf there is any damage, inform a qualified specialist workshop. When driving off-road on steep inclines, you must make sure that the DEF® tank is sufficiently filled. Therefore, ensure a level of at least 2.6 gal (10 l) before off-road driving. When driving off-road and on construction sites, sand, mud and water, for example, also mixed with \n\nR Make sure that a lug wrench (/ page 261), a wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow rope, a folding spade and a wheel chock (may be present, depending on equipment) are car- ried in the vehicle. \n\nR Tires and wheels: check the tire tread depth \n\n(/ page 243) and the tire pressure (/ page 250). \n\nDriving and parking 119 \n\nRules for off-road driving Always be aware of the vehicle's ground clearance, and avoid obstacles such as deep tire ruts. Obstacles can damage the following parts of the vehicle, for example: R suspension R drivetrain R fuel and operating fluid reservoirs \n\nTherefore, always drive slowly when off-road. If you must drive over obstacles, have the co-driver instruct you. % Mercedes-Benz recommends that you addi- tionally carry a shovel and a recovery rope with a shackle in the vehicle. \n\nR Make sure that loads and items of luggage are securely stored or lashed down (/ page 208). \n\nR Before driving off-road, stop the vehicle and \n\nengage a low gear. \n\nObserve the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the \n\nlower edge of the front bumper. \n\nR Drive at walking pace at most; water can other- wise enter the vehicle interior or engine com- partment. \n\nR Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi- cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible height of the water. \n\nThe braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. After the vehicle has forded at maximum depth several times, all oils in the major assemblies (front axle differential, locking differential, manual trans- mission/automatic transmission and transfer case) must be replaced. \n\nR Vehicles with DSR: activate DSR when you are \n\ndriving downhill (/ page 151). \n\nRules for off-road fording R Observe the safety notes and general notes on \n\nR All-wheel drive vehicles with engine OM642 or  \n\ndriving off-road. \n\nengine OM651: activate all-wheel drive (/ page 127) and, if necessary, activate the LOW RANGE transmission ratio (/ page 128). \n\nR If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate ESP® when pulling away (/ page 146). \n\nR Check the depth and characteristics of the \n\nbody of water before fording. The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the front bumper. \n\nR The climate control system is switched off \n\nR Only drive off-road with the engine running and \n\n(/ page 102). \n\na gear engaged. \n\nR The stationary heater is switched off \n\nR Drive slowly and smoothly. It may often be nec- \n\n(/ page 107). \n\nessary to drive at walking pace. R Avoid spinning the drive wheels. R Ensure that the wheels remain in contact with \n\nthe ground. \n\nR As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to take a look at the route to be taken. Exercise the utmost caution when driving across unfamiliar, unpredictable terrain. \n\nR Look out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes, tree \n\nstumps and tire ruts). \n\nR Avoid edges where the surface could crumble \n\nor break away. \n\nNotes on driving when there is water on the road Water which has entered the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake fitting of the engine and cause engine damage. \n\nR Activate all-wheel drive and activate the LOW RANGE transmission ratio (/ page 128). \n\nR Restrict the shift range to 1 or 2. R Avoid high engine speeds. R Drive slowly and smoothly at no more than a \n\nwalking pace. \n\nR Ensure that no wave forms at the front of the \n\nvehicle while driving. \n\nR After fording, dry the brakes. R After the vehicle has forded at maximum depth several times, all oils in the major assemblies (front axle differential, locking differential, manual transmission/automatic transmission and transfer case) must be replaced. \n\nCheck-list after driving off-road Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than normal road operation. Check your vehicle after driving on rough terrain. This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce \n\n120 Driving and parking \n\nthe risk of an accident for yourself and other road users. Clean your vehicle thoroughly before driving on public roads. If you find damage to the vehicle after off-road driving, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the following points after driving off-road, on construction sites and before driving on public roads: R Vehicles with DSR: deactivate DSR \n\n(/ page 151). \n\nR All-wheel drive vehicles with engine OM642 or  engine OM651: deactivate all-wheel drive (/ page 127). \n\nwheels and the drivetrain, visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop immediately. \n\nDeactivating/activating the reverse warning device \n\n& WARNING Risk of accidents due to per- sons or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering \n\nOther road users may not hear or may ignore the warning tone of the backing up warning device. There is a risk of an accident. # Make sure that there are no persons or objects in the maneuvering area during maneuvering. \n\nR Activate ESP® (/ page 146). R Clean the exterior lighting, particularly the \n\n# If necessary, a second person must \n\nassist with maneuvering. \n\nheadlamps and tail lamps, and check them for damage. \n\nR Clean the front and rear license plates. R Clean the windshield, windows and outside \n\nmirrors. \n\nR Clean the steps, entrances and grab handles. \n\nThis will make your footing safer. \n\nR Clean the wheels and tires, wheel wells and \n\nthe underbody of the vehicle with a water jet. This increases road adhesion, especially on wet road surfaces. \n\nR Check the wheels and tires and wheel wells for trapped foreign objects and remove them. Trapped foreign objects can damage the wheels and tires or may be flung out from the vehicle when the journey is continued. \n\nR Check the underbody for trapped branches or \n\nother parts of plants and remove them. R Clean the brake disks, brakepads and axle joints, particularly after operation in sand, mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirty conditions. \n\nR Check the entire floor assembly, the tires, \n\nwheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering, suspension and exhaust system for any dam- age. \n\nR Check the service brake for operating safety, \n\ne.g. carry out a brake test. \n\nR If you notice strong vibrations after driving off- road, check the wheels and drivetrain for for- eign objects again. Remove any foreign objects which can lead to imbalances and thus cause vibrations. In the event of damage to the \n\nThe reverse warning device is a system designed to assist you in ensuring the safety of other road users. The reverse warning device cannot guaran- tee that no persons or objects are situated behind the vehicle. The reverse warning device is an acoustic warning system integrated into the tail lamp of the vehicle. When you shift to reverse gear, the reverse warning device will be activated. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when using the reverse warning device. For vehicles in the United Kingdom and Switzer- land: the reverse warning device can be deactiva- ted. # To deactivate/activate: press the upper sec- \n\ntion of switch 1. When the reverse warning device is deactiva- ted, the indicator lamp on the switch will light up. \n\nDriving and parking 121 \n\nFunction of the ECO display \n\nThe ECO display summarizes your driving style from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driv- ing style. An economical driving style means that the ECO display will feature a star or a shine effect. You can influence fuel economy as follows: R Anticipate road and traffic conditions. R Observe the gearshift recommendations. Observe the gearshift recommendations . \n\nInstrument cluster display (black and white) \n\nThe bars will fill up when the vehicle is driven as follows: R 1 Moderate acceleration R 2 Consistent speed R 3 Gentle deceleration and rolling \n\nInstrument cluster display (color) \n\nThe bars will empty when the vehicle is driven with the following characteristics: R 1 Sporty acceleration R 2 Speed fluctuations R 3 Heavy braking \n\nThe segment's lettering lights up brightly, the outer edge lights up and the segment is filled when the vehicle is driven as follows: R 1  ACCELERATION: Moderate acceleration R 2  CONSTANT: Consistent speed R 3  COASTING: Gentle deceleration and roll- \n\nThe instrument cluster display will also show addi- tional range 4  Bonus  miFrom Start or miFrom  Start you have achieved with your driving style compared with a driver with a very sporty driving style. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption. \n\ning \n\nDiesel particulate filter \n\nThe segment's lettering is gray, the outer edge is dark and the segment is emptied when the vehicle is driven as follows: R 1  ACCELERATION: Sporty acceleration R 2  CONSTANT: Speed fluctuations R 3  COASTING: Heavy braking \n\nYou have driven in an economical manner if: R The three segments have been completely fil- \n\nled simultaneously. \n\nR The edge of all three segments lights up. \n\n▌Notes on regeneration \n\n& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust \n\ngases \n\nCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot \n\nexhaust system parts \n\nFlammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. \n\n122 Driving and parking \n\n# Park the vehicle so that no flammable \n\nmaterial can come into contact with hot vehicle components. \n\n# In particular, do not park on dry grass- \n\nland or harvested grain fields. \n\nminutes every 500 km (300 miles). This facilitates the diesel particulate filter's burn-off process. % Manual regeneration of the diesel particulate filter when stationary is classified as special equipment and is not installed as standard. \n\n▌Starting and canceling regeneration \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident with regenera- \n\ntion activated \n\nThe transmission is in neutral if the vehicle has a manual transmission and the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter is activated. The vehicle may thereby inadvertently roll away. # Apply the parking brake. # Turn the front wheels towards or away \n\nfrom the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. # Use a chock. \n\nRequirements:  R All system conditions are fulfilled. R The load condition of the diesel particulate fil- \n\nter is at least 100%. R The vehicle is stationary. R The vehicle has been started. R If the vehicle has a transmission-mounted power take-off, the latter is deactivated. R If the vehicle has a parameterizable special module, the rpm request is deactivated. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to hot exhaust gases \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service  5 Particle Filter \n\nVery hot exhaust gases are emitted from the tailpipe during regeneration. # During regeneration, maintain a minimum distance of 7 ft (2 m) to other objects, e.g. parked vehicles. \n\n# Carry out regeneration only on concrete \n\nor asphalt surfaces. \n\n# Do not carry out regeneration in the \n\n# To request regeneration: Select OK. # To observe the vehicle surroundings: Make \n\nsure that no injuries or damage due to the hot exhaust gases can occur in the vehicle sur- roundings. Confirm for three seconds with OK. Regeneration starts. The engine speed increa- ses and the message Regeneration Active appears. \n\nimmediate vicinity of people. \n\n# Carry out regeneration in the open air and not in closed halls or rooms. # Make sure that there are no flammable materials or objects in the area of the exhaust system. \n\nRegeneration is only permitted while driving or at a qualified specialist workshop with extraction sys- tem. Regeneration without interruption takes approx. 20–25 minutes. If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-dis- tance driving or has extended non-operational times, this could lead to a malfunction in the auto- matic cleaning function of the diesel particulate fil- ter. As a result, the diesel particulate filter may become blocked. Fuel may also accumulate in the engine oil and cause engine damage. If you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20 \n\n% The duration of regeneration depends on the load condition of the diesel particulate filter (approx. 20‑25 minutes). After successful regeneration, the engine speed is reduced again. \n\n# To cancel regeneration: Switch off the vehicle \n\nor depress the clutch (for manual transmission) or brake (for automatic transmission). Regeneration is canceled. \n\nRegeneration cannot be requested again until the load condition of the diesel particulate filter is at least 100%. \n\n▌Displaying the load On-board computer: 4 Service  5 Consumption Info \n\nThe load of the diesel particulate filter is displayed. \n\nDriving and parking 123 \n\nSwitching the power supply on/off \n\nSwitching off the power supply \n\nLoad display at 75% load \n\n# To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. \n\nBear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board com- \n\nputer(/ page 177) \n\nBattery main switch \n\nBattery main switch \n\nNotes on the battery main switch \n\n% Note the remaining time before the next \n\n* NOTE Damaged to control units and \n\ncooled component parts \n\nservice due date (/ page 213) and oil change (/ page 278). The time recording is also dis- rupted if the power supply is disconnected. \n\nWhen the main battery switch is removed immediately, cooling of important component parts and the storage of parameters in the control units can be interrupted. This can sig- nificantly reduce the service life of component parts and control units. # Make sure that vehicle is switched off. Then wait at least 20 minutes before removing the battery main switch. \n\nYou can use the battery main switch to disconnect the current to all your vehicle's consumers. This will prevent uncontrolled battery discharge caused by quiescent current consumers. If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary battery in the engine compartment or in the base of the front passenger seat, you must disconnect both batteries. Only then will the electrical system be fully disconnected from the power supply. % Disconnect the vehicle from the power supply \n\nonly using the battery main switch in the fol- lowing situations: R the vehicle is stationary for a long time R it is absolutely necessary to disconnect the vehicle from the power supply \n\n# Switch off the vehicle and wait at least 20 \n\nminutes. \n\n# Remove cover 1. To do this, take hold of the cover at the upper edge, move it outwards in the direction of the driver's door and lift it off. \n\n# Press and hold button 3. # Pull plug 2 out of the earth pin. # Push plug 2 as far as possible in the direction of the arrow so that it cannot make contact with the earth pin. All starter battery consumers are disconnected from the power supply. \n\nSwitch on the power supply # Press plug 2 onto the earth pin until you feel it engage and plug 2 is in full contact with the earth pin. All starter battery consumers are reconnected to the power supply. \n\n# Fasten cover 1. To do this, place the cover on \n\nfrom above. \n\n# Press the cover into the neighboring switching \n\nconsole on the right hand side. \n\nAfter switching on the power supply, you will need to reset the side windows (/ page 63) and the electric sliding door (/ page 57). \n\n124 Driving and parking \n\nAutomatic transmission \n\nDIRECT SELECT lever \n\n▌Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\nj Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position \n\n▌Engaging reverse gear R \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- \n\nrect gearshifting \n\nIf the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi- tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a stand- still, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. \n\n# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display will show k on the instrument cluster. \n\nYou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will appear on the display of the instru- ment cluster (/ page 178). The shifting characteristics of the automatic trans- mission are designed for comfortable and econom- ical handling. For this reason, the display of the instrument cluster shows, in addition to the trans- mission position display, the A for Comfort. \n\n▌Selecting neutral N \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when neutral position is engaged \n\nIf you park the vehicle with the transmission in neutral position i and the parking brake is not engaged, the vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of accident and injury. # Before parking the vehicle, apply the \n\nparking brake. \n\nDriving and parking 125 \n\n# Press button 1. \n\nTransmission position display j will be shown on the instrument cluster. \n\nPark position j is engaged automatically when one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the vehicle off with the transmis- \n\nsion in position h or k. \n\nR You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or moving at a very low speed and with the transmission in position h or k. \n\n▌Engaging drive position D \n\n# Press the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards or downwards to the first point of resistance. Transmission position display i is shown in the instrument cluster. \n\nSubsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. \n\nIf the automatic transmission should also stay in neutral i when the vehicle is switched off, carry out the following: # Start the vehicle. # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral \n\ni. \n\n# Release the brake pedal. # Switch off the vehicle. % If you then leave the vehicle and the key is still in the vehicle, the automatic transmission will stay in neutral i from then on. \n\n▌Engaging park position P \n\n# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever downwards past the first point of resistance. Transmission position display h is shown in the instrument cluster. \n\nThe automatic transmission shifts through the indi- vidual gears automatically when it is in transmis- sion position h. This is determined by the follow- ing factors: R Position of the accelerator pedal R Driving speed \n\n126 Driving and parking \n\nRestricting the shift range \n\n# To derestrict the shift range: briefly pull steer- \n\nRequirements:  R Transmission position h is engaged \n\n(/ page 125). \n\ning wheel paddle shifter 2. The automatic transmission shifts to the next gear up, depending on the gear currently engaged. This derestricts the shift range at the same time. The selected shift range is shown in the instru- ment cluster display. The automatic transmis- sion shifts only as far as the selected gear. # To derestrict the shift range: pull and hold \n\nsteering wheel paddle shifter 2. \n\nor # Engage transmission position h again \n\n# To restrict the shift range: briefly pull steering \n\nwheel paddle shifter 1. The automatic transmission shifts to the next lower gear, depending on the gear currently engaged. The shift range is also restricted. The selected shift range is shown in the instru- ment cluster display. The automatic transmis- sion shifts only as far as the selected gear. # Pull and hold steering wheel paddle shifter 1. The automatic transmission will change to a shift range which allows easy acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic trans- mission shifts down one or more gears and restricts the shift range. The selected shift range is shown in the instru- ment cluster display. The automatic transmis- sion shifts only as far as the selected gear. \n\n(/ page 125). The automatic transmission shifts up one or more gears depending on the gear currently engaged. Simultaneously, the shift range restriction is deactivated and transmission position h appears in the instrument cluster display. \n\nRecommended shift ranges for the following driv- ing conditions: 3 Use the engine's braking effect. 2 Use the engine's braking effect on downhill \n\ngradients and when driving on steep roads, in mountainous areas and under arduous operat- ing conditions. \n\n1 Use the engine's braking effect on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches. \n\nUsing kickdown \n\n# For maximum acceleration: depress the accel- \n\nerator pedal beyond the pressure point. # Ease off the accelerator pedal once the \n\n% The automatic transmission does not shift \n\ndesired speed is reached. \n\ndown if you pull steering wheel paddle shifter 1 while traveling at too high a speed. For vehicles with engine OM642, OM651,  OM654: the automatic transmission does not shift up if the shift range is restricted and the maximum engine speed of the restricted shift range has been reached. For vehicles with engine M274: if the maxi- mum engine speed for the restricted shift range is reached and you continue to depress the accelerator pedal, the automatic transmis- sion will shift up automatically. \n\nAll-wheel drive \n\nNotes on all-wheel drive \n\nAll-wheel drive ensures permanent drive for all four wheels and, together with ESP®, improves the trac- tion of the vehicle. With the OM651 and OM642 engines, all-wheel drive must be switched on . With the OM654 engine, there is smart closed-loop control of the drive torque between the front and rear axles. Traction control for all-wheel drive also takes place via the brake system. This may cause the brake \n\nDriving and parking 127 \n\nsystem to overheat. Decelerate or stop to let the brake system cool down. If a wheel spins due to insufficient traction, observe the following notes: R When pulling away, make use of the traction \n\ncontrol integrated in ESP®. Depress the accel- erator pedal as far as necessary. \n\nEngaging/disengaging all-wheel drive \n\n* NOTE Risk of damage to the transfer case \n\nThe transfer case may be damaged if you depress the accelerator pedal while engaging or disengaging the all-wheel drive. # Do not depress the accelerator pedal \n\nR Take your foot off the accelerator pedal, slowly, \n\nwhile the vehicle is in motion. \n\nwhile the indicator lamp in the all-wheel drive switch is flashing. \n\nIn wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and, if necessary, snow chains (/ page 244). Only in this way can the maximum effect of all-wheel drive be achieved. Use DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) when driving downhill off-road (/ page 151). If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the all-wheel drive system can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. The all-wheel drive system cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. The all-wheel drive system is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. \n\n* NOTE Risk of damage to the drivetrain and \n\nthe brake system \n\nIf you operate vehicles with all-wheel drive on a one-axle test stand, you may damage the drive- train or the brake system. # A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle test stand. \n\n# If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a test stand, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. \n\n* NOTE Risk of damage to the transfer case \n\nIf you tow the vehicle with a raised axle, the transfer case can get damaged. Such damage is not covered by Mercedes-Benz Limited War- ranty. # Never tow the vehicle with a raised axle. # Only tow the vehicle with all wheels on \n\nthe ground or fully raised. \n\n# To engage/disengage: press the upper section \n\nof switch 1. The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes while the all-wheel drive is engaged or disengaged. The ÷ and : warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ESP® and ASR are deactivated for the duration of the shift opera- tion. Once the engaging/disengaging process has been completed, the ÷ and : warn- ing lamps in the instrument cluster go out and ESP® and ASR are reactivated. \n\nAs long as the indicator lamp in switch 1 is flash- ing, you can cancel the shift operation by pressing switch 1 again. If the shift operation fails, the indicator lamp in switch 1 briefly flashes three times. One of the shift conditions was not met. If the indicator lamp in switch 1 lights up, all- wheel drive is engaged. % If the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is \n\nengaged, the all-wheel drive cannot be disen- gaged. \n\n# Note the instructions on towing the vehi- cle with full contact with the ground for all wheels. \n\nConditions for engaging/disengaging You can engage and deactivate the all-wheel drive when stationary or while driving slowly. \n\n128 Driving and parking \n\nWhen stationary, observe the following: R The vehicle has been started. R The steering wheel in the straight-ahead posi- \n\nEngaging and disengaging LOW range \n\ntion. \n\nIf the all-wheel drive cannot be engaged when sta- tionary: # Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the selector lever from i to h from h to i from i to k and back to i. Engaging and disengaging the all-wheel drive can be made easier in this way. \n\nObserve the following when driving slowly: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not traveling faster than 6.2 mph \n\n(10 km/h). \n\nR The vehicle is not being driven around a curve. \n\nIf it is not possible to engage all-wheel drive when the vehicle is rolling: # Vehicles with automatic transmission: briefly \n\nmove the selector lever to i. \n\nFunction of the LOW RANGE transmission ratio \n\nThe LOW RANGE transmission ratio enables very slow driving in the respective gears. If you engage LOW RANGE, the engine's performance character- istics and the automatic transmission's shifting characteristics are adapted accordingly. The trans- mission ratio from the engine to the wheels is around 40% lower than in the road position. The drive torque is increased correspondingly. Conditions for engaging/disengaging The following shifting conditions must be met in order to engage or disengage LOW RANGE: R All-wheel drive is engaged (/ page 127). R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is stationary. R You depress the brake pedal. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position j or i. \n\n% On vehicles with DSR (Downhill Speed Regula- tion), switch 1 is replaced with the switch for DSR. \n\n# To engage and disengage: Press the upper sec- \n\ntion of switch 1. The + indicator lamp will flash on the instrument cluster for the duration of the shift operation . R When the shift operation takes place and LOW RANGE is engaged, the + indica- tor lamp will light up. \n\nR When the shift operation takes place and LOW RANGE is disengaged, the + indi- cator lamp will go out. \n\nAs long as the + indicator lamp is flashing, you can cancel the shift operation by pressing button 1 again. If the shift operation fails, the + indi- cator lamp will flash briefly three times. This means that one of the shift conditions has not been met. \n\nElectronic level control \n\nFunction of ENR (electronic level control) \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle \n\nlowering \n\nWhen lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the vehi- cle or in the immediate vicinity of the \n\nwheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to the jack \n\ntipping over \n\nIf you park a vehicle with air suspension, the air suspension can remain active for up to an hour, even if the vehicle is switched off. If you then raise the vehicle using the jack, the air suspension will attempt to even out the vehicle level. The jack can tip over. # Before raising the vehicle, press the \n\nService button on the remote control for the air suspension. This prevents the vehicle level from being automatically readjusted or manually raised or lowered. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to lowered \n\nor raised chassis frame \n\nIf the chassis frame is adjusted, the braking and driving characteristics can be severely impaired. You could also exceed the permissi- ble vehicle height. # Adjust the driving level before driving off. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to a mal- function of electronic level control \n\nThe vehicle level may be too high, too low or asymmetrical. The driving and steering characteristics of the vehicle may be noticeably different. # Adapt your driving style to the changed \n\ndriving characteristics. \n\n# Stop, paying attention to road and traffic \n\nconditions. \n\n# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n* NOTE Risk of damage to the chassis from \n\nlowered vehicle level \n\nIf electronic level control is malfunctioning or readjusts while you are driving, the vehicle level may be lowered. # Pay attention to the road conditions and ensure there is sufficient ground clear- ance. \n\n# Drive carefully. \n\nDriving and parking 129 \n\nThe level of the vehicle depends on vehicle load and the load distribution. Electronic level control adjusts the level of the rear axle automatically on vehicles with an air-sprung rear axle. The vehicle level is thereby always maintained at the driving level, regardless of vehicle load. Driving dynamics remain unaffected. The height difference between the sides of the vehicle may be up to 0.4 in (1 cm). Electronic level control is not engine-dependent and is only operational when the vehicle is switched on. The electronic level control compres- sor works audibly. % If the compressor works constantly or starts up several times per minute, electronic level control is malfunctioning. \n\nDepending on the vehicle's equipment, electronic level control switches between manual mode and automatic mode. This is dependent on the driving speed or the parking brake position. If electronic level control switches depending on vehicle speed, manual operation is automatically activated when the vehicle is stationary. You may raise or lower the vehicle level. If you subsequently drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), manual mode is automatically deactivated and automatic mode sets the vehicle level. If electronic level control switches depending on the parking brake position, manual mode is auto- matically activated when the parking brake is applied. You may raise or lower the vehicle level to load and unload. If you release the parking brake, manual mode is automatically deactivated and automatic mode sets the driving level. When working on the vehicle or changing a wheel, you can deactivate electronic level control (/ page 130). If electronic level control is malfunctioning or the vehicle level is too high or too low, a warning tone sounds. The driving and steering characteristics of the vehi- cle will be noticeably different. Electronic level control adjusts the vehicle level to the normal level as soon as possible. Drive on carefully until the warning tone stops. Only then is the vehicle at nor- mal level. To restore the vehicle level, automatic mode and electronic level control automatically switch on again depending on the option selected: R when the parking brake is released R from speeds of approximately 6 mph \n\n(10 km/h) \n\n130 Driving and parking \n\nIf the electronic level control compressor is in dan- ger of overheating, for example, due to repeated raising or lowering within a short period, electronic level control is deactivated. You can raise or lower the vehicle level again after a few minutes. \n\nIn addition, a warning tone is emitted from the remote control for approximately 30 seconds. The malfunction that has been detected can be shown using the indicator lamps (signaling of malfunction codes). # Park the vehicle safely and leave it switched \n\nRaising and lowering the vehicle level \n\non. \n\nUsing the remote control % Certain special equipment enables other oper- \n\nation options: R Ambulance: raising the vehicle level above the driving level (center position) is not possible. Only the lowest position and the driving level can be set. \n\nR Speed signal: in order to operate elec- \n\ntronic level control, the parking brake must not be applied. Electronic level control can be operated manually up to 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If this speed is exceeded, driv- ing level will be set automatically. \n\n# Apply the parking brake. # To raise or lower the vehicle level: press and hold button 4 or 5 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. The indicator lamp on button 4 or 5 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indi- cator lamp on button 4 or 5 lights up. # To lower automatically: briefly press button 5. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position: R From the highest position to driving level R From driving level to the lowest position \n\nR 30-minute run-on module: electronic level control can be operated up to 30 minutes after switching off the vehicle. The remote control is located in a holder on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Remove the remote control from the holder before use. \n\nThe indicator lamp on button 5 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indi- cator lamp on button 5 lights up. \n\n% By pressing button 4 during the movement, \n\nthe original position will be reset. \n\n# To raise automatically: briefly press button 4. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position: R From the lowest position to driving level R From driving level to the highest position \n\nElectronic level control starts automatically if the vehicle is switched on. Operation is only possible after the parking brake has been applied. Electronic level control performs a self-check regu- larly when it is activated and while in use. Indicator lamp 7 on the remote control lights up for about one second when you switch on the vehicle. There is a malfunction if indicator lamp 7 behaves in the following ways: R the indicator lamp does not light up when you \n\nswitch on the vehicle or \n\nR the indicator lamp then lights up again or \n\nflashes \n\nThe indicator lamp on button 4 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indi- cator lamp on button 4 lights up. \n\n% By pressing button 5 during the movement, \n\nthe original position will be reset. \n\n# To raise or lower automatically to driving level  (center position): press and hold button 6. Electronic level control automatically raises or lowers the vehicle to driving level. \n\n# To save the set vehicle level: set the required \n\nvehicle level. \n\n# Press and hold button 1 or 2 until you hear \n\na warning tone. The vehicle level set has been saved on corre- sponding button 1 or 2. \n\nDriving and parking 131 \n\n# To call up the saved vehicle level: briefly press \n\n# To lower automatically: briefly press the lower \n\nbutton 1 or 2. Electronic level control automatically raises or lowers the vehicle to the saved driving level. The indicator lamp on button 1 or 2 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indi- cator lamp on button 1 or 2 lights up. \n\nsection of switch 2. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position: R From the highest position to driving level R From driving level to the lowest position \n\n% By pressing button 1 during the movement, \n\n% Service mode may only be activated or deacti- vated at a qualified specialist workshop by trained personnel. In service mode, the air suspension system is deactivated for mainte- nance or error detection. \n\n# To activate service mode: press button 3. \n\nService mode is active and the indicator lamp in button 3 lights up continuously. \n\nthe original position will be reset. \n\n# To raise automatically: briefly press the lower \n\nsection of switch 1. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position: R From the lowest position to driving level R From driving level to the highest position \n\n# To deactivate service mode: press button 3. Service mode is deactivated and the indicator lamp in button 3 goes out. \n\n# To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically. \n\n% By pressing button 2 during the movement, \n\nthe original position will be reset. \n\n# To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically. \n\nUsing the button in the rear \n\nUsing the button in the switch panel \n\n# Park the vehicle safely and leave the vehicle \n\n# Park the vehicle safely and leave it switched \n\nswitched on. \n\non. \n\n# Apply the parking brake. # To raise or lower the vehicle level: press and hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. \n\n# Apply the parking brake. # To raise or lower the vehicle level: press and hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. \n\n132 Driving and parking \n\n# To lower automatically: briefly press the lower \n\nsection of switch 2. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position: R From the highest position to driving level R From driving level to the lowest position \n\n% By pressing button 1 during the movement, \n\nthe original position will be reset. \n\n# To raise automatically: briefly press the lower \n\nsection of switch 1. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position: R From the lowest position to driving level R From driving level to the highest position \n\n% By pressing button 2 during the movement, \n\nthe original position will be reset. \n\n# To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically. \n\nUsing electronic level control for charging with air in an emergency \n\n* NOTE Damage due to excess pressure \n\nIf the pressure in the air suspension bellows is too high, the compressed-air lines or the air suspension bellows can be damaged. # In doing so, do not exceed the maximum \n\npermissible operating pressure of 0.113 ksi (900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi)). \n\n# Apply the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the \n\ntransmission to position j. \n\n# Switch off the vehicle. # Turn the valve cap of the corresponding valve \n\n(1 L = left, 2 R = right). \n\n# Stand to the side of the vehicle when connect- \n\ning the external compressed-air source. # Raise or lower the vehicle level by charging or releasing compressed air until the driving level has been reached and the vehicle is in a hori- zontal position. While doing so, ensure you observe the maximum permissible operating pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi). # Disconnect the external compressed-air \n\nsource. \n\n# Tighten the valve cap on the valve (1 L = left, \n\n2 R = right). \n\n# Drive on carefully to the nearest qualified spe- \n\ncialist workshop. \n\nOnly for vehicles with valves for electronic level  control emergency charging: if electronic level control is malfunctioning and the vehicle is leaning, you can raise or lower the vehicle by connecting an external compressed-air source to one of the emergency valves (similarly to tire valve). If elec- tronic level control is not operational, you can drive on carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the malfunction remedied. \n\nRectifying problems with the electronic level con- trol \n\nYou cannot raise or lower the vehicle level when stationary \n\nPossible cause: R The compressor is in danger of overheating. \n\nAfter repeatedly raising and lowering the vehi- cle, electronic level control play protection is deactivated. \n\n# Try to set the vehicle level manually again after \n\napproximately one minute. \n\nor \n\nDriving and parking 133 \n\nPossible cause: R Electric level control has been deactivated due to undervoltage. The battery may not be charg- ing. \n\nHandling and ride comfort may suffer. # Start the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon \n\nas possible. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to \n\nelectrostatic charge \n\nElectrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the met- allic vehicle body. \n\n# To avoid creating another electrostatic \n\ncharge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. \n\nRefueling \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture \n\nRefueling the vehicle \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from \n\nfuel \n\nFuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating \n\nsparks must be avoided. \n\n# Before refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater, and leave them switched off during refu- eling. \n\nVehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning. # Never refuel using gasoline. # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. \n\n* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels \n\nwith a gasoline engine \n\nFuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. \n\n# Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during \n\nthe refueling process. \n\nIf you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with \n\nsoap and water. \n\nIf you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise \n\nfuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. \n\n# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained \n\ncompletely. \n\n* NOTE Do not use gasoline to refuel vehi- \n\ncles with a diesel engine \n\n# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. \n\n# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- \n\ntion immediately. Do not induce vomiting. \n\n# Change immediately out of clothing that \n\nhas come into contact with fuel. \n\nIf you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, \n\nfuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. \n\n# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained \n\ncompletely. \n\n134 Driving and parking \n\n* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused \n\nby overfilled fuel tanks \n\n# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump noz- \n\nzle switches off. \n\n* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle \n\n# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump noz- \n\nzle switches off. \n\n* NOTE Damage to painted surfaces due to \n\nfuel \n\n# Do not spill any fuel on painted surfaces. \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental \n\ndamage due to improper handling of fuel \n\nIf fuels are handled improperly, they pose a danger to persons and the environment. # Do not allow fuels to run into the sewage system, the surface waters, the ground water or into the ground. \n\n1 Fuel filler flap 2 Fuel filler cap \n\n% The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-hand door when viewed in the direction of travel. The position of the fuel filler cap is also shown on the instrument cluster æ. The arrow on the filling pump specifies the side of the vehi- cle. \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is unlocked. R The auxiliary heating is switched off. R The vehicle is switched off. R The front left-hand door is open. \n\n# Open fuel filler flap 1. # Turn fuel filler cap 2 counter-clockwise and \n\nremove it. \n\n# Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors \n\nfrom entering the vehicle interior. \n\n# Completely slide the filler neck of the pump \n\n% Do not get back into the vehicle during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\nnozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. \n\n# Fill the fuel tank only until the pump nozzle \n\nswitches off. \n\n# Replace fuel filler cap 2 and turn it clockwise. You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully. \n\n# Open the front left-hand door. # Close fuel filler flap 1. % Vehicles with a diesel engine and incorrect  fueling protector against refueling with gaso- line: the filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps for passenger vehicles. % Vehicles with a diesel engine without an incor- rect fueling protector: refueling preferred at diesel filling pumps for passenger vehicles. However, you can also refuel at a diesel filling pump for trucks. \n\n% If the fuel tank has been run completely dry, \n\nadd at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of fuel. \n\nDriving and parking 135 \n\n% Vehicles that can use a mixture of fuels can be recognized by the sticker \"Ethanol up to E85!\" on the fuel filler flap. \n\n# Keep DEF away from children. # Only fill the DEF tank in well-ventilated \n\nareas. \n\nRectifying problems with the fuel and fuel tank \n\nFuel is leaking from the vehicle \n\nIf a person comes into contact with DEF, observe the following: R If you have ingested DEF, drink plenty of \n\nPossible cause: R The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. \n\n# Apply the parking brake. # Switch off the vehicle. # Open the driver's door. \n\nThe tow position is set to g. \n\nwater and seek medical attention immedi- ately. \n\nR If DEF has come into contact with your eyes, rinse them for 15 minutes, also beneath the eyelids. \n\nR Immediately rinse DEF off your skin with \n\nsoap and water. \n\n# Under no circumstances restart the vehicle! # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Take measures to contain leaked fuel. \n\n* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused \n\nby impurities in DEF \n\nThe vehicle does not start \n\nPossible cause: R The fuel tank is completely empty. \n\n# Refuel the vehicle with at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of \n\nfuel. \n\nImpurities in DEF result in the following: R Higher emission values R Damage to the catalytic converter R Engine damage R Malfunctions in the DEF exhaust gas after- \n\ntreatment system \n\n# Switch on the vehicle for approx. ten seconds. # Start the vehicle continuously for a maximum \n\n# Avoid impurities in DEF. \n\nof ten seconds until it runs smoothly. \n\n* NOTE Soiling due to crystallized DEF resi- \n\nIf the vehicle does not start: # Switch on the vehicle again for approx. ten \n\nseconds. \n\n# Restart the vehicle continuously for a maxi- mum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. \n\ndue \n\nDEF residue crystallizes after some time. # When refilling DEF, immediately rinse any surfaces that it comes into contact with and remove all DEF residue. \n\nIf the vehicle does not start after three attempts: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n# DEF can also be removed with a damp \n\ncloth and cold water. \n\n# If DEF has already crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold water. \n\nDEF \n\n▌Notes on DEF \n\n* NOTE Irritation to skin, eyes and respira- \n\ntory tract due to DEF \n\nDEF can cause irritation if inhaled or ingested, or if it comes in contact with eyes or skin. When the tank is open, ammonia vapor can escape. # Do not inhale or ingest DEF. # Make sure DEF does not come into con- tact with your skin, eyes or clothing. \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Soiling with DEF DEF residue crystallizes after some time and stain the affected surfaces. # Immediately rinse surfaces that come in contact with DEF when filling with water or remove DEF with a damp cloth and cold water. \n\nIf DEF has already crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold water. \n\nDEF is a liquid urea solution used for exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the \n\n136 Driving and parking \n\nexhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. DEF has the following properties: R Non-toxic R Colorless and odorless R Non-flammable \n\nDEF availability: R You can have DEF refilled by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center \n\nInstrument cluster with display (color) \n\n1 DEF level \n\nR DEF is available at numerous gas stations via \n\nDEF filling pumps. \n\nR Alternatively, DEF is available at qualified spe- \n\ncialist workshops, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and at numerous gas stations as a DEF refill canister or DEF refill bottle \n\n% DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately 12.2 °F (-11 °C). The vehicle is equipped with a DEF preheating system at the factory. This means that winter operation is also ensured for temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C). If you refill DEF at temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C), the DEF level in the instrument clus- ter may not be displayed correctly. If the DEF is frozen, drive for at least 20 minutes and then park the vehicle for a minimum of 30 sec- onds, so that the level is correctly displayed. In extreme winter conditions, the time needed to detect the amount topped up may be consid- erably longer. Park the vehicle in a warm garage to speed up this process. \n\nInstrument cluster with display (black and white) 1 DEF level \n\n▌Refilling DEF \n\n* NOTE Engine damage due to DEF being in \n\nthe fuel \n\n# DEF must not be used to fill the fuel tank. # Only use DEF to fill the DEF tank. # Do not overfill the DEF tank. \n\n% Ensure the connection between the refill con- tainer and vehicle filler neck does not drip. \n\n* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle interior \n\n▌Calling up the DEF level gauge On-board computer: 4 Service \n\n# Select Additive (DEF) and confirm. \n\nThe DEF level appears. \n\ndue to DEF leakage \n\n# After adding, carefully close the DEF refill \n\ncontainer. \n\n# Avoid carrying DEF refill containers per- \n\nmanently in the vehicle. \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is switched off. \n\nThe following messages that appear in succession in the instrument cluster display indicate that you need to refill the DEF tank: R Refill Additive See Operator's Manual \n\nDriving and parking 137 \n\nThe DEF level has fallen below the first warning threshold. \n\nOpening the DEF filler cap on lockable filler caps \n\nR Refill Additive (DEF) Starts until Emerg. Op.:  \n\nXXX See Operator's Manual The DEF level has fallen into the reserve range. After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply will last for approx- imately 1,200 mi (1,900 km) and you can start the engine a further 16 times. The number of remaining vehicle starts \"XX\" (16 to 1) is shown in the message every time the vehicle is started. \n\nR Refill Additive Emer. Op.: Max. XXX mph See  \n\nOperator's Manual You can only drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). \n\nTop-up quantity: \n\nWith a prompt in the display \n\nat least 8 l \n\nWithout a prompt in the display \n\nat least 2 l \n\nYou can also have the DEF level displayed (/ page 136). \n\nOpening the DEF filler cap on filler caps that are not lockable \n\n# Open the hood. # Take tool 4 for unlocking DEF filler cap 1 \n\nfrom the vehicle tool kit. \n\n# Pull cover 3 on DEF filler cap 1 up, turn 90° \n\nand release it. \n\n# Insert tool 4 in holes 2 of DEF filler cap 1. # Turn DEF filler cap 1 counter-clockwise and \n\nremove it. \n\nPreparing the DEF refill canister \n\n# Open the hood. # Turn DEF filler cap 1 counter-clockwise and \n\nremove it. \n\nVariant 1 \n\n138 Driving and parking \n\nVariant 2 \n\nVariant 2 \n\n# Unscrew the cap on DEF refill canister 1. # Screw disposable hose 2 onto the opening of \n\nDEF refill canister 1 until hand-tight. \n\nRefilling DEF \n\n# Screw on hand-tight (variant 1) or insert (var- iant 2) disposable hose 2 into the filler neck of the vehicle. \n\n# Lift up and tip DEF refill canister 1. \n\nThe filling process stops when the DEF tank is completely full. DEF refill canister 1 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. \n\n# Unscrew disposable hose 2 and close DEF and refill canister 1 in reverse order. \n\n# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds. # Start the vehicle. % Avoid storing DEF containers permanently in \n\nthe vehicle. \n\nDEF refill bottle Only screw the DEF refill bottle hand-tight onto the filler opening in the engine compartment. It may otherwise be damaged. \n\nVariant 1 \n\nDriving and parking 139 \n\nDEF refill bottles 1 can be obtained at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill bottles without a threaded cap offer no overfill pro- tection. DEF may leak out as a result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded cap. You can obtain this from an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\nClosing the DEF filler cap on filler caps that are not lockable \n\n# After filling the DEF tank, place DEF filler cap 1 on the filler neck and tighten it clockwise. # Turn the DEF filler cap until the lettering is legi- \n\n# Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bot- \n\ntle 1. \n\n# Place DEF refill bottle 1 as shown on filler opening 2 and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. \n\nble and horizontal. The filler neck is only locked correctly when this is the case. # Close the hood. \n\nClosing the DEF filler cap on lockable filler caps \n\n# Press DEF refill bottle 1 towards filler opening \n\n2. The DEF tank is filled. This could take up to one minute. \n\n% When the DEF refill bottle is no longer pressed down, filling stops. The bottle can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. \n\n# Let go of DEF refill bottle 1. # Turn DEF refill bottle 1 counter-clockwise and \n\nremove it. \n\n# Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bottle \n\n1 again. \n\nFilling procedure with the pump nozzle of a DEF filling pump # Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and add DEF. When doing so, do not overfill the DEF tank. You can also use a DEF filling pump for trucks. \n\n140 Driving and parking \n\n# After filling the DEF tank, place DEF filler cap 1 on the filler neck and tighten it clockwise. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the drive- \n\ntrain due to rolling away \n\n# Remove tool 4 from DEF filler cap 1 and \n\nstore it in the vehicle tool kit. \n\n# Pull cover 3 on DEF filler cap 1 up over holes 2 of DEF filler cap 1, turn and release. \n\n# Always park your vehicle safely and according to legal requirements. # Always properly secure the vehicle \n\nagainst rolling away. \n\n# Turn DEF filler cap 1. \n\nIf DEF filler cap 1 turns freely, the DEF tank is closed. \n\nParking \n\nParking the vehicle \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot \n\nexhaust system parts \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if \n\nparking brake is not applied \n\nIf you park the vehicle with the transmission in park position j and the parking brake is not engaged, the vehicle may roll away. Engaging park position j is not a fully ade- quate replacement for the parking brake. There is a risk of accident and injury! # Secure the vehicle against rolling away \n\nFlammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable \n\nmaterial can come into contact with hot vehicle components. \n\n# In particular, do not park on dry grass- \n\nland or harvested grain fields. \n\nas described below. \n\nObserve the following points to ensure that the vehicle is properly secured against rolling away unintentionally. # Always apply the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Engage \n\ntransmission position j. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\n# On uphill or downhill inclines: Secure the rear axle with a chock or an object without any sharp edges. \n\n% You can operate the side windows for five \n\nminutes after you have switched off the vehi- cle. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\nManual parking brake \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\n▌Applying or releasing the parking brake lever \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\n& WARNING Risk of skidding or an accident \n\nby braking with the parking brake \n\nIf you have to brake your vehicle with the park- ing brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels may lock. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. # Only brake the vehicle with the parking brake if the service brake has failed. # In this case, do not apply the parking \n\nbrake with too much force. \n\n# If the wheels lock, immediately release the parking brake as much as required for the wheels to turn again. \n\nDriving and parking 141 \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire and an accident if the parking brake is not released \n\n▌Folding the handbrake lever up or down (only in vehicles with a folding handbrake lever) \n\nIf the parking brake is not fully released when driving, the following situations can occur: R The parking brake can overheat and cause \n\na fire \n\nR The parking brake can lose its holding \n\nfunction \n\nRequirements:  R The handbrake lever is applied. \n\n# To fold down the handbrake lever: push the handbrake lever down as far as it will go. # To raise the handbrake lever: pull the hand- \n\nbrake lever up as far as it will go. \n\n# Completely release the parking brake \n\nbefore driving off. \n\n▌Performing emergency braking with the hand- brake lever \n\nThe brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. \n\nGenerally, you may only apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stationary. # To apply the parking brake: pull handbrake \n\nIf, in exceptional cases, the service brake fails, you may use the parking brake to perform emergency braking. # Emergency braking: press and hold release button 2 and carefully pull brake lever 1. \n\nlever 1 up as far as the last possible detent. When the vehicle has been started, the F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If the vehicle is in motion, a warning tone sounds. \n\nElectric parking brake \n\n▌Information on the electric parking brake \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\n% In vehicles with a folding parking brake lever, you can then press parking brake lever 1 down as far as it will go. \n\n# To release the parking brake: on vehicles with a folding handbrake lever, first pull handbrake lever 1 up as far as it will go. \n\n# Pull parking brake lever 1 slightly and press \n\nrelease knob 2. \n\n# Guide handbrake lever 1 down as far as it will \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\ngo with release knob 2 pressed. The F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. \n\n142 Driving and parking \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the gearbox position. R starting the vehicle. \n\nIn addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: R The vehicle has not been started R The driver is not sitting in the driver's seat R The belt buckle is undone \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the \n\nkey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the key out of reach of children. \n\nObserve the note on transporting animals in the vehicle (/ page 46). For the automatic functions to work correctly, the driver must be seated in the correct seat position (/ page 67). The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board electrical system volt- age. If the on-board electrical system voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, the electric parking brake may not be able to be applied. In this case, the yellow ! indicator lamp lights up. In this case, park the vehicle in the following way: R Park the vehicle on level ground and secure it \n\nto prevent it from rolling away. \n\nR Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the \n\ntransmission to position j. \n\nThe electric parking brake is also automatically applied if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has brought the vehicle to a standstill. The electric parking brake is also automatically applied when the transmission is not in position P, but the following situations occur: R There is a system malfunction R The power supply is insufficient R The vehicle is stationary for a long time \n\n% The electric parking brake is only actually \n\napplied when the red F and ! (USA) indicator lamps or the red ! (Canada) indi- cator lamps light up continuously. \n\nIt may not be possible to release a parking brake if the on-board electrical system voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Inform a qualified specialist workshop. When the vehicle is not switched on, the electric parking brake carries out a function test at regular intervals. Noises are normal in this process. \n\n▌Function of the electric parking brake Vehicles with automatic transmission: The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position j. \n\nThe red F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. The electric parking brake is only actually applied when the red F and ! (USA) or ! (Can- ada) indicator lamps light up continuously. % To prevent the electric parking brake from applying automatically, pull switch 1. \n\n▌Releasing the electric parking brake automati- cally Vehicles with automatic transmission:  The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver is sitting in the driver's seat. R The driver is belted. R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and \n\nyou depress the accelerator. or \n\nDriving and parking 143 \n\nYou switch from transmission position j to position h or k. You must also depress the accelerator if traveling on steep uphill gradi- ents. \n\nR If the transmission is in position k, the rear- \n\nend doors must be closed. \n\n▌Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto children left unattended in the vehicle \n\nIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other \n\npersons or road users. \n\nR get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become \n\ntrapped, for example. \n\n▌Emergency braking \n\nIn the event of an emergency, you can brake the vehicle while it is in motion with the electric park- ing brake. # While driving, press the ! switch of the \n\nelectric parking brake. The vehicle is braked as long as you keep the ! switch of the electric parking brake depressed. The vehicle's brake lights light up. The longer the ! switch of the electric parking brake is depressed, the greater the braking force. \n\nDuring the braking procedure, you will receive the following feedback from the vehicle: R A warning tone sounds. R The Release Parking Brake message appears \n\nin the instrument cluster. \n\nIn addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. \n\nR The red F and ! (USA) indicator lamps flash in the instrument cluster or the red ! (Canada) indicator lamp flashes in the instru- ment cluster. \n\nWhen the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. \n\n# Never leave children unattended in the \n\nvehicle. \n\n# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach \n\nof children. \n\nParking the vehicle for an extended period \n\n* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due \n\nto leaving the vehicle idle for extended periods of time \n\nObserve \"Notes on pets in the vehicle\". # To apply: press the ! switch when the vehi- \n\ncle is stationary. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamps light up in the instrument clus- ter. The electric parking brake is only actually applied when the red F and ! (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamps light up con- tinuously. It is also possible to apply the electric parking brake when the vehicle is switched off. \n\n# To release: pull the ! switch. \n\nIf the vehicle is not moved for a longer period, quiescent current can lead to excessive dis- charge of the starter battery and cause battery damage. # Charge the starter battery if the voltage \n\nis below 12.2 V, for example, after driving for an extended period. \n\n# Charge the starter battery every six \n\nmonths, even if it has been disconnected or is in standby mode. \n\n# Check the starter battery condition of charge every four weeks if no trickle charger is being used. \n\nThe red F and ! (USA) or ! (Can- ada) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. You may only release the electric parking brake if the vehicle is switched on with the start/ stop button. \n\n# If possible, connect a trickle charger via \n\na jump-start connection point. \n\n# Consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery or if you have any questions. \n\n144 Driving and parking \n\nParking the vehicle for more than four weeks # Method 1: connect the batteries to a trickle charger via the jump-start connection. \n\n# Method 2: interrupt the power supply by acti- \n\nvating standby mode (/ page 144). \n\n# Method 3: disconnect all batteries. For this, \n\nplease contact a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nStandby mode \n\n▌Activating or deactivating standby mode \n\nRequirements:  R The power supply is switched on. R The vehicle is not switched on. \n\nIf standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-opera- tion. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in \n\nDriving and driving safety systems \n\nNotes on driving systems and your responsibility \n\nYour vehicle is equipped with driving systems that assist you while driving, parking and maneuvering. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your sur- roundings and do not relieve you of your responsi- bility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak- ing in good time and for staying in lane. Always pay attention to the traffic and intervene if necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic condi- tions. \n\nInformation about sensors \n\nthe media display. \n\nR The connection to online services is interrup- \n\nted. \n\nR The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is unavaila- \n\nble. \n\nR The interior protection and tow-away alarm \n\nfunctions are not available. \n\nExceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery first in the following sit- uations: R In order to extend the vehicle's non-opera- \n\ntional time. \n\nR The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby  Mode message appears in the media display. \n\n% Standby mode is automatically deactivated \n\nwhen the vehicle is switched on. \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Settings  5 Vehicle  5 Standby Mode \n\n# To activate/deactivate: selectYes or No. % If the options are grayed out, the charge level of the battery is not sufficient for standby mode. \n\nCertain driving and driving safety systems use sen- sors 1 to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equipment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush (/ page 223). Do not cover the sensors, for example, with bicycle racks, overhang- ing loads or stickers. After a collision, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a quali- fied specialist workshop as the bumper or radiator grille may have sustained damage that cannot be seen by the naked eye. \n\nDriving and parking 145 \n\nFunction of driving systems and driving safety sys- tems \n\nIn this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety sys- tems: R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 145) R ASR (acceleration skid control) (/ page 145) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 145) R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) \n\nIf ABS intervenes, you will feel pulsations in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal may be an indication of hazardous road conditions and func- tions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. If ABS intervenes: keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the braking situation has passed. To carry out maximum full-stop braking: depress the brake pedal with full force. \n\nFunction of BAS (Brake Assist System) \n\n(/ page 146) \n\nR EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) \n\n(/ page 147) \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) \n\nR Active Brake Assist (/ page 147) R Cruise control (/ page 150) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\n(/ page 153) \n\nR Hill start assist (/ page 155) R HOLD function (/ page 155) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 156) R Rear view camera (/ page 158) R Surround view camera (/ page 160) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 163) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 164) R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 165) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 168) \n\nIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS pre- vents the wheels from locking. \n\nBAS supports you with additional braking force in an emergency braking situation. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is acti- vated: R BAS automatically boosts the braking force of \n\nthe brakes \n\nR BAS can shorten the braking distance R ABS prevents the wheels from locking \n\nWhen you release the brake pedal, the brakes function as usual again. BAS is deactivated. \n\nFunctions of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) \n\nObserve the important safety guidelines for the driving safety system. ABS controls the brake pressure in critical situa- tions: R During braking, for instance, at maximum full- stop braking or if there is insufficient tire trac- tion, the wheels are prevented from locking. R The steerability of the vehicle in terms of physi- cal possibilities is ensured when braking. R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). On a slippery road surface, ABS intervenes even if you only brake gently. \n\nSystem limits ABS may be impaired or may not function if a mal- function has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instru- ment cluster after the vehicle is started. \n\nFunctions of ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) \n\nASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics if the driver does not pay attention when pulling away or accelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a vehicle with this option, ASR will be deactivated for the duration of the activation/deactivation proc- ess. Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASR is malfunctioning, the ÷ indicator lamp lights up while the vehicle is running and the engine output may be reduced (/ page 26). ASR improves traction, i.e. the transfer of power from the tires to the road surface, for a sustained period and therefore also improves the driving sta- bility of the vehicle. If the drive wheels start to spin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels and limits \n\n146 Driving and parking \n\nthe engine torque. ASR thus significantly assists you when pulling away and accelerating, especially on wet or slippery roads. If traction on the road surface is not sufficient, even ASR will not allow you to pull away without difficulty. The type of tires and total weight of the vehicle as well as the gradient of the road also play a crucial role. If ASR intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. \n\nFunction of ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) \n\n& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is mal- \n\nfunctioning \n\nESP® can, within physical limits, monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the follow- ing situations: R when pulling away on wet or slippery road sur- \n\nfaces \n\nR when braking R if you are driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) in strong crosswinds \n\nIf the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehi- cle by performing the following actions: R one or more wheels are braked R the drive system performance is adapted \n\ndepending on the situation \n\nIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driv- ing safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe- \n\ncialist workshop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deac- \n\nWhen ESP® is deactivated by the driver, the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously: R vehicle stabilization may be delayed R Crosswind Assist is still active R the wheels may start to spin R ASR traction control is no longer active \n\ntivated \n\nIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the \n\nfollowing situations. \n\nIf the surface requires, temporarily deactivate ESP® when pulling away (/ page 146). Do not operate the vehicle on a roller dynamome- ter (e.g. for a performance test). If you have to operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop beforehand. If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a vehicle with this option, ESP® will be automatically deactivated for the duration of the activation/ deactivation process. If ESP® is malfunctioning or automatically deacti- vated, the ÷ warning lamp lights up yellow while the vehicle is running and the engine output may be reduced (/ page 26). % Only use wheels with the recommended tire size. Only then will ESP® function properly. \n\nIf ESP® is deactivated by the driver, ESP® will con- tinue to support you when braking. If the ÷ warning lamp on the instrument cluster flashes, one or more tires have reached their tire traction limit: R adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing \n\nroad and weather conditions \n\nR do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstan- \n\nces \n\nActivating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Quick Access 5 ESP % ESP® can only be activated and deactivated \n\nvia quick access when at least one other func- tion is available in quick access. Otherwise, you can find ESP® in the Assistance menu. \n\n# Select ESP. \n\nA prompt appears. # Select On or å  Off. \n\nDriving and parking 147 \n\nIf the ESP® OFF warning lamp å lights up per- manently on the instrument cluster, ESP® is deac- tivated. Observe the information on warning lamps and dis- play messages that may appear on the instrument cluster. \n\nFunction of ESP® Crosswind Assist \n\nCrosswind Assist does not react under the follow- ing conditions: R The vehicle is subjected to severe jolts and \n\nvibrations, e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces or potholes. \n\nR The vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or ice \n\nor when hydroplaning. \n\nR The driver is performing sudden and large \n\nIf the sensor system and evaluation logic detect trailer swinging movements, ESP® trailer stabiliza- tion initially brakes individual vehicle wheels in a targeted manner. It thus counteracts swinging movements. If the swinging movements do not stop, the vehicle is braked until the vehicle/trailer combination is stabilized. If necessary, the vehi- cle's engine output is limited. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combina- tion) starts to swerve, you are able to stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination only by braking. ESP® trailer stabilization helps you to stabilize the vehi- cle/trailer combination in this situation. ESP® trailer stabilization is active at speeds above approx. 40 mph (65 km/h). If ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction, trailer stabilization will not function. \n\nsteering movements. \n\nCrosswind Assist is operational again as soon as the driving conditions return to normal. Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind gusts that can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. Crosswind Assist intervenes depending on the direction and strength of the crosswind. A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep the vehicle on track. Information is shown on the instrument cluster in the event of a clearly perceptible intervention by Crosswind Assist. Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight or during slight cornering. \n\nFunction of EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu- tion) \n\nEBD has the following characteristics: R monitoring and controlling the brake pressure \n\non the rear wheels \n\nR improving driving stability when braking, espe- \n\ncially on bends \n\nFunctions of Active Brake Assist \n\nActive Brake Assist consists of the following func- tions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent brake force boosting \n\nFunction of ESP® trailer stabilization \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road \n\nand weather conditions \n\nIn poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilization cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. # Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. \n\nESP® trailer stabilization counteracts critical driv- ing situations in good time and thereby provides considerable assistance when driving with a trailer. Trailer stabilization is part of ESP®. \n\nActive Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual warning or warning tone, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti- cal situations. If there are pedestrians and cyclists crossing: in especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the optical warning and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or depress the brake pedal during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting \n\n148 Driving and parking \n\noccurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi- mum full-stop braking if necessary. Situation- dependent brake force boosting only intervenes when the brakes are applied firmly; otherwise, it remains within the autonomous braking process. \n\nresponsible for maintaining a safe dis- tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Be ready to brake and take evasive \n\naction if necessary. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident in case of limi- ted detection performance of Active Brake Assist \n\nAlso observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. \n\nActive Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and complex traffic situations. Due to the system, unjustified interventions or non-interventions by Brake Assist may occur in complex driving situations. In these cases, as well as in the event of malfunctions of Active Brake Assist, the brake system continues to be available with full brake force boosting and BAS. # Always keep a close eye on the traffic sit- uation and do not rely solely on Active Brake Assist. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle is \n\nThe individual subfunctions are available in the fol- lowing speed ranges: Distance warning function The distance warning function warns you at speeds greater than approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone sounds and the · distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. \n\nThe distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: \n\nVehicles traveling in front \n\nStationary vehi- cles \n\nCrossing vehicles \n\nCrossing pedes- trians/cyclists \n\nStationary pedes- trians \n\nUp to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) \n\nUp to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h) \n\nNo reaction \n\nUp to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) \n\nNo reaction \n\nAutonomous braking function The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: \n\nVehicles traveling in front \n\nStationary vehi- cles \n\nCrossing vehicles \n\nCrossing pedes- trians/cyclists \n\nStationary pedes- trians \n\nUp to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) \n\nUp to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h) \n\nNo reaction \n\nUp to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) \n\nNo reaction \n\nDriving and parking 149 \n\nSituation-dependent brake force boosting Situation-dependent brake force boosting may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: \n\nVehicles traveling in front \n\nStationary vehi- cles \n\nCrossing vehicles \n\nCrossing pedes- trians/cyclists \n\nStationary pedes- trians \n\nUp to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h) \n\nUp to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) \n\nNo reaction \n\nUp to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) \n\nNo reaction \n\nCanceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist \n\nR Pedestrians are obscured by other objects. R Bends with a narrow radius can hamper the \n\nYou can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with \n\nsystem's ability to react correctly. \n\nSetting Active Brake Assist \n\nkickdown. \n\nR Fully releasing the brake pedal (only during sit- uation-dependent brake force boosting). \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is switched on. \n\nActive Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- tion when one of the following conditions is fulfil- led: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of \n\nyour vehicle. \n\nSystem limits \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist \n\nThe following settings are available: R Early R Medium R Late R Off \n\nThe system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors are affected by snow, rain, fog or \n\n% It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is \n\nalways left activated. \n\n# Select a setting. \n\nheavy spray. \n\nR The sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or \n\ncovered. \n\nR The sensors are affected by interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflec- tions in parking garages. \n\nR If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has \n\nbeen detected and displayed. \n\nR Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds after starting the vehicle or after driving off. \n\nThe system may not react correctly in the following situations: R In complex traffic situations, objects may not \n\nalways be clearly detected. \n\nR Pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the \n\ndetection range of the sensors. \n\nThe last active setting is selected automatically every time the vehicle is started. Exception: if the last setting was Off, the Medium setting will be automatically activated the next time the vehicle is started. \n\nDeactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is \n\nalways left activated. \n\n# Select Off. \n\nThe distance warning function and autono- mous braking function are deactivated. \n\nWhen the vehicle is next started, the Medium set- ting is automatically activated. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the instru- ment cluster. \n\n150 Driving and parking \n\nCruise control \n\n▌Function of cruise control To maintain a previously stored speed, cruise con- trol accelerates and brakes the vehicle independ- ently. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the corresponding steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h). If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The status of cruise control and the stored speed are shown in the instrument cluster. \n\nDo not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In case of frequent changes of speed, e.g. in \n\nheavy traffic or winding roads \n\nR On slippery roads. The drive wheels may lose grip during acceleration and the vehicle may skid. \n\nR When visibility is poor \n\n▌Operating cruise control \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored \n\nspeed \n\nIf you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle deceler- ates. # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. \n\nRequirements:  R ESP® is activated, but may not intervene. R The driving speed is at least 15 mph \n\n(20 km/h). \n\nInstrument cluster display (color display) 1 Cruise control is selected. 2 Set speed gray: speed is stored, cruise control \n\nis deactivated. \n\n3 Set speed green: speed is stored, cruise con- \n\ntrol is activated. \n\nSystem limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient levels out. On long and steep downhill gradients, you should change down to a lower gear in good time. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. \n\n# To activate cruise control: push rocker switch \n\n# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is then saved and main- tained by the vehicle. # Push rocker switch 1 up. # To increase/reduce speed: push rocker switch \n\nor \n\n1 up. \n\n2 up or down. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). \n\nDriving and parking 151 \n\n# Press rocker switch 2 up or down and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments. \n\nor # Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure \n\npoint. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). \n\nor # Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure \n\npoint and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments. \n\nor # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Push rocker switch 2 up. If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maxi- mum permissible speed and this appears in the instrument display: # To adopt the detected speed: push rocker \n\nswitch 3 up. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed. \n\nDSR supports you when driving downhill. DSR maintains a set speed for you on downhill gradi- ents by applying the brakes as required. Maintain- ing the speed is dependent on the road surface conditions and the downhill gradient and cannot therefore be guaranteed in all situations. You can set the speed depending on the gear range to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals or the rocker switch on the steering wheel. DSR automatically controls in the following situa- tions: R If the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less than 2 mph (4 km/h), the speed is set to 2 mph (4 km/h) or it is set to the minimum speed for the respective gear range. \n\nR If you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) off- road, DSR switches to standby mode. DSR remains activated, but does not brake automat- ically. \n\nR If you drive downhill slower than 11 mph \n\n(18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previ- ously set speed. \n\nR If you drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h), \n\nDSR switches off automatically. \n\n# To deactivate cruise control: push rocker \n\n▌Activating/deactivating DSR \n\nswitch 3 (CNCL) down. \n\nIf cruise control is deactivated, it can be reactiva- ted as follows: R rocker switch 2 (SET+) or (SET-) stores the current speed and the vehicle maintains this speed \n\nActivating DSR \n\nR rocker switch 3 (RES) calls up the last speed stored and the vehicle maintains this speed \n\n% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter- \n\nvenes, cruise control is deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared. \n\nDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) \n\n▌Notes on DSR If you fail to adapt your driving style or you are inattentive, DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. DSR is only an aid. You are responsi- ble especially for a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. \n\nYou can activate DSR when the vehicle is station- ary or moving. # Press the upper section of switch 1. # Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h). \n\n152 Driving and parking \n\n# Release the brake or accelerator pedal. \n\nThe current speed is stored. When stationary, 2 mph (4 km/h) or the minimum possible speed for each gear range is stored. DSR main- tains the stored speed on the downhill gradient and brakes automatically. \n\nWhen DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls away, accelerates or brakes on an incline, the speed set corresponds to the speed at which the accelerator or brake pedal is released or the rocker switch is pressed during DSR regulation. This is only the case if you are not driving faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). DSR status display in the on-board computer R DSR is activated: \n\n# Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired \n\n- DSR and the set speed appear in the sta- tus area of the on-board computer. R DSR is activated, but is not intervening: \n\nspeed on the downhill gradient. \n\n# Release the brake or accelerator pedal. \n\nThe current speed is stored. \n\n- \n- \n\nYou are driving between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 28 mph (45 km/h). DSR and the speed 11 mph (18 km/h) appear in the status area of the on-board computer. DSR is in standby mode. \n\nor # Press rocker switch 1 up or down during a \n\nDSR regulation. The last saved speed is increased or reduced. \n\n# Release rocker switch 1. \n\nThe current speed is stored. \n\nR DSR is inactive: \n\n- \n- \n- \n\nYou are exceeding a speed of 28 mph (45 km/h). DSR appears in the status area of the on- board computer. In addition, the DSR Off message appears. DSR - - - appears in the status area of the on-board computer. \n\nSetting the speed while driving downhill You can set the speed to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and, depending on the gear range, up to 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals or the rocker switch on the steering wheel. \n\nor # Press rocker switch 1 up or down until \n\ndesired speed is reached. # Release rocker switch 1. \n\nThe current speed is stored. \n\n% It may be a moment before the vehicle starts to brake to the set speed. Take this delay into account when setting the speed with rocker switch 1. \n\nDeactivating DSR \n\nDriving and parking 153 \n\n# Press the upper section of switch 1. or # Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph \n\n(45 km/h). \n\nDSR deactivates automatically in the following sit- uations: R You drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h). R There is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys- \n\nR On slick or slippery roads, braking or acceler- \n\nating can cause the wheels to lose grip and the vehicle to skid. \n\nR Standing objects are not detected if they were \n\npreviously not detected as moving. \n\nR On bends, target vehicles may be lost or not \n\ndetected correctly. In connection with this, the system does not regulate to a target vehicle and unintentional acceleration may occur. \n\ntem. \n\nDo not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\n▌Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles ahead are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes, depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. Speed and distance are set and stored on the steering wheel. The speed can be set in the range between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 99 mph (160 km/h) or between 12 mph (20 km/h) and the maximum design speed. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Depending on the preselected distance, \n\nDISTRONIC intervenes either dynamically (short distance) or to save fuel (long distance). \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident from accelera- \n\ntion or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- erate or brake in the following cases, for exam- ple: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis- \n\ntance Assist DISTRONIC. \n\nR If the stored speed is called up and is con- siderably faster or slower than the cur- rently driven speed. \n\nR If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. \n\n# Always carefully observe the traffic con- \n\nditions and be ready to brake at all times. \n\nR Depending on the vehicle mass detected, the dynamics of the DISTRONIC intervention are reduced. \n\n# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. \n\nR Rapid acceleration to the stored speed is initi- ated if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuffi- cient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. \n\nSystem limits \n\nThe system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, forexample: R The radar sensors are disturbed by snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, glare, direct sunlight or highly variable light conditions. \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler- ation. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita- ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take \n\nevasive action. \n\nR The radar sensors may malfunction in parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or down- hill gradients. \n\nR If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. \n\n154 Driving and parking \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired \n\nR The seat occupancy recognition on the driver's seat has detected that the driver has fastened the seat belt. \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when \n\nR The check of the radar sensor system has been \n\nsuccessfully completed. \n\nActivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\nchanging lanes \n\nR to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or station- ary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles \n\nR to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic \n\nAs a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed \n\nThe speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer \n\n# Press button 1. # To activate without a stored speed: push rocker \n\nswitch 3 up M or down N. The current speed is then saved and main- tained by the vehicle. \n\nor # To activate with a stored speed: push rocker \n\n# Ensure that the driven speed complies \n\nwith traffic regulations. \n\n# Adjust the driving speed to suit current \n\ntraffic and weather conditions. \n\nswitch 4 up L. \n\n% If rocker switch 4 is pressed up twice, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated with the speed restriction displayed on the instru- ment cluster. \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles traveling in front, e.g. motorcycles or vehicles not traveling in line with your vehicle. \n\nAdopting the displayed limit speed when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active # Push rocker switch 4 up L. \n\n▌Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle has been started. R The parking brake has been released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R The driver's and front passenger door are \n\nclosed. \n\nThe limit speed displayed on the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. \n\nPulling away again with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Push rocker switch 4 up L. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly with \n\nforce. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. \n\nDriving and parking 155 \n\nDeactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\n# Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident due to \n\nActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat \n\nIf you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. \n\npoint and hold it there. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 5 mph (10 km/h)increments. \n\nIncreasing or reducing the specified distance from the vehicle in front # To increase the specified distance: push rocker \n\nswitch 2 down (Ò). \n\n# To reduce the specified distance: push rocker \n\nswitch 2 up (Ñ). \n\n# Push rocker switch 4 down O. # Depress the brake pedal. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated in the following circumstances: R The driver's seat belt buckle is open and the \n\nvehicle is traveling slower than 2 mph (3 km/h). \n\nInformation on Hill Start Assist \n\nHill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position h or k. R The parking brake has been released. \n\nR The driver's seat is not occupied. R The transmission is not in position h. R The parking brake is applied. R The driver's or front passenger door is open. R There is an internal error. \n\nThis gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto the vehicle rolling away \n\nIn addition to the deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, transmission position j is automatically engaged if one of these conditions is met or if the vehicle is traveling very slowly. \n\nIncreasing or reducing the speed # Push rocker switch 3 up M or down N \n\nAfter a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. \n\nto the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). \n\nor # Push rocker switch 3 up M / down N \n\nto the pressure point and hold it there. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 1 mph (1 km/h)increments. \n\nHOLD function \n\n▌Notes on the HOLD function \n\nRequirement The seat occupancy recognition on the driver's seat has detected that the driver has fastened their seat belt. \n\nor # Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure \n\nor \n\npoint. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). \n\nFunction The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes or when waiting in traffic. When you depress the accelera- tor pedal to pull away, the braking effect is can- celed and the HOLD function is deactivated. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil- ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. \n\n156 Driving and parking \n\nSystem limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. The incline cannot be greater than 30%. \n\n# Make sure that the activation conditions are \n\nmet. \n\n# Depress the brake pedal until the ë display appears in the instrument cluster display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. \n\n▌Activating/deactivating the HOLD function \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is stationary. R The vehicle has been started or has been auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. \n\nR The driver is seated and belted. R The electric parking brake is released. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position h, k or i. \n\n% If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. \n\nDeactivating the HOLD function # Vehicles with automatic transmission: depress the accelerator pedal when the automatic transmission is in position h or k. \n\n# Depress the brake pedal again with sufficient pressure until the ë display in the instru- ment cluster display goes out. \n\n% Vehicles with automatic transmission: the \n\nActivating the HOLD function \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle \n\nIf the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in \n\nthe power supply. \n\nautomatic transmission of your vehicle shifts to j after some time. This relieves the load on the service brake. \n\nWhen the HOLD function is activated, the auto- matic transmission automatically shifts to j in the following situations: R The driver leaves the driver's seat. R The driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off without ECO start/ \n\nstop function. \n\nR If the HOLD function is deactivated by \n\ndepressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. \n\nParking Assist PARKTRONIC \n\n# Always secure the vehicle against rolling \n\naway before you leave it. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to auto- \n\nmatic braking \n\nWhen the following functions are activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situa- tions: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function \n\nTo avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situa- tions: # When towing # In a car wash \n\n▌Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park- ing assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC indicates vis- ually and audibly the distance between your vehi- cle and an object. For vehicles with rear attachments or selected open vehicle model designations, there is special equipment without rear sensors. Here, the six sen- sors in the rear bumper are omitted. For the rear area and the side area, no distances to an obstacle are displayed and no optical warnings or warning tones are given. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. \n\nDriving and parking 157 \n\nin the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking or exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) to an obstacle. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m). You can set the warning tone in the multimedia system so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) (/ page 157). \n\nParking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multi- media system If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is not active and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC appears at speeds of up to approx- imately 6 mph (10 km/h). \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Quick Access # Select PARKTRONIC On. \n\nThe function is activated or deactivated depending on the previous setting. \n\n% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically \n\nactivated when starting the vehicle. \n\n▌Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 Settings  5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking  5 Set Warning Tones \n\nAdjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Adjust the value. \n\nSystem limits \n\nParking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per- \n\nsons, animals or objects \n\nR Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. over- hanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks \n\nThe sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. \n\n▌Deactivating/activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC \n\nAdjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. \n\nAdjust the value. \n\nSpecifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function. \n\nActivating or deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system should be reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function. \n\n* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at \n\nclose range \n\nParking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi- cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could other- wise be damaged. \n\n158 Driving and parking \n\nRear view camera \n\n▌Function of the rear view camera \n\nYou can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view \n\nThe area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mir- ror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. \n\nSystem limits \n\nThe rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog R If the ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at \n\nnight \n\nR If the area is illuminated with fluorescent light- \n\ning (the display may flicker) \n\nIf you have activated the function in the multimedia system, the image from rear view camera 1 appears in the multimedia system when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take for the current steering movement. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The image from rear view camera 1 appears in the multimedia system when the following condi- tions are fulfilled: R The vehicle is switched on. R Reverse gear has not been engaged. R The rear-end doors are opened. \n\nIn this way, the area behind the vehicle is moni- tored. When the rear-end doors are closed, the image from the rear view camera is switched off for approximately ten seconds. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for you paying attention to the surround- ings. You are always responsible for safe maneu- vering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuver- ing area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera cannot show all objects which are very near to or under the rear bumper. It will not warn you of a collision, people or objects. \n\nR If the temperature changes very quickly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage in the winter \n\nR If the ambient temperature is very high R If the camera lens is covered, dirty or fogged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 223) \n\nR The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera, its position and its setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nThe field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. a load- ing tailgate). % The display contrast may be impaired due to incidental sunlight or other light sources. In this case, pay particular attention. \n\n% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for \n\nexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. \n\n% Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually are. This includes, for example: R The bumper of a vehicle parked behind R The drawbar of a trailer R The ball neck of a trailer hitch R The tail-end of a truck R Slanted posts \n\nDriving and parking 159 \n\nOnly use the guide lines of the camera image for orientation. Do not travel further than the lowest horizontal guide line when approaching objects. You may otherwise damage your vehi- cle and/or the object. \n\nVehicles without Park Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: \n\nView of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed) \n\n1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to the ball head of the trailer hitch \n\n3 Ball head of the trailer hitch \n\nNormal view \n\nVehicles with Park Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: \n\n1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will \n\ntake at the current steering position (dynamic) \n\n2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- \n\nface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) \n\n3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft \n\n(1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely) \n\n4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately \n\n1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area \n\n5 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors \n\nNormal view \n\n1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will \n\ntake at the current steering position (dynamic) \n\n2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- \n\nface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) \n\n3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft \n\n(1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely) \n\n4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately \n\n1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area \n\nWide-angle view \n\n5 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors \n\n6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist \n\nPARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis- tance away (between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m)) \n\n7 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) \n\n160 Driving and parking \n\n% If the distance to the obstacle is less than \n\napprox. 1.3 ft (0.4 m), the warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be red. % If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red. If the system fails at the rear, the segment dis- play changes in the following ways: R The rear segments are shown in red when \n\nbacking up \n\nR The rear segments are hidden when driv- \n\ning forwards \n\nIf Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. \n\nThe surround view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention to the surround- ings. You are always responsible for safe maneu- vering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuver- ing area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors \n\nViews of the surround view camera % With the special equipment without rear sen- \n\nsors, only the front segments are shown in the left-hand image area, see example image \"Top view, without rear sensors\". Warnings are given only for the front area. \n\nYou can select from different views: \n\nTop view \n\nWide-angle view \n\nTop view, with rear sensors 1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will \n\ntake at the current steering position (dynamic) \n\nView of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed) \n\n1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to the ball head of the trailer hitch \n\n3 Ball head of the trailer hitch \n\n2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- \n\nface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) \n\n3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft \n\n(1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely) \n\n4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately \n\n1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area \n\nSurround view camera \n\n▌Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con- sists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, for example, when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. \n\n5 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors \n\n6 Red warning display of Parking Assist \n\nPARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less \n\nDriving and parking 161 \n\nView of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed) \n\nTop view, without rear sensors 1 Yellow path marking the course the tires will \n\ntake at the current steering position (dynamic) \n\n2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- \n\nface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) \n\n3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately \n\n1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area \n\n4 Red guide lines at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width including outside mirrors \n\nView of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed), with rear sensors \n\n1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to the ball head of the trailer hitch \n\n3 Ball head of the trailer hitch \n\nSide view of the outside mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. \n\nWhen Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray. % If the entire system fails, the segments of the \n\nwarning display are shown in red. If the system fails at the rear, the segment dis- play changes in the following ways: R The rear segments are shown in red when \n\nbacking up \n\nR The rear segments are hidden when driv- \n\ning forwards \n\nIf Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. \n\nGuide lines % The guide lines in the multimedia system dis- play show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. \n\nSide view, with rear sensors 1 Path indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position \n\n2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less \n\n3 Your vehicle from above 4 Marker of the wheel contact points 5 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with \n\noutside mirrors folded out \n\nIf the distance to the object lessens, the color of warning display 2 changes. \n\nSystem failure If there is no operational readiness, the following display appears in the multimedia system: \n\n162 Driving and parking \n\nThe image from the surround view camera appears automatically in the multimedia system when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The vehicle is switched on. R The rear-end doors are opened. \n\nSystem limits \n\nThe surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R If the front doors are open R If the outside mirrors are folded in R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog R If the ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at \n\nnight \n\nIn this way, the area behind the vehicle may be monitored. When the rear-end doors are closed, the image from the rear view camera is switched off for approximately ten seconds. See the notes on cleaning the surround view cam- era (/ page 223). \n\n▌Selecting a view for the surround view camera \n\nRequirements:  R The Auto. Rear View Cam. is activated in the \n\nmultimedia system (/ page 162). \n\nR If the area is illuminated with fluorescent light- \n\ning (the display may flicker) \n\n# Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia sys- \n\nR If the temperature changes very quickly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage in the winter \n\nR If the ambient temperature is very high R If the camera lens is covered, dirty or fogged \n\nup. \n\nR If cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nDo not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension, or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the cam- era system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. loading tailgate). % The display contrast may be impaired by sud- den, incidental sunlight or other light sources, e.g. when you are driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. \n\n% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for \n\ntem. \n\n▌Activating/deactivating automatic operation of the rear view camera The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for you paying attention to the surround- ings. You are always responsible for safe maneu- vering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the path of your vehicle. Pay attention to your sur- roundings and be ready to brake at all times. Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking \n\n# Activate or deactivate Auto. Rear View Cam.. \n\n▌Activating/deactivating maneuvering assistance Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking \n\n# Activate or deactivateManeuvering Assis- \n\ntance. \n\n% If maneuvering assistance is switched on and rear sensors are present, the following func- tions are active: R Drive Away Assist (/ page 167) R Rear Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 167) \n\nexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. \n\nDriving and parking 163 \n\n% If the maneuvering assistant is activated and \n\nthere are no rear sensors, Drive Away Assist is active but only works when driving forwards (/ page 167). \n\nATTENTION ASSIST \n\nYou can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The journey length since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION \n\nASSIST: \n\n▌Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST can assist you on long, monot- onous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increased lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect drowsiness or increased lapses in concen- tration in good time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour- neys, take regular and timely breaks that allow you to rest properly. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detec- ted by the system is adapted accordingly. \n\nIf fatigue or increased lapses in concentration are detected, the Attention Assist: Take a Break!warn- ing appears in the instrument cluster. You can acknowledge the message and take a break if nec- essary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. \n\n- \n- \n\nInstrument cluster with display (black and white) \n\n- \n- \n\nThe fuller the circle is, the higher the detected attention level is The circle in the center of the display emp- ties from the outside inwards as attentive- ness decreases \n\nYou can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The journey length since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION \n\nASSIST: \n\nThe fuller the bar is, the higher the detec- ted attention level is The bar empties as attentiveness decrea- ses \n\nInstrument cluster with display (color) \n\nIf ATTENTION ASSIST cannot calculate the atten- tion level and cannot issue a warning, the Atten- tion Level message appears. If a warning is displayed in the instrument cluster, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga- tion to this rest area. This function can be activa- ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the instrument cluster when the vehicle is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the vehicle is restarted. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. \n\nSystem limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. \n\n164 Driving and parking \n\nThe functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restric- ted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all, in the following situations: R The journey lasts less than approximately \n\n30 minutes \n\nR The road condition is poor (uneven road sur- \n\nface or potholes) \n\nR The vehicle is subjected to a strong crosswind R You have a sporty driving style (high cornering \n\nspeeds or high rates of acceleration) \n\nR The time is set incorrectly R You change lanes and vary your speed fre- \n\nquently in active driving situations \n\nThe ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when continu- ing the journey in the following situations: R You switch off the vehicle R You unfasten your seat belt and open the driv- er's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break) \n\n▌Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist \n\nSetting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. \n\nTraffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with multi- function camera 1. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions on the instrument cluster. Traffic Sign Assist also uses the stored map data. Therefore, the display is updated without a traffic sign having been detected in the following situa- tions: R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. freeway \n\nentrance or exit ramp \n\nR When a village or city boundary stored in the \n\ndigital map is passed \n\nThe system displays the traffic signs valid for the vehicle model registration. A distinction is made between the valid traffic signs for a permissible gross vehicle weight (GVW) ≤7716 lbs (3.5 t), >7716 lbs (3.5 t) ≤ and camper van. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restric- tion indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). \n\nWarning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an audible one as well. \n\nSuggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function. \n\nInstrument cluster display \n\nIf ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or an increasing lack of attention, it suggests a nearby rest area. \n\n# Select a suggested rest area. \n\nYou are guided to the selected rest area. \n\nTraffic Sign Assist \n\n▌Function of Traffic Sign Assist \n\nInstrument cluster (color display) 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with a restriction \n\nDriving and parking 165 \n\n% Only one of traffic signs 1 or 2 is displayed at any one time on the instrument cluster, if necessary with additional sign 3. If two valid traffic signs are detected at the same time, a plus sign appears next to the traffic sign on the instrument cluster as an indication that both traffic signs are displayed in the naviga- tion system. \n\nR After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which \n\nare affixed or attached to them. \n\n▌Setting Traffic Sign Assist Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist \n\nSwitching automatic adoption of speed limits on/off # Select Accept Speed Limit. # Activate or deactivate the function. \n\nSpeed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or cruise control. \n\nTraffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in the speed- ometer. \n\nSystem limits \n\nShowing detected traffic signs on the media dis- play # Select Display in Central Display. # Activate or deactivate the function. \n\nThe system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumi- nation of the road, highly variable shade condi- tions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. \n\nR If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, \n\ndirect sunlight or reflections. \n\nSetting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or None. \n\nSetting the warning threshold This value determines at which point the warning is given once a speed limit is exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set a speed. \n\nR If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. \n\nR If traffic signs are difficult to detect, e.g. \n\nbecause they are dirty, covered, faded, cov- ered with ice, damaged, badly positioned, poorly lit or twisted. \n\nR If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g. \n\ntraffic signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, in neighboring lanes or parallel roads. R If signs do not conform to the standard. R If signs or road layouts are specific to the \n\ncountry and deviate from the route guidance in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond con- struction sites. \n\nBlind Spot Assist \n\n▌Function of Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area directly next to and at the side behind the vehicle. % USA only: \n\nThis device has been approved by the FCC as a \"Vehicular Radar System\". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar sys- tem only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. \n\n166 Driving and parking \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind \n\nSpot Assist \n\nand make sure there is sufficient clear- ance. \n\nBlind Spot Assist does not react to either sta- tionary objects or vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. \n\n% An exit warning is not issued for sliding doors \n\nand rear-end doors. \n\nOverview \n\nWhen the vehicle is stationary, an object is detected from behind in the detection range. \n\nRed warning lamp in the outside mirror \n\nBlind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side from other road users and obstacles. If a vehicle is detected above speeds of approx- imately 7.5 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse- quently enters the detection range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mir- ror lights up red. % When a trailer is connected, the radar sensor's field of vision may be impaired, thereby mak- ing limited monitoring possible. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. \n\nIf a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral detection range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds. The red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warn- ing lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. \n\nExit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and warns vehicle occupants when leaving the vehicle about any approaching vehicles. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit \n\nwarning \n\nThe exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approach- ing you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the \n\ntraffic situation when opening the doors \n\nWhen the vehicle is stationary, a door on the relevant side of the vehicle is opened. An object which is close to your vehicle is detected in the detec- tion range. \n\n% This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi- mum of three minutes after the drive system has been switched off. The end of the availa- bility of the exit warning function is indicated by a series of flashes in the outside mirror. The exit warning function is only an aid and is no substitute for the attentiveness of the vehicle occupants. Responsibility lies with the vehicle occupants when opening doors and leaving the vehicle. \n\nSystem limits \n\nBlind Spot Assist and the exit warning function may be limited in the following situations: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors \n\nare obscured \n\nR if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy \n\nrain, snow or spray \n\nR if narrow vehicles are within the detection \n\nrange, e.g. bicycles R if lanes are very wide R if lanes are very narrow R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their \n\nlane \n\n% Stationary or slow-moving objects are not dis- \n\nplayed. \n\nCollision warning \n\nWarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor- ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving \n\nDriving and parking 167 \n\nalongside long vehicles such as trucks for a pro- longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning function may be limited in the fol- lowing situations: R when the sensor is blocked by adjacent vehi- \n\ncles in narrow parking spaces R when people are approaching \n\n▌Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. \n\nA risk of a collision may arise in the following situa- tions, for example: R If the driver uses the accelerator pedal instead \n\nof the brake pedal. \n\nR If the wrong gear is selected. \n\nThe Drive Away Assist function is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h \n\nwhen the vehicle is at a standstill. \n\nR If the detected obstacle is less than approx- \n\nimately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. \n\nR The maneuvering assistant function is activa- \n\nted in the audio system. \n\nDrive Away Assist \n\n▌Function of Drive Away Assist % Drive Away Assist is only available for vehicles \n\nwith automatic transmission. \n\n% If no rear sensors are installed, Drive Away \n\nSystem limits Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and when driving with a trailer. If no rear sensors are installed, Drive Away Assist only works in the direction of travel forwards. \n\nAssist only works in the direction of travel for- wards. (/ page 156). \n\nRear Cross Traffic Alert \n\nDrive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detec- ted in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, a symbol appears on the camera image of the multimedia system. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- ted detection performance of Drive Away Assist \n\nDrive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. \n\n# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the traffic situation per- mits and that it is safe to take evasive action. \n\nDrive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi- tute for your attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the path of your vehicle. \n\n▌Function of Rear Cross Traffic Alert The system uses the radar sensors in the bumper. This way the area adjacent to the vehicle is contin- ually monitored. If the radar sensors are obscured by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possi- ble. % Also read the notes on Blind Spot Assist \n\n(/ page 165). \n\nVehicles with Blind Spot Assist: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when backing out of a parking space. If a vehicle is detected, the warn- ing lamp in the outside mirror on the correspond- ing side lights up red. If it detects a critical situa- tion, a warning tone also sounds. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist and Parking Assist  PARKTRONIC: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when backing out of a parking space. If a critical situation is detected, a warning symbol appears on the camera image of the audio system. If the driver does not respond to the warn- ing, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automati- cally. In this case, a warning tone sounds. \n\n168 Driving and parking \n\nThe Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is active under the following conditions: R Blind Spot Assist is activated. R Reverse gear is engaged or the vehicle is back- \n\nkeep the vehicle in the lane without the driver's cooperation. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane. \n\ning up at walking pace. \n\nSystem limits \n\nR The maneuvering assistance function is activa- \n\nted in the audio system. \n\nThe Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is unavailable when the vehicle is being driven with a trailer. \n\nLane Keeping Assist and Active Lane Keeping Assist \n\nThe system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly vari- able shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or spray. \n\nR Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or \n\nreflections. \n\n▌Function of Lane Keeping Assist \n\nR There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fog- ged up, damaged or obscured. \n\nR No lane markings or several unclear lane mark- ings are present for one lane, e.g. in a con- struction area. \n\nR If the lane markings are worn away, dark or \n\ncovered up. \n\nR If the distance to the vehicle in front is too \n\nshort and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. \n\nR The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. \n\nR The road is very narrow and winding. \n\n▌Functions of Active Lane Keeping Assist \n\nLane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unintentionally leav- ing your lane. You may also be warned by a notice- able vibration in the steering wheel or by a warning tone and by the status symbol flashing on the instrument cluster. The function is available in the speed range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). The warning will be issued when the following con- ditions are met at the same time: R If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings. R If a front wheel drives over lane markings. \n\nYou can activate and deactivate the Lane Keeping Assist warning. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid and is not intended to \n\nActive Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin- tentionally leaving your lane. You may also be warned by a noticeable vibration in the steering wheel or by a warning tone and by the status sym- bol flashing in the instrument cluster. In addition, \n\nDriving and parking 169 \n\nyou may be guided back into your lane by a lane- correcting brake application. A corresponding message appears in the instrument cluster. The warning is issued when the following condi- tions are met at the same time: R The driving system detects lane markings. R If a front wheel drives over lane markings. \n\nR A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® \n\nor Active Brake Assist. \n\nR You have adopted a sporty driving style with \n\nhigh cornering speeds or high rates of acceler- ation. \n\nR ESP® has been switched off. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con- \n\nA lane-correcting brake application occurs when the following conditions are met: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane mark- \n\nings on both sides of the vehicle. \n\nnection to the trailer has been correctly estab- lished. \n\nR If a loss of tire pressure or a malfunctioning tire has been detected and displayed. \n\nR A front wheel drives over a solid lane marking. \n\nA corresponding message appears in the instru- ment cluster. The brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). You can either deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning or switch off the system completely. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic condi- tions. The driving system is an aid for when you unintentionally leave or cross the lane and not a system for automatically keeping to the lane. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane. \n\nThe system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly vari- able shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or spray. \n\nR Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or \n\nreflections. \n\nR There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fog- ged up, damaged or obscured. \n\nR No or several unclear lane markings are pres- ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area. R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or \n\ncovered up. \n\nR The distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detec- ted. \n\nR The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R The roadway is very narrow and winding. \n\n▌Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 Assistance # Select Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane  \n\nIf a lane-correcting brake application from Active Lane Keeping Assist occurs, display 1 appears in the instrument cluster display. \n\nKeeping Assist. \n\n# Activate or deactivate the function. # Select Warning and activate or deactivate. \n\nSystem limits \n\nNo lane-correcting brake application from Active Lane Keeping Assist occurs in the following situa- tions: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or acceler- \n\nate. \n\nR You switch on the turn signal. \n\nWork mode \n\nADR (working speed control) \n\n▌Function of ADR (working speed control) When activated, ADR automatically increases the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed you have set. \n\n170 Driving and parking \n\n% After a cold start, the idle speed of the engine is increased automatically. If the preset work- ing speed is lower than the increased idle speed, the working speed is only reached once the engine has completed the warm-up phase. It is only possible to activate ADR with the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in position j. \n\n▌Adjusting ADR \n\n▌Activating/deactivating ADR \n\n# Engage power take-off or activate ADR. # To increase: press switch 1. # To reduce: press switch 2. \n\nTrailer operation \n\nNotes on trailer operation \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if \n\nthe tongue weight is exceeded \n\n# To activate: press switch 1 while the vehicle \n\nis running. The message Working Speed Governor Active appears in the instrument cluster. \n\nThe carrier system may detach from the vehi- cle, thereby endangering other road users. # Always comply with the permissible tongue weight when using a carrier. \n\n# To deactivate: press switch 2 while the vehi- \n\ncle is running. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita- \n\nADR will deactivate automatically in the following situations: R You release the parking brake. R You depress the brake pedal. R The vehicle moves. R The control unit detects a malfunction. \n\nble ball neck \n\nIf you install an unsuitable ball neck, the trailer hitch and the rear axle may be overloaded. This can significantly impair the driving charac- teristics and the trailer may become loose. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Only install a ball neck that complies with \n\nthe permissible dimensions and is designed for the requirements of trailer operation. \n\n# Do not modify the ball neck or the trailer \n\nhitch. \n\nYou can find specifications regarding the ball neck on the trailer's identification plate. You can find specifications regarding the trailer on the towing vehicle's identification plate and in the Technical Data (/ page 283). \n\nDriving and parking 171 \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto incorrectly installed ball neck \n\nIf the ball neck is not correctly installed and secured, it may become loose during a journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of fatal injuries. # Install and secure the ball neck as descri- bed in the ball neck manufacturer's installation instructions. \n\n# If a ball neck is installed, ensure sure \n\nthat it is properly secured before every journey. \n\nWhen backing up the towing vehicle, ensure that there is no one between the vehicle and the trailer. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehi- cle correctly, the trailer may become detached. Once it has been coupled and is roadworthy, the trailer must be in a horizontal position behind the towing vehicle. Note the following regarding the tongue weight: R Make full use of the maximum tongue weight, \n\nwhere possible. \n\nR Never fall below a legally prescribed minimum tongue weight; the tongue weight must always be positive. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to a ball \n\nneck that is not correctly installed or secured \n\nR Do not exceed or fall below the permissible \n\ntongue weights – this must be observed during loading and unloading of the trailer. \n\nIf the ball neck is not correctly installed and secured, the trailer may come loose. # Install and secure the ball neck as descri- bed in the ball neck manufacturer's installation instructions. \n\n# If a ball neck is installed, ensure sure \n\nthat it is properly secured before every journey. \n\n* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by \n\ncontinuously depressing the brake pedal \n\n# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- \n\nously whilst driving. \n\n# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. \n\n* NOTE The operating permit may be invali- dated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches \n\nThe installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited. # Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches. \n\nBe sure to comply with the operating instructions of the manufacturer of the trailer coupling and the ball neck. Place your vehicle/trailer combination on surfaces that are as even as possible and secure it against rolling away (/ page 140). Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. \n\nDo not exceed the following values: R Permitted braked or unbraked towing capacity The maximum permissible towing capacity for unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg). \n\nR Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle R Permissible gross weight of the trailer R Permissible gross combination weight R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer \n\nThe relevant permitted values, which must not be exceeded, can be found in the following places: R In your vehicle documents R On the identification plate of the trailer hitch R On the trailer's identification plate R On the vehicle identification plate \n\nIf there are discrepancies between the values, the lowest one shall apply. Before driving off, ensure the following: R The tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle has been set for the maximum load. \n\nR The headlamps have been set correctly. \n\nValues approved by the manufacturer can be found on the identification plates and in the section for the towing vehicle (/ page 246). Your vehicle will behave differently with a trailer than without: R The vehicle/trailer combination will be heavier. R The vehicle/trailer combination will be restric- \n\nted in its acceleration and gradeability. \n\n172 Driving and parking \n\nR The vehicle/trailer combination will have an \n\nincreased braking distance. \n\nR The vehicle/trailer combination will be more \n\nsusceptible to crosswind gusts. \n\nR The vehicle/trailer combination will require \n\nmore sensitive steering. \n\nR The vehicle/trailer combination will have a \n\nlarger turning circle. \n\nYou will therefore make use of the engine's braking effect and will not have to brake as often to control the speed. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from over- heating and wearing too quickly. If you need addi- tional braking, depress the brake pedal intermit- tently rather than continuously. Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilization (/ page 147). \n\nThis may impair the vehicle's driving characteris- tics. When driving with a vehicle/trailer combination, always adapt your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Drive carefully. Keep a suffi- cient safe distance. Comply with the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or 62 mph (100 km/h), even in countries in which higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/trailer combinations. Attach only an approved trailer hitch to your vehi- cle. Use only a ball neck that has been approved for your vehicle. Further information about availa- bility and installation – including that of the trailer electrics – is available from a qualified specialist workshop. The trailer hitch is one of the most important vehi- cle parts for road safety. Comply with the instruc- tions on operation, maintenance and servicing in the manufacturer's operating instructions. % Your vehicle's bumpers are not suitable for \n\nDriving tips \n\nIf the trailer starts to sway, remember the following points: R Do not accelerate under any circumstances. R Do not countersteer. R If necessary, apply the brakes. \n\n% You can reduce the risk of the trailer swaying and rocking by retrofitting stabilizer bars or trailer stability programs. Further information is available from any authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. \n\nWhen you are driving with a trailer, observe the fol- lowing points: R Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in \n\nfront than when driving without a trailer. \n\nR Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently first of all so that the trailer closes up behind your vehicle. Then, increase the brake force rapidly. \n\ninstalling detachable trailer hitches. Do not attach any rented trailer hitches or any other detachable trailer hitches to the bumpers. % During trailer operation, remember that \n\nPARKTRONIC is available only to a limited extent, if at all. \n\nR The values given for start-off gradeability refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that engine output – and thus start-off gradeability – will decrease with increasing elevation. \n\n% The height of the ball head will change \n\nCoupling/uncoupling a trailer \n\ndepending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. \n\nCoupling a trailer \n\nDriving instructions The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before setting off, consult the trailer's vehicle documents to find out the maximum permissible speed. Your vehicle will behave differently with a trailer than without and will consume more fuel. On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time. % This also applies if cruise control is switched \n\non. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due \n\nto full discharge \n\nCharging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to \n\ncharge the trailer battery. \n\n# Shift the selector lever to position j. # Apply the vehicle's parking brake. # Close all the doors. \n\nDriving and parking 173 \n\n# Position the trailer on a level surface behind \n\nthe vehicle. \n\n% The height of the ball head will change \n\ndepending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. \n\n# Couple up the trailer. # Establish all electrical and other connections \n\nto the trailer. \n\n# Remove objects or devices that are preventing \n\n# Shift the selector lever to position j. # Apply the vehicle's parking brake. # Close all the doors. # Apply the trailer's parking brake. # Further secure the trailer against rolling away \n\nwith a wheel chock or similar object. \n\n# Remove the trailer cables and safety chains. # Uncouple the trailer. \n\nthe trailer from rolling, e.g. chocks. # Release the trailer's parking brake. % The vehicle subharness has a cable connec- \n\ntion to the brake light indicator lamp. \n\nObserve the maximum permissible trailer dimen- sions (width and length). Most US states and all Canadian provinces pre- scribe the following points, and you are urgently recommended to comply with these: R Safety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be routed in a criss-cross pattern under the drawbar. They must be connected to the trailer hitch and not to the bumper or to the vehicle's axle. Leave sufficient slack in the chains. This also allows for sharp cornering. \n\nR A separate brake system is required for certain \n\ntrailers. \n\nR A safety feature is required for braked trailers. Determine the specific requirements according to the relevant laws. If the trailer becomes detached from the tow- ing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the trailer brakes and can thus reduce the danger. \n\nUncoupling a trailer \n\n& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer \n\nWhen uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged \n\noverrun brake. \n\nDo not uncouple a trailer with an inertia-activated brake in a state of overrun. Otherwise, the rebound of the inertia-activated brake can damage your vehicle. \n\nInformation about towing a trailer \n\nOperating a trailer is subject to many statutory regulations such as speed restrictions. Many states also require an auxiliary separate functional braking system when towing a weight that exceeds a certain limit. For your safety, it is recommended to use a separate functional braking system on any towed vehicle. Make sure that your trailer combination meets local regulations. This not only applies to your place of residence, but also to your destination. Information on this can be obtained from the police and local authorities. Comply with the following when driving with a trailer: R Practice cornering, stopping and backing up in a traffic-free location. In this way, you will gain driving experience and become accustomed to the new handling characteristics. R Before driving, check the following: \n\n- \n- \n- \n- \n- \n- \n\nthat the trailer tow hitch and ball coupling are secure that the safety switch for braked trailers is functioning correctly that the safety chains are secure and undamaged that the electrical connections are secure that the lights are functioning correctly the wheels for damage and correct tire pressure (/ page 243) \n\nR Adjust the outside mirrors so that you have a clear view of the rear section of the trailer. R If the trailer is equipped with an individual brak- ing system, check before each journey whether the brakes are functioning correctly. R If the trailer has electronically controlled \n\nbrakes, pull away carefully with the vehicle/ trailer combination. Brake manually using the \n\n174 Driving and parking \n\nbrake controller and check whether the brakes are functioning correctly. \n\nR Secure the load on the trailer in line with the \n\nPermissible trailer loads and tongue weights \n\nWeight information \n\nrequirements and rules for load-securing meth- ods. \n\nR When driving with a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is secure and that the lights and brakes are functioning correctly. R Bear in mind that the handling characteristics are more unstable when towing a trailer than when driving without a trailer. Avoid sudden steering movements. \n\nR The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, \n\naccelerates more slowly, has a reduced climb- ing ability and an increased braking distance. It is more susceptible to side winds and requires careful steering. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to an \n\nunbraked trailer with an excessive gross weight \n\nIf you pull an unbraked trailer with a gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than 1,653 lbs (750 kg), the vehicle's brake system may over- heat. This increases the braking distance and may even cause the brake system to fail. # Always use a trailer with a separate brak- ing system if you are pulling a gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than 1,653 lbs (750 kg). \n\nR If possible, do not brake suddenly, but rather moderately at first so that the trailer can acti- vate its brakes. Then increase the pressure on the brake pedal. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the drive train, transmis- sion or trailer tow hitch due to excess gross combination weight \n\nR If the automatic transmission shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, restrict the shift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2 or 1. A lower gear and reduced speed decrease the risk of engine damage. \n\nThe permissible gross combination weight is exceeded. The drive train, the transmission or the trailer tow hitch may be damaged. # Comply with the permissible gross com- \n\nR When driving on a downhill gradient, shift to a lower gear to use the engine's braking effect. Avoid constant braking, as this could cause the vehicle brakes and possibly also the trailer brakes to overheat. \n\nR If the coolant temperature increases signifi- cantly when the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch the air-conditioning sys- tem off. Coolant heat can also be dissipated by switch- ing the airflow and the temperature of the heater or air conditioning to the maximum level. Open the windows if necessary. R When overtaking, pay particular attention to \n\nthe increased overtaking distance of your vehi- cle/trailer combination. Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer combi- nation you will require a longer stretch of road before switching back to the original lane. \n\nbination weight. \n\nIn vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible gross combination weight is less than the sum of the per- missible gross vehicle weight plus the permissible trailer load. If either the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the permitted gross vehicle weight or the permitted trailer load values will be reduced accordingly. In this case, you may only partially load the trailer or the vehicle. The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated on the basis of the weight of the trailer plus the weight of its load and equipment. If the trailer is equipped with a separate braking system, then the maximum gross trailer weight is 5000 lbs (2268 kg) or 7500 lbs (3402 kg). The maximum permissible drawbar tongue weight on the ball head is 500 lbs (227 kg) or 750 lbs (340 kg). However, the actual tongue weight must not exceed the value given on the trailer hitch or trailer identification plates. Where the values differ, the lowest shall always apply. The gross combined weight rating (GCWR) is calcu- lated on the basis of the gross trailer weight plus the gross vehicle weight, including a driver's \n\nDriving and parking 175 \n\nweight of approximately 150 lbs (68 kg). The maxi- mum permissible gross combination weight is vehi- cle-specific and equipment-dependent. When driv- ing with a trailer, you should not exceed the maxi- mum permissible gross combination weight rating (GCWR). The permissible values, which must not be excee- ded, can be found in your vehicle documents and on the identification plates of the trailer hitch, the trailer and the vehicle. The values approved by the manufacturer can also be found in the \"Technical data\" section. Where the values differ, the lowest shall always apply. \n\nLoading the trailer Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. Do not allow the weight to fall below the minimum permis- sible tongue weight. Otherwise, the trailer may become detached. R Distribute the load over the vehicle and the \n\ntrailer so as not to exceed either the maximum permissible values for the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and gross trailer weight (GTW), the gross combination weight rating (GCWR), or the maximum permissible gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and tongue weight (TWR) of your vehicle. \n\nTrailer power supply \n\nIncorrect cabling of the connector plug may inter- fere with other electronic systems in the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that you have the cabling of the connector plug carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. You can connect accessories up to a maximum of 240 W to the permanent power supply. Do not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. Your vehicle may be equipped with a range of elec- trical equipment for trailer operation. Depending on your trailer, you may need an adapter for the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped with a permanent power supply at the factory. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. Note that the trailer's permanent power supply is not switched off when the vehicle's on-board elec- trical system voltage is low. This could completely discharge your vehicle's starter battery. Further information on the electrical equipment currently installed on your vehicle and on installing the trailer electrics can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nR Add the drawbar tongue weight (TWR) on the \n\nball head to the rear axle load. This will ensure that you do not exceed the permissible gross axle weight rating (GAWR). \n\nR Add the vehicle load to the drawbar tongue \n\nweight (TWR) on the ball head. This will ensure that you do not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). \n\nChecking vehicle and trailer weight R Make sure that the weights of the towing vehi- cle and the trailer comply with the maximum permissible values. Have the vehicle/trailer combination weighed on a calibrated weighing machine. The vehicle/trailer combination com- prises the towing vehicle including driver, pas- sengers and load as well as the laden trailer. R Check the maximum permissible gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles (GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the gross combination weight rating (GCWR) and the drawbar tongue weight (TWR). \n\n176 Instrument cluster and on-board computer \n\nOverview of the instrument cluster \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident if the instru- \n\nment display fails \n\nIf the instrument display has failed or is mal- functioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at \n\na qualified specialist workshop. \n\nIf you are uncertain regarding the operational safety of your vehicle, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Inform a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nInstrument cluster \n\nInstrument cluster with display (black and white) 1 Speedometer 2 Indicator lamps display 3 Tachometer 4 Display (black and white) \n\n* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively \n\nhigh engine speeds \n\nThe engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over- \n\nrevving range. \n\nWhen the red marking on tachometer 3 is reached (overspeed range), the fuel supply will be interrupted in order to protect the engine. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the \n\nhood \n\nInstrument cluster with display (color) 1 Speedometer 2 Display (color) 3 Tachometer 4 Coolant temperature display 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator \n\nIf you open the hood in the event of an over- heated engine or fire in the engine compart- ment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other \n\nescaping hot operating fluids. \n\nDuring normal driving, the coolant temperature display 4 is permitted to rise to the red marking. \n\n# Before opening the hood, allow the \n\nengine to cool down. \n\n# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. \n\nInstrument cluster and on-board computer 177 \n\nOverview of the buttons on the steering wheel \n\n6 ò Main menu button (multimedia system) 7 Touch Control, right (multimedia system) 8 % Back button, right (multimedia system) \n\nOperating the on-board computer \n\n& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- \n\nmation systems and communications equipment \n\nVariant 1 1 % Back button, left (on-board computer) 2 Touch Control, left (on-board computer) 3 Button group for cruise control or Active Dis- \n\ntance Assist DISTRONIC \n\n4 Button group: \n\n£ Voice-operated control f Displays favorites (multimedia system) VOL: using the 8 control, increases/ reduces the volume or switches off the sound 6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call \n\n5 ò Main menu button (multimedia system) 6 Touch Control, right (multimedia system) 7 % Back button, right (multimedia system) \n\nIf you operate information systems and com- munication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the \n\ntraffic situation permits. \n\n# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. \n\nYou must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. \n\nOperating the on-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) % The displays of the on-board computer appear \n\non the instrument cluster display (/ page 178). \n\nWhen the function is switched on, different signal tones will provide feedback while the on-board computer is being operated. These include a signal tone when the end of a list is reached or when a list is being scrolled through. \n\nVariant 2 1 % Back button, left (on-board computer) 2 Touch Control, left (on-board computer) 3 Main menu button (on-board computer) 4 Button group for cruise control or Active Dis- \n\ntance Assist DISTRONIC \n\n5 Button group: \n\n£ Voice-operated control f Displays favorites (multimedia system) VOL: using the 8 control, increases/ reduces the volume or switches off the sound 6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call \n\nVariant 1 \n\n178 Instrument cluster and on-board computer \n\nThe on-board computer is operated via left-hand Touch Control 2 and back button on the left 1. \n\n# To call up a submenu or confirm a selection:  \n\npress the left-hand Touch Control 2. \n\n# To exit a submenu: press the back button on \n\nthe left 1. \n\nIf you are in a submenu and press and hold back button on the left 1, the main menu will appear. \n\nOverview of the instrument cluster display \n\nVariant 2 \n\nThe on-board computer is operated using the fol- lowing buttons: R Back button on the left 1 R Left-hand Touch Control 2 R Main menu button on the left 3 \n\nOverview of the instrument cluster (color) \n\n1 Outside temperature 2 Transmission position 3 Time 4 Alternating display \n\nThe following menus are available depending on the equipment: R Service (/ page 179) R Radio (/ page 182) R Trip (/ page 180) R Media (/ page 182) R Phone (/ page 182) R DriveAssist (/ page 179) R Settings (/ page 183) \n\nInstrument cluster display (black and white) \n\n# To call up the main menu: press main menu \n\nbutton on the left 3 or press the back button on the left 1 repeatedly, or press and hold this once. \n\n1 Outside temperature 2 Alternating display 3 Time 4 Transmission position \n\n% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist  \n\nDISTRONIC: you can call up the main menu of the on-board computer with the ò button. # To browse through the menu bar: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control 2. # To call up a menu or confirm a selection: press \n\nthe left-hand Touch Control 2. \n\n# To browse through displays or lists in the  \n\nmenu: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control 2. \n\nFurther views on the instrument cluster display: Z Gearshift recommendation é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC switched \n\noff \n\n¯ Cruise control (/ page 150) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC \n\n(/ page 153) \n\nz DSR (/ page 151) ë HOLD function (/ page 155) \n\nInstrument cluster and on-board computer 179 \n\n_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 87) Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched off 1 A door is not fully closed. è Rear window wiper switched on \n\n(/ page 96) \n\n+ LOW RANGE active (/ page 128) SOS  Emergency call system not active NOT  READY h Active Lane Keeping Assist switched off \n\nThe following functions are available on the service menu: R Announcements: message memory \n\n(/ page 289) \n\nR DEF: display the DEF fill level (/ page 136) R Tires: \n\n- \n- \n\nCheck the tire pressure with the tire pres- sure monitoring system (/ page 250) Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 251) \n\n(/ page 168) \n\nR ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date \n\næ Active Brake Assist switched off \n\n(/ page 213) \n\n(/ page 147) \n\nR Engine Oil Level: measure the engine oil level \n\ne Blind Spot Assist switched off \n\n(/ page 165) \n\nCalling up the assistant display \n\nVehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: instructions and traffic signs detected (/ page 164). \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service \n\n# Select the desired display and confirm. \n\nAdjusting the instrument lighting \n\n# Turn brightness control 1 upwards or down- \n\nwards. The lighting of the instrument cluster and the controls in the vehicle interior will be adjusted. % In vehicles without brightness control 1, the instrument lighting can be adjusted via the on- board computer (/ page 183). \n\nInstrument cluster display (color) \n\nThe following displays are available on the assis- tant display: R Assistance graphic R Attention level (/ page 163) \n\n# Switch between the displays and confirm the \n\nselected display. \n\nMenus and submenus \n\nCalling up functions on the service menu \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service \n\nThe following status displays are available on the assistant display: R Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched off R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC specified \n\ndistance (/ page 153) \n\n# Select and confirm the required function. \n\n180 Instrument cluster and on-board computer \n\nInstrument cluster display (black and white) \n\nInstrument cluster display (color) \n\nThe following status displays are available on the assistant display: R Lane markings solid and thick: Lane Keeping \n\nStandard display (example) \n\n1 Trip distance 2 Total distance \n\nAssist on and ready to issue warnings R Lane markings solid and thin: Lane Keeping Assist on and not ready to issue warnings R Lane markings dotted: Lane Keeping Assist off R Û ATTENTION ASSIST off R d Blind Spot Assist on and ready to issue warnings (lines of the radio waves solid) R c Blind Spot Assist on and not ready to issue warnings (lines of the radio waves bro- ken) \n\nR e Blind Spot Assist off \n\nInstrument cluster display (black and white) \n\nStandard display (example) \n\n1 Trip distance 2 Total distance \n\nCalling up displays on the trip menu \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Trip \n\n# Select the desired display and confirm. The following displays are available on the trip menu: R Standard display R Range and current fuel consumption \n\nWith certain engines, a recuperation display is also shown. If only a small amount of fuel is left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled will appear instead of the approximate range. \n\nR ECO display (/ page 121) R Trip computer: - From Start - From Reset \n\nInstrument cluster display (color) Trip computer (example) \n\n1 Distance covered (from start/from reset) 2 Driving time (from start/from reset) 3 Average speed (from start/from reset) 4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from \n\nreset) \n\nR Digital speedometer \n\nInstrument cluster and on-board computer 181 \n\nCalling up navigation instructions on the on-board computer \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Navigation \n\nInstrument cluster display (black and white) \n\nTrip computer (example) \n\n1 Distance covered (from start/from reset) 2 Driving time (from start/from reset) 3 Average speed (from start/from reset) 4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from \n\nNo change of direction announced (example) \n\nreset) \n\nResetting values in the trip menu of the on-board computer \n\n1 Distance to the next destination 2 Estimated arrival time 3 Distance to the next change of direction 4 Name of current road \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Trip % The spelling of the displayed main menu may differ. Therefore, pay attention to the menu overview for the instrument cluster (/ page 177). \n\nYou can reset the values of the following functions: R Trip Odometer: \n\n- \n\nReset Trip Odometer? \n\nR Trip computer: - From Start - From Reset \n\nR ECO display \n\n# Select the function for which the value is to be \n\nreset and confirm this selection. \n\n# Confirm the Reset Values? prompt with Yes. \n\nChange of direction announced (example) 1 Street into which the change of direction leads 1 Destination route of the change of direction 2 Distance to the change of direction 3 Change of direction symbol 4 Recommended lane and the new lane that \n\nappears during the change of direction (white) \n\n5 Possible lane 6 Unrecommended lane (dark gray) \n\nFurther possible displays are available on the Navi- gation menu: R Direction of Travel: The direction of travel and the road currently being traveled are displayed. \n\nR New Route... or Calculating Route...: A new \n\nroute is being calculated. \n\nR Road Not Mapped: The road is not known, e.g. \n\nit has only recently been constructed. \n\nR No Route: The route to the selected destina- \n\ntion cannot be calculated. \n\n182 Instrument cluster and on-board computer \n\nR Off Map: The map for the current position is \n\nnot available. \n\nOperating media playback with the on-board com- puter \n\nR Area of Destination Reached: You have \n\nreached the target area. \n\nR O: You have reached the destination or an \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Media \n\nintermediate destination. \n\n# Exit the menu or select and confirm a destina- \n\ntion. If a destination is entered and confirmed, route guidance starts. \n\n# If route guidance was previously active, a query appears whether the current route guidance is to be terminated. # Confirm the prompt. \n\nRoute guidance is started. \n\nSelecting a radio station \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Trip \n\n1 Media source 2 Current track and track number 3 Artist's name 4 Name of the album \n\nThe following displays are available on the media menu: R Media source selection list R Current playback \n\n# Select and confirm the media source. # Select and confirm the required playback. % This is how to select a station when TV is the \n\nmedia source. \n\n1 Frequency range 2 Station 3 Name of the track 4 Artist's name \n\nThe following displays are available: R Frequency range R Station list \n\n# Select the radio station's frequency or a radio \n\nstation from the station list. \n\n# Confirm the selection. \n\nDialing a telephone number using the on-board computer \n\n& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- \n\nmation systems and communications equipment \n\nIf you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driv- ing, you will be distracted from the traffic situa- tion. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the \n\ntraffic situation permits. \n\nWhen you select a station in the station memory, the storage location appears beside the station name. When you select a saved station in the fre- quency range, a star appears beside the station name. \n\n# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. \n\nWhen using the phone, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur- rently driving. \n\nInstrument cluster and on-board computer 183 \n\nRequirements:  R The mobile phone is connected to the multime- \n\ndia system. \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Phone \n\nSelect one of the following options: R Previous calls R Phone book R Call status \n\nCalling up settings on the on-board computer \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Settings \n\nThe following entries can be set in the Settings menu: R Light \n\n- \n\nInstr. Clust. Light. Setting \n\nR Vehicle \n\n- \n\nRain Sensor Switching on/off \n\nVehicles with MBUX multimedia system: the most recent telephone calls (dialed numbers, accepted and missed calls) are displayed on the Phone menu. # Select and confirm a telephone number. \n\nR Heating Setting R Display and Operation \n\n- \n\nSwitching permanent Display Additive  (DEF) on and off \n\nIf only one telephone number has been saved  for the entry: the telephone number is dialed. # If several telephone numbers have been saved  for the entry: select and confirm a telephone number. The telephone number is dialed. \n\n# Select an entry and confirm the selection. # Make the necessary changes. \n\nInstead of the selected telephone numbers, the fol- lowing displays may appear: R Please Wait: The application is currently start- ing. If no Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phone is established, the menu for authorizing and connecting a mobile phone will be dis- played in the multimedia system . \n\nR Updating Data…: The call list is being updated. R Importing Contacts: The mobile phone's con- tacts, or a memory medium's contacts are being imported. \n\nAccepting/rejecting a call When you are called, the Incoming Call message appears on the display. # Press 6 to accept the call or ~ to reject \n\nit. \n\nYou can also accept or reject the call using the 6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel. \n\n184 Mercedes me \n\nMercedes me calls \n\nMaking a call via the overhead control panel \n\nR Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes- \n\nBenz \n\nData is transmitted during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz customer center (/ page 185). \n\nCalling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system \n\nRequirements:  R Access to a mobile phone network is available. R The contract partner's mobile network cover- age is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehi- cle data can be transferred automatically. \n\n1 Breakdown assistance call button F 2 Cover for G button (SOS button) 3 G button (SOS button) \n\nMaking a breakdown assistance call # Press button 1. \n\nMaking an emergency call # Briefly press the cover on G button 2 to \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Phone  5 g # Call Mercedes me connect. \n\nWith your consent, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display. \n\nThen, you can select a service and be connected to a contact at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Cen- ter. \n\nopen it. \n\n# Press and hold G button 3 for at least one \n\nsecond. \n\nCalling the Mercedes-Benz customer center after automatic accident or breakdown detection \n\nAn emergency call can still be triggered when a breakdown assistance call is active. This has prior- ity over all other active calls. \n\nInformation about the Mercedes me call using the breakdown call button \n\nA call has been made to the Mercedes-Benz cus- tomer center via the overhead control panel or the multimedia system using the breakdown call but- ton (/ page 184). You can reach the desired service via the voice dialog system: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz customer center for general \n\ninformation about the vehicle \n\nYou can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle has detected an accident or break- \n\ndown situation. \n\nR The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning light is switched on. \n\n% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit- uations under limited conditions. If an accident or breakdown is detected, the emer- gency guide shows safety instructions in the multi- media system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to get support from the Mercedes-Benz customer center. # Select Call. \n\nR After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service \"Accident and Break- down Management\" is active, the vehicle \n\nMercedes me 185 \n\ndata is transferred automatically (/ page 187). \n\nR The Mercedes-Benz customer center will \n\ntake your call and organise breakdown and accident assistance. \n\nConsenting to data transfer for a Mercedes me call \n\nRequirements:  R There is an active Mercedes me call via the \n\nmultimedia system or the buttons in the over- head control panel (/ page 184). \n\nYou may be charged for these services. \n\n% Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be made. This has priority over all other active calls. % If the service is available: in addition, if the Mercedes me connect \"Telediagnostics\" service is active, a similar query may appear at a later time in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz customer center or have received help, this query can be ignored or rejected. \n\n% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz customer center with Later the message will disappear and reappear at a later time. The query triggered by the \"Telediagnostics\" Mercedes me connect service can either be confirmed or rejected. After rejection, it is no longer displayed. \n\n% The prompt to confirm data transfer does not \n\nappear in all countries. \n\n# Select Yes. \n\nRelevant identification data is transmitted automatically. \n\nMore information on Mercedes me: https:// www.mercedes.me \n\nTransferred data during a Mercedes me call \n\nWhen you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and smooth service. The following requirements must be met for the data transfer: R The vehicle is switched on. R The necessary data transmission technology is supported by the mobile phone network pro- vider. \n\nArranging a service appointment via Mercedes me call \n\nR A sufficient mobile phone connection quality is \n\nprovided. \n\nIf you have activated the maintenance manage- ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz customer cen- ter. You will then receive individual recommenda- tions regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. You will receive an offer for the upcoming mainte- nance scopes from the service partner stored in Mercedes me. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your confirmation, the vehicle data is sent and the Mercedes-Benz customer center deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. They will contact you to confirm the appoint- ment and, if necessary, to discuss the details. % If you select Later after the service message \n\nappears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. \n\nMulti-stage transmission depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R Available mobile radio transmission technology R Activated Mercedes me connect services R Selected service in the voice dialog system \n\n% A request for consent to data transmission is only made if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service has not been activated. \n\nData transmission when Mercedes me connect services are not activated \n\nIf no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data will be transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Vehicle country code \n\n186 Mercedes me \n\nR Set language for the multimedia system R Call number of the communication platform \n\ninstalled in the vehicle \n\nIf a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also trans- mitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data \n\nservice partners commissioned by the Mercedes- Benz customer center. Please refer to the data pro- tection information on the Mercedes me website at https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after the call to the Mercedes-Benz customer center has been set up. % The recorded message is not available in every \n\ncountry. \n\nIf a call was made via the multimedia system after automatic accident or breakdown detection, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location \n\nIf the Accident and Breakdown Management selec- tion has been made via the voice dialog system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data can be additionally requested from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz customer center: R Current vehicle location \n\nIf the data protection request has been declined, the following data will be transferred to enable tar- geted advice and a smooth service: R Reason for the initiation of the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt R Vehicle country code R Set language for the multimedia system R Call number of the communication platform \n\ninstalled in the vehicle \n\nMercedes me connect \n\nInformation about Mercedes me connect \n\n% Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center to find out whether these func- tions are available in your country. \n\n% Please note that product scopes can vary \n\ndepending on the model series, year of pro- duction and equipment, as well as between private and commercial user accounts. Mercedes me connect comprises a number of services. Using the multimedia system or the overhead con- trol panel, you can use the following services, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (Break- down call button or the situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) \n\nR Emergency Call System (automatic emergency \n\ncall and SOS button) \n\nData transmission when Mercedes me connect services are activated Only in the second step, only for the respective activated services, further case-specific data is transmitted in order to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com \n\nData processing The data transmitted as part of the call will be deleted from the transmitting systems once the call has been completed, provided they are not used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The case-related data will be processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz customer center and, if nec- essary for case processing, forwarded to the \n\nMercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. You will find the breakdown call button and the SOS button in the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 184). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 184). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, call the national emergency services first using the stand- ard national emergency service phone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Emergency Call System (/ page 227). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com \n\nMercedes me 187 \n\nFurther information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com \n\nInformation on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management \n\nThe Accident and Breakdown Management can, amongst others, include the following functions: R Supplement to the Emergency Call System \n\n(/ page 227) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for- wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- dent and Breakdown Management. However, call forwarding is not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance on location by a techni- cian and/or towing away of the vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. \n\nR Supplement to the emergency guide after auto- \n\nmatic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 184) In the event of a breakdown or accident, exten- ded vehicle data is sent, enabling optimum support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the appointed service partner or breakdown mechanic. \n\nR If available: addition to the Mercedes me con- \n\nnect Telediagnostics service With the Telediagnostics function, the service provider records certain wear and failure mes- sages, insofar as these can be clearly interpre- ted and are available by monitoring diagnosa- ble components. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or impend- ing breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes- Benz Customer Center for further assistance. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. \n\nData transferred during Mercedes me connect call services \n\nThe data transferred during the Mercedes me con- nect call depends on: R The reason for the initiation of the call R The service selected in the voice dialog system R The activated Mercedes me connect services \n\nThe data which is transferred is listed in the cur- rently valid terms of use and data protection infor- mation of Mercedes me connect. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under \"My Mercedes me account\", \"Terms of use\". \n\nMercedes me and apps \n\nInformation about Mercedes me \n\nRequirements: R To use the services, registration in the \n\nMercedes me Portal must have been carried out. \n\nR The terms of use for Mercedes me connect \n\nservices have been agreed to. \n\nR The vehicle and user account are linked to one \n\nanother. \n\nWhen you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. % Please note that product scopes can vary \n\ndepending on the model series, year of pro- duction and equipment, as well as between private and commercial user accounts. \n\nAvailability is country-dependent. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure that you always keep the Mercedes \n\nme Apps up to date. \n\n% These services are subject to technical restric- tions such as mobile coverage and mobile net- work quality and the interpretability of the transmitted data in the processing systems. Under certain circumstances, this may result in delays or omission of the message in the multimedia system. \n\nFurther information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com \n\nCalling up a Mercedes me user account \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Mercedes me & Apps \n\nVehicle is linked to user account # Select Mercedes me. \n\nInformation about the linked user account appears. \n\n188 Mercedes me \n\nYour vehicle is not linked to the user account % If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user \n\naccount, you can create one at: https:// www.mercedes.me or in the Mercedes me App. A valid email address or phone number is required for this. # Select Mercedes me. # Follow the instructions on the media display to \n\nlink the user account with the vehicle. \n\n% Linking via the instructions on the media dis- \n\nplay is then only possible if an MBUX multime- dia system is installed in the vehicle. % If the Mercedes me App is available on a \n\nmobile phone, the vehicle link can be made via the displayed QR code. \n\nCalling up Mercedes me services \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is connected with the user \n\naccount. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Mercedes me & Apps # Select Services. \n\nYou will be shown the Mercedes me services that you have already purchased and those that you can also still purchase within the vari- ous categories. To activate or deactivate the services, log in to the Mercedes me Portal with your user account. \n\nRemoving the link between the user account and the vehicle \n\nRequirements:  R The user profile of the user account that was \n\nfirst linked to the vehicle is selected. \n\nR The profile is synchronized. R A PIN has been saved. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Mercedes me \n\n# Select Delete Vehicle Assignment. # Enter the PIN of the linked user account. % Only the user whose user account was linked to the vehicle first can remove the link between all user accounts and the vehicle. \n\nMBUX multimedia system 189 \n\nOverview and operation \n\nNotes on MBUX multimedia system \n\nIn the center console stowage compartment you can find the following ports and interfaces: R Two USB ports or one USB port \n\n& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- \n\nmation systems and communications equipment \n\nIf you operate information systems and com- munication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the \n\ntraffic situation permits. \n\n# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. \n\nYou must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. \n\nThe USB port with the ç symbol facilitates the connection of the mobile phone with the multimedia system using a suitable cable. This will enable you to use the functions of the mobile phone via Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto. \n\nR Stowage space with charging interface and \n\nNFC interface (if available) \n\nNotes on the media display Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 224). Automatic temperature-controlled switch-off fea- ture: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The media display may then switch off completely for a while. % If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it may \n\nbe difficult to read the media display. \n\nOverview of the MBUX multimedia system \n\nAnti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on pro- tection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\n1 Touch Control and multimedia system control \n\npanel \n\n2 Media display with touch functionality \n\nOpens/closes the center console stowage compartment above the display 3 Operating strip, calls up applications \n\n% You can find further information about opera- tion as well as about applications and services in the Digital Operator's Manual. \n\n190 MBUX multimedia system \n\nHome screen overview \n\n1 On the home screen: displays the first three \n\nOperating the MBUX multimedia system \n\napplications In other displays: calls up the home screen \n\nUsing Touch Control \n\n2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY display only when the emer- gency call system (eCall) is not available 5 Displays, e.g. network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, signal strength of the mobile phone network, time \n\n6 Calls up the Notifications Center \n\nThe star indicates new notifications. 7 Calls up an application using the symbol 8 Name of the application, beneath the current \n\nselection or information \n\n9 Quick-access (in the example: calls up desti- nation entry and enters the destination address for home) \n\nA Number of applications and currently selected \n\ndisplay area \n\nB Calls up SUGGESTIONS and FAVORITES \n\n1 © button \n\nCalls up the home screen \n\n2 Touch Control 3 Back button \n\nReturns to the previous display 4 Control panel for multimedia system \n\nPress the f rocker switch down: shows favorites Turn the controller: adjusts the volume Press the controller: switches sound off Press the 6 rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call Press the ~ rocker switch down: ends or declines a call \n\nMBUX multimedia system 191 \n\nNavigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control 2 with single-finger swipes. # To open a menu or list: press Touch Control \n\nCalls up the control menu of the last active media source 6 Vehicle button \n\n2. \n\nSets vehicle functions \n\n# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To close a menu or list: press button 3. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direc- \n\ntion. \n\nUsing the touchscreen # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or \n\nright. \n\n7 | button \n\nPressing repeatedly calls up the desired audio source 8 ß button \n\nCalls up navigation \n\n# Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. # Call up the application. \n\n# To select an entry: tap on the entry. # To enter characters with the keyboard: tap on a \n\nbutton. \n\n# To use handwriting to enter characters: write \n\nthe character with one finger on the touchscreen. \n\n# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fin- \n\ngers together or apart. \n\nQuick access to stations and music tracks # Press button 5. \n\nThe control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected. # Swipe to the left or right. \n\nRadio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or the next music track is selected. \n\n# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a  website: move two fingers together or apart. # To call up a global menu in the applications:  touch the touchscreen and hold until the OPTIONS menu appears. \n\nCalling up applications using buttons \n\n1 % button \n\nCalls up the telephone 2 Volume rocker switch Adjusts the volume 3 %/© button \n\nPress briefly: returns to the previous display Press and hold: calls up the home screen \n\n4 8/Ü button \n\n# To hide the control menu: press button 5. \n\nFunction of the Voice Control System \n\nIf you use the voice control system in an emer- gency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnec- essarily delayed. Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. With the Voice Control System, various applica- tions of the MBUX multimedia system can be oper- ated by voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the vehicle is switched on and is available from the driver's and front passenger's seat. The following applications of the multimedia sys- tem can be operated: R Navigation R Telephone R Radio R Media player R Messages R Vehicle functions \n\nPress briefly: switches sound off Press and hold: activates or deactivates the multimedia system \n\n5 Quick-access button for media \n\n192 MBUX multimedia system \n\nStarting the Voice Control System \n\n# Press the £ rocker switch up on the multi- \n\nSelecting profile options # Select Ä for a profile. \n\nfunction steering wheel. You can say a voice command after the acous- tic signal. \n\nInformation on profiles, suggestions and favorites \n\nThe following functions are available: R Resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting favorites R Configuring suggestions \n\nUsing the multimedia system up to seven profiles can be created in the vehicle. Profiles store your personal vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their profile before the journey, without changing the settings of other drivers. The following settings are saved in your profile, for example: R Radio (including station list) R Last destinations R Favorites and suggestions \n\nThe vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most likely naviga- tion destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The requirements for that are the selec- tion of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favorites are quick accesses to frequently used applications. Favorites can be selected from cate- gories or added directly in an application. \n\nConfiguring profiles and suggestions \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 f Profiles \n\nConfiguring suggestions # Select Ä for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow  Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Sug- gestions on or off. \n\n# To deactivate the learning function for one  day: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula- ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function. \n\nSystem settings \n\nOverview of the system settings menu \n\nIn the system settings menu, you can make set- tings in the following menus and control elements: R Display R Control elements: \n\n- \n- \n\nKeyboard language and handwriting recog- nition Sensitivity of the Touch Controls \n\nCreating a new profile # Select W Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm with a. # Select Continue r. # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect  \n\nPhone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile. # Select Finished. \n\nR Voice Control System R Sound: \n\n- Entertainment - Navigation and traffic announcements - Telephone R Connectivity: \n- - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC \n\nTransmission of the vehicle location \n\nR Time & date R Language R Units for distance R Software updates R Data import and data export \n\nMBUX multimedia system 193 \n\nR PIN protection R System reset \n\nRequirements for the installation: R The vehicle is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and \n\nInformation on important system updates \n\naccepted. \n\nImportant system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required \n\nfor installation \n\nR Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update by \n\nrestarting the system \n\n% To use online updates, there must be an Inter- net connection. To use automatic online updates, your vehicle must have a perma- nently installed communication module. % You can manually start the software update in the system settings. If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically. Settings for automatic software updates can also be made in the system settings. \n\nR The electric parking brake is applied. \n\nIf all requirements have been fulfilled, the downloa- ded system update is installed. The multimedia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle func- tions are restricted. If errors occur during the installation, the multime- dia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous ver- sion is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a qualified specialist work- shop to resolve the problem. \n\nSetting up a Wi-Fi hotspot \n\nRequirements:  R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multime- dia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. \n\nR The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. \n\nThe multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Download \n\nThe system update will be downloaded in the background. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth \n\nActivating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi. \n\nR Details \n\nInformation about the pending system update is displayed. \n\nR Later \n\nThe system update can be downloaded man- ually at a later time. \n\nConnecting the multimedia system to an external hotspot via Wi-Fi % The connection procedure may differ depend- ing on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. \n\nDeep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com- plete and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the vehicle is switched off and back on, for exam- ple. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location \n\nbefore starting the installation. \n\n# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot. # Select the type of connection to be established on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. \n\nConnecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi \n\nnetwork. \n\n# Select Connect Using Security Key. \n\n194 MBUX multimedia system \n\n# Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's oper- ating instructions). \n\n# Hold the device to be connected at the vehi- \n\ncle's NFC interface. \n\n# Select Finished. \n\n# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys- \n\ntem. \n\nThe mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. \n\n# Confirm the entry with ¡. \n\nActivating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi \n\nGenerating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key. # Select New security key. \n\nnetwork. \n\n# Activate Permanent Internet Connection. \n\nA connection will be established with the newly created security key. \n\nConnecting with a known Wi-Fi network # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network. \n\nThe connection is established again. \n\n# To save a security key: select Save. \n\nWhen a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered. \n\nConfiguring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot- spot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. # Select the type of connection to be established on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. \n\n% Additional data volume is required for the \n\n\"Internet in the Car\" service and the associ- ated use of web browsers, Internet Radio or the Wi-Fi hotspot, for example. This can be purchased directly from the mobile phone net- work provider. \n\nConnecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot. \n\nA security key is displayed. \n\nSystem language \n\n▌Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation mes- sages. The selected language affects the charac- ters available for entry. The navigation announce- ments are not available in all languages. If a lan- guage is not available, the navigation announce- ments will be in English. \n\n▌Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 System 5 Language \n\n# Set the language. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text \n\ninformation can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select ةيبرعلا as the language from the language list. Navigation announcements are then also made in Arabic. \n\n# Select the vehicle from the device to be con- nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the \n\nmedia display on the device to be connected. \n\nResetting the multimedia system (reset function) \n\n& WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure \n\nof multimedia display functions \n\n# Confirm the entry. \n\nConnecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). \n\nWhile the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when \n\nthe vehicle is stationary. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Settings  5 System  5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones R Individual user profiles \n\n% The guest profile is reset when the settings are \n\nrestored to the factory settings. \n\nA query appears again asking if the system should really be reset. # Select Yes. \n\nIf PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears asking if you also wish to restore this to the factory settings during a reset. # Variant 1: select Yes. # Enter the current PIN. The PIN is reset. # Variant 2: select No. \n\nThe current PIN stays the same after resetting. \n\n% If you have forgotten your PIN, an Mercedes- Benz can deactivate the PIN protection for you. \n\nA prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes. \n\nThe multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. \n\nResetting using a button # Press both the % and f buttons at the \n\nsame time until the multimedia system restarts (at least 15 seconds). The multimedia system is restarted. No data is deleted during this process. \n\nNavigation \n\nSwitching on navigation \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Navigation # Alternatively: press the ß button. \n\nThe map shows the current vehicle location. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guid- ance is active. \n\n# To show: tap on the touchscreen. # To hide: the menu is hidden automatically. \n\nMBUX multimedia system 195 \n\n196 MBUX multimedia system \n\nNavigation overview \n\nExample: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional desti- \n\nnation entry options \n\n2 To interrupt route guidance (if route guidance \n\nis active) \n\n3 To repeat a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off \n\n4 To call up the ON THE WAY menu • To show Route Overview • To select Alternative Routes • Report Traffic Incident (Car-to-X) • To call up the TRAFFIC menu - To show Traffic Announcements - To show Area Alerts - To show Live Traffic Subscription Info \n\n• To show Route List • To call up the POSITION menu - Save Position - To show Compass 5 Quick-access and settings \n\n• To show Traffic • To show Highway Information • Via Advanced options to use View, Announcements and Route \n\n% Some options are not available in all countries. \n\nMBUX multimedia system 197 \n\nEntering a destination \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Navigation  5 ª Where to? \n\n1 Federal state or province in which the vehicle \n\nis located \n\n2 To enter a POI or address \n\n% You can find further information about destina- tion entry, e.g. three-word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual. \n\nUnderneath: Multimedia system suggestions during destination entry During input: delete the entry with £ 3 List with additional destination entry options During destination entry: select search result \n\n4 To delete entered character 5 a To confirm an entry 6 To call up handwriting recognition 7 To enter a space 8 To activate voice input 9 To set the written language A To switch to numbers, special characters and \n\nsymbols \n\nB To switch to upper-case or lower-case letters # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can be \n\nmade in any order. \n\nChanging the country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov- \n\nince 1. \n\n# Select the federal state or the province in 1. # Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list 3. # Select the federal state or the province from \n\nlist 3. \n\nUsing online search % Requirements: \n\nR Internet is connected (symbol Q in the \n\nstatus bar). \n\nR Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes \n\nThe following entries can be made, for example: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category R Contact name \n\n# Select a search result in list 3. # Calculate the route (/ page 198). \n\nme Portal. \n\nR The vehicle is linked to the user account and you have accepted the terms of use for the Mercedes me connect services. R The navigation services are available and \n\nhave been activated. \n\n% Online search is not available in all countries. Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destinations or if \n\n198 MBUX multimedia system \n\nyou change countries, the online search is availa- ble. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a three-word address. # Select country indicator 1. # Select the provider for the online service from \n\nthe countries list. \n\n# Enter the destination in 2. \n\nThe search results are displayed. # Select the destination in list 3. \n\nThe detailed view for the route is displayed. \n\nor # Enter the destination in 2. \n\n# Select ¥. \n\nThe route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins. \n\nor # Select ¦. # Select Set as Waypoint. \n\nThe destination address is set as the next inter- mediate destination. \n\nor # Select Start New Route Guidance. \n\nThe destination address is set as the new des- tination. The previous destination and the inter- mediate destinations are deleted. Route guid- ance to the new destination begins. \n\nThe search results are displayed. # Select the destination in list 3. \n\nCalculating a route and using settings for route guidance \n\n- \n- \n- \n- \n- \n\nThe detailed view for the route is displayed. \n\nRequirements:  R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. R For the commuter route:  \n\nYou have created a profile (/ page 192). The Allow Destination Suggestions option is switched on. The Activate Commuter Route option is switched on. The multimedia system has gathered suffi- cient data in order to show destination sug- gestions. Routes have been learned for these desti- nation suggestions. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Navigation \n\nSelecting route settings # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration with \n\nDynamic Route Guidance r. \n\n# Selecting route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Alternative Routes. \n\nAlternative routes are calculated for every route. \n\n# Activate Activate Commuter Route. \n\nIf the requirements for a commuter route are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output. \n\nUsing map functions \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Navigation \n\nIncreasing the map scale # When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with \n\none finger on the media display. \n\nor # Move two fingers apart on the media display. \n\nDecreasing the map scale # Tap with two fingers on the media display. or # Move two fingers together on the media dis- \n\n1 ¥ No route yet \n\nplay. \n\n¦ A route has been mapped \n\nMBUX multimedia system 199 \n\nMoving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the \n\ntouchscreen. \n\n# To reset the map to the current vehicle posi- \n\ntion: tap \\ briefly. \n\nSelecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol \n\n# Switch on Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing Traf- \n\nfic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, traffic events are displayed, e.g. road works, road clo- sures and warning messages. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting a period of one minute or longer are taken into consideration. \n\non the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D  Heading Up to 2D North Up. \n\nActivating or deactivating motorway information # Select Z. # Activate or deactivate Highway Information. \n\nDisplaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Commu- nication If hazard warnings are available these are shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic Incidents options. # Set the options. \n\nUsing Mercedes me connect services \n\nRequirements:  R There is an Internet connection. The Q \n\nsymbol appears in the status line of the media display. \n\nIf Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route. \n\nDisplaying weather information and other map contents % The Navigation Plus service is available and \n\nR Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me \n\nPortal. \n\nR The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use for the navigation services. If Mercedes me connect is active, the Ô symbol is shown, for example, in the status line of the media display. If the transfer of the vehicle position is activa- ted, the x symbol appears. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes.me \n\nR The Mercedes me connect service is available. R The Mercedes me connect service has been \n\nactivated at an Mercedes-Benz . \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Navigation \n\nDisplaying the traffic situation with Live Traffic Information # Select Z. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. \n\nhas been booked. The Weather service is acti- vated. # Select Z. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up until the ONLINE MAP CONTENT cat- \n\negory appears. \n\n# Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. \n\nCurrent weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. \n\nParking service \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head- room clearance \n\nIf the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- aged. # Observe the signposted headroom clear- \n\nance. \n\n# If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. \n\n200 MBUX multimedia system \n\n# Observe the changed vehicle height with \n\nTelephone \n\nadd-on roof equipment. \n\nTelephony \n\n* NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions \n\nThe data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers. Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accu- racy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area. # Always observe the local information and \n\nconditions. \n\n▌Notes on telephony \n\n& WARNING Risk of distraction from operat- ing integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion \n\nIf you operate communication equipment inte- grated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the \n\n% The Navigation Plus service is available and \n\nhas been booked. The Parking service is acti- vated. \n\n% This service is not available in all countries. # Tap on j on the map. # Select a parking option. \n\ntraffic situation permits. \n\n# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident from operating \n\nThe map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if availa- ble): R Destination address, distance from current \n\n- \n\nvehicle position and arrival time \n\nR Information on the parking garage/car \n\npark, for example: - Opening times \n\n- Parking charges Current occupancy - Maximum parking time - Maximum clearance height  \n\nThe maximum clearance height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances. \n\nR Available payment options (Mercedes pay, \n\ncoins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at parking meters) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number \n\nmobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion \n\nMobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As a driver, only operate mobile commu- nication devices when the vehicle is sta- tionary. \n\n# As a vehicle occupant, use mobile com- munication devices only in the designa- ted area, e.g. in the rear passenger com- partment. \n\nYou must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Bluetooth® connection: The menu view and the available functions in the phone menu are partly dependent on the Blue- tooth® profile of the mobile phone connected. \n\nIf the mobile phone supports these Bluetooth® profiles, the full range of features is available: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) \n\n- \n\nThe mobile phone's contacts are automati- cally displayed on the multimedia system. \n\nR MAP (Message Access Profile) \n\n- \n\nThe message functions of the mobile phone can be used on the multimedia sys- tem. \n\nIrrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used with any mobile device. For information on the functionality of the mobile device to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: In the following cases, calls may be interrupted while driving: R there is insufficient network coverage in the \n\narea. \n\nR you switch to a transmitting/receiving station in which no communication channel is free. R the SIM card used is not compatible with the \n\nnetwork available. \n\nR a mobile phone with \"Twincard\" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time. \n\nThe multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are call- ing support HD Voice®. Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ \n\nMBUX multimedia system 201 \n\n202 MBUX multimedia system \n\n▌Telephone menu overview \n\n1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/the mobile phones 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- nected mobile phone/the mobile phones (two phone mode) \n\n3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone 4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options 6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search \n\n▌Telephony operating modes overview \n\n▌Connecting a mobile phone \n\nRequirements:  R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). \n\nR Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys- \n\ntem. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Phone \n\nSearching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect New Device. \n\nDepending on the equipment, the following tele- phone operating modes are available: R One mobile phone is connected to the multi- \n\nmedia system via Bluetooth® . \n\nConnecting a mobile phone Authorization takes place using Secure Simple Pairing. # Select a mobile phone. \n\nR Two mobile phones are connected with the \n\nmultimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). \n\nA code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. \n\n# If both codes match, confirm the code on the \n\n- \n- \n\nYou can use all the functions of the multi- media system with the mobile phone in the foreground. You can receive incoming calls and mes- sages with the mobile phone in the back- ground. You can rotate the mobile phone in the foreground and background. \n\nmobile phone. \n\nMBUX multimedia system 203 \n\n▌Functions in the Telephony menu \n\nThe functions available in the Telephony menu include the following: R Making calls, e.g.: \n\n- R Accepting a call - k  End Call - i  Create Confer. Call - \n\nAccepting or rejecting a waiting call \n\nR Managing contacts, e.g.: \n\n- \n- \n- \n\nDownloading mobile phone contacts Editing the format of a contact's name Saving contacts in the vehicle \n\nYou can end Smartphone Integration by discon- necting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting \n\nthe connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. \n\nWhen using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®, cer- tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymised) \n\nR Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: \n\n- \n- \n\nUsing the read-aloud function Dictating a new message \n\nOverview of Smartphone Integration With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia sys- tem. Also for use with two phone mode with smart- phone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Integra- tion is only possible with an Internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integra- tion. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the ç symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Apple CarPlay® R Android Auto \n\nYou can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto using the Apps menu. Alternative: If an application is active via Smart- phone Integration (e.g. when music is being played or route guidance is active), you can call up the active application using the |, z or % application buttons. \n\nThe transfer of this data is used to optimize com- munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 194). The following vehicle status data is transmitted: R The gear engaged R The distinction between parked, standstill, roll- \n\ning and driving \n\nR The day/night mode of the instrument cluster \n\nThe transfer of this data is used to alter how con- tent is displayed to correspond to the driving situa- tion. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction \n\nThis data is only transferred while the navigation system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel). \n\nWeb browser overview The web browser is launched on the home screen after selecting Apps via z Browser. \n\n204 MBUX multimedia system \n\n1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Previous website 4 Next website 5 Refresh/stop 6 Options % Some functions are country-dependent. % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is \n\nin motion. \n\n% Additional data volume is required for the use of the web browser. Via the \"Internet in the Car\" service you can purchase this data vol- ume for a fee directly from the mobile phone  network provider Vodafone. \n\nRadio and media \n\nOverview of the symbols and functions in the media menu \n\nSymbol \n\nDesignation \n\nFunction \n\nÌ \n\nPlay \n\nSelect to start or continue playback. \n\nË \n\nPause \n\nSelect to pause the playback. \n\n: \n\nRepeat track \n\nSelect to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repea- \n\nted. \n\nR Select twice: the current track is repea- \n\nted. \n\nR Select three times: the function is \n\ndeactivated. \n\nMBUX multimedia system 205 \n\nSymbol \n\nDesignation \n\nFunction \n\n9 \n\nRandom playback \n\nSelect to play back the tracks in random order. \n\nû/ü \n\nBack/forward \n\nSelect to skip to the previous or to the next track. \n\nf \n\nOptions \n\nSelect to show additional options. \n\n5 \n\nCategories \n\nSelect to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). \n\nè \n\nSearch \n\nSelect to search in the active menu. You can search for artists or genres, for exam- ple. \n\nZ \n\nSettings \n\nSelect to make settings. \n\n© \n\nHome \n\nSelect to return to the home screen. \n\n2 \n\nFull screen \n\nSelect to switch to full screen mode. \n\nThe following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with \n\nthe multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Blue- tooth®) \n\nR Playing back audio or video files \n\nAuthorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device # Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device. \n\nAuthorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio \n\nequipment. \n\nAuthorizing Bluetooth® audio equipment for media playback \n\nRequirements:  R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys- \n\ntem and audio equipment . \n\nR The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® \n\n# Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. \n\nThe Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system. \n\nConnecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. \n\naudio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. \n\nThe connection is established. \n\nR The audio equipment is \"visible\" for other devi- \n\nces. \n\nMultimedia system: 4 ©  5 Media  5 Bluetooth  5 ª Using Bluetooth® Audio, you can play back music files via the MBUX multimedia system from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smart- phone. # To play back audio files using the multimedia system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system. \n\n206 MBUX multimedia system \n\nOverview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu \n\nSymbol \n\nDesignation \n\nFunction \n\n© \n\nHome \n\nSelect to return to the home screen. \n\nj \n\nMessaging \n\nSelect to call up messaging. \n\nû/ü \n\nBack/forward \n\nSelect to skip to the previous or to the next station. \n\nZ \n\nSettings \n\nSelect to show further options. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings \n\nThe setting options are country-dependent. \n\nHD \n\nHD Radio® \n\nSelect to switch the HD Radio® function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. \n\n8 \n\nMute function \n\nSelect to switch off the sound. \n\nf \n\nStoring radio sta- tions \n\nSelect to save a radio station in the station list. \n\n4 \n\nStation list \n\nSelect to display the station list. \n\nª \n\nSearch \n\nSelect to browse the active menu, for example, by artist or genre. \n\nDepending on the frequency band selected, differ- ent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. \n\nAdditional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be trans- \n\nmitted when using TuneIn Radio. \n\nSymbol \n\nDesignation \n\nFunction \n\nZ \n\nSettings \n\nThe following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the \n\nTuneIn account \n\nß \n\nFavorites \n\nSelect during playback to save the station currently set as a favorite. \n\nMBUX multimedia system 207 \n\nSymbol \n\nDesignation \n\nFunction \n\nÌ/Ë \n\nPlay/Pause \n\nSelect to start, stop or continue playback. \n\n5 \n\nTo browse \n\nSelect to choose a category and then a radio station. \n\nAdditional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% com- mercial-free music, sports, news and entertain- ment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is availa- ble for a monthly fee. Information about this can \n\nbe obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. \n\nSymbol \n\nDesignation \n\nFunction \n\nZ \n\nSettings \n\nThe following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult content \n\nR Set alarm program for music \n\nand sport alerts \n\nR Create TuneMix lists to listen \n\nto music seamlessly \n\n5 \n\nPlayback control \n\nSelect to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the time- line to return to live mode. \n\nÌ \n\nPlay \n\nSelect to start or continue play- back. \n\nË \n\nPause \n\nSelect to pause the playback. \n\nSound settings \n\nOverview of functions in the Sound menu \n\nThe following functions are available: R Equalizer: \n\nThe sound system is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The settings, for example for the equalizer, effect the playback of all media sources. \n\n- \n- \n\nTreble, mid-range and bass \n\nR Balance and fader R Volume: \n\nAutomatic volume adjustment \n\n208 Transporting \n\nNotes on loading guidelines \n\n& DANGER Risk of poisoning from exhaust \n\n# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. \n\ngases \n\n# Close the lockable storage spaces before \n\nCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the rear- end door is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before \n\nopening the rear-end door. \n\nstarting a journey. \n\n# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe \n\nand tailpipe trims \n\n# Never drive with the rear-end door open. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured \n\nobjects in the vehicle \n\nWhen objects are unsecured or inadequately secured, they can slip, tip over or be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. This also applies to: R Luggage or loads R Seats which have been removed and are being transported in the vehicle in an exceptional case \n\nThere is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking maneuvers or abrupt changes in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that \n\nthey cannot be tossed about. \n\n# Before traveling, secure objects, luggage or load to prevent them slipping or tip- ping over. \n\n# When a seat is removed, keep it prefera- \n\nbly outside the vehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects \n\nbeing stowed incorrectly \n\nIf objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they can- not be thrown around in such situations. \n\nThe exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn your- self. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super- vise children especially closely in this area. \n\n# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before \n\ntouching them. \n\nIf you are using a roof luggage rack, please note the maximum roof load and the maximum load capacity of the roof luggage rack (/ page 288). Camera-based driving systems and the sensor functions of the inside rear-view mirror may be impaired if you are transporting a load on the roof and it protrudes more than 16 in (40 cm) over the front edge of the roof. Therefore, make sure that the load does not overhang by more than 16 in (40 cm). The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the load distribution. Therefore, please observe the following notes when loading: R when transporting a load, never exceed the permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occu- pants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar. \n\nR the load must not protrude above the upper \n\nedge of the seat backrests. \n\nR if possible, always transport the load in the \n\ncargo compartment. \n\nR fasten the load to the tie-down eyes and dis- \n\ntribute the load evenly among them. \n\nR use tie-down eyes and fastening components which are suitable for the weight and size of the load. \n\nTransporting 209 \n\nNotes on distributing the load within the vehicle \n\nSecuring loads \n\n* NOTE Risk of damage to the floor covering \n\nNotes on load securing \n\nExcessive point loading on the cargo compart- ment floor or on the load area can negatively affect the driving characteristics and could damage the floor covering. # Vehicles with rear-wheel drive: distribute the load uniformly. When doing so, ensure that the overall center of gravity of the load is always as low and close to the center as possible and between the axles near the rear axle. \n\n# Vehicles with all-wheel drive: distribute the load uniformly. When doing so, ensure that the overall center of gravity of the load is always as low and close to the center as possible and between the axles. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to incorrect use of the lashing straps \n\nThe following can occur: R The tie-down eyes may detach or the lash- ing strap may tear if the permissible load is exceeded \n\nR The load cannot be restrained \n\nThe load can slip, tip over or be flung about, striking vehicle occupants. # Always tension the lashing straps in the proper manner and only between the described tie-down eyes. \n\n# Always use lashing straps designed spe- \n\ncifically for the loads. \n\nFor Cargo Vans, buses and Passenger Vans: R Always transport loads in the cargo compart- \n\nment. \n\nR Always place the load against the seat backr- \n\nests of the rear bench seat. \n\nR Move large and heavy loads as far towards the front of the vehicle as possible in the direction of travel against the rear bench seat. Stow loads flush with the rear bench seat. \n\nR Always additionally secure the load with suita- \n\nble load securing aids or tie downs. \n\nR The load must not protrude above the upper \n\nedge of the seat backrests. \n\nR Transport loads behind seats that are not \n\noccupied. \n\nR If the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert the seat belts crosswise into the seat belt buckle of the opposite seat belt. \n\n% Observe the information relating to the maxi- mum loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-down points. If you combine various cargo tie-down points to secure a load, always take the maximum loading capacity of the weakest cargo tie-down point into account. During maximum full-stop braking, forces may act which can multiply the weight of the load. Always use several cargo tie-down points to distribute the load. Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie-down points or tie-down eyes. \n\nObserve the Operating Instructions or the lashing strap manufacturer's instructions for the operation of the lashing strap. Observe the information relating to the maximum loading capacity of the cargo tie-down points (/ page 287). As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring the following: R The load is secured against slipping, tipping, \n\nrolling or falling off. Take usual traffic conditions as well as swerv- ing or full brake application and bad roads into account. \n\nR The applicable requirements and guidelines relating to load-securing practices are met. If this is not the case, this may constitute a punishable offense, depending on local legisla- tion and any ensuing consequences. Observe country-specific laws. \n\n210 Transporting \n\nMake sure that the load is secure before every journey and at regular intervals during a long jour- ney. Adjust the load securing as necessary. Infor- mation on how to secure loads correctly can be obtained from the manufacturers of the load securing aids or tie downs for load securing, for example. When securing loads, observe the following: R Fill spaces between the load and the cargo \n\nOverview of cargo tie-down point \n\ncompartment walls or wheel wells. For this pur- pose, use rigid load securing aids, such as chocks, wooden fixings or padding. \n\nR Attach secured and stabilized loads in all direc- \n\ntions. Use the cargo tie-down points or tie-down eyes and the loading rails in the cargo compart- ment. Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods, lock rods or lashing nets and lashing straps, which have been tested in accordance with current standards (e.g. DIN EN). Always use the cargo tie-down points closest to the load and pad sharp edges. Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should preferably be secured using the tie-down eyes. \n\n% You can obtain tie downs tested in accordance with current standards (e.g. DIN EN) from any specialist company or from a qualified special- ist workshop. \n\nNotes on the partition Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as commercial vehicles (vehicle category N1, N2) do not fulfill standard ISO 27956, which describes the equipment for properly securing a load in delivery vehicles. If the vehicle is used to transport goods, retrofitting the partition is strongly recommended, as properly securing the load in vehicles without a partition will always be a complex operation. % Nothing may be stowed in the area between the rear side of the seats and the partition. \n\nCargo tie-down points (example: cargo van without loading rails) 1 Cargo tie-down rings \n\nSecure loose loads with an approved lashing net or a tarp. Always fasten the lashing net or tarp to all available cargo tie-down points. Make sure that the fasten- ing hooks are secured against accidental opening. If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails in the cargo floor, you can place lashing rods directly in front of and behind the load. The lashing rods directly absorb the potential shifting forces. Securing loads on the cargo floor by lashing them down is recommended only for lightweight loads. Lay anti-slip mats under the load to assist in secur- ing it. \n\nInstalling and removing cargo tie-down rings \n\n# To install: slide the cargo tie-down ring through a recess in the loading rail close to the load until the locking mechanism engages in the recess. \n\n% When you pull the locking mechanism up and out of the recess, the cargo tie-down ring is able to move within the loading rail. Make sure that the locking mechanism is always engaged in a recess. \n\n# Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seating. # To remove: pull the locking mechanism up and pull the cargo tie-down ring towards the lock- ing mechanism and out of the loading rail through a recess. \n\nTransporting 211 \n\nCarrier systems \n\nInformation on the roof luggage rack \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury if maximum roof \n\nload is exceeded \n\nObserve the following points for installing roof lug- gage racks: R Tighten the screws of the roof luggage rack to a torque of 6.0 lb-ft (8 Nm) – 7.4 lb-ft (10 Nm) in the designated sliding blocks. \n\nThe vehicle center of gravity and the usual driv- ing characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics will change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv- ing characteristics, as well as the steering and braking characteristics, will be greatly impaired. # Always comply with the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. \n\nR The tightened screws should not touch the \n\nrails. \n\nR Ensure that the sliding blocks are not located \n\nin the areas around the plastic caps. \n\nR The sliding blocks must have the right cross- \n\nsection. \n\nR The insides of the mounting rails must be free \n\nof dirt. \n\nR Re-tighten the screws uniformly after around \n\n300 miles (500 km). \n\n* NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to \n\nobserve the maximum permissible clear- ance height \n\nIf the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- mum permitted clearance height, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted clearance \n\nheight. \n\n# If the vehicle height is greater than the \n\nclearance height, do not enter. # Note the changed vehicle height with \n\nroof mountings. \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends that you use only roof luggage racks that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. These help to pre- vent vehicle damage. Have mounting rails retrofitted only at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with mounting rails on the roof, you can install a roof luggage rack on the roof. Special fasteners (sliding blocks) are available as accessories for this purpose. These fasteners are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. \n\nPlacing a load on the wheel arch Comply with the important safety notes under \"Notes on loading\" (/ page 208). \n\n1 Mounting rails \n\nInformation about the maximum roof load can be found in the \"Technical data\" section (/ page 288). \n\n# Place the objects on wheel arch 2 and lash them using tie-down eyes 1(/ page 210). \n\n212 Transporting \n\n% A wheel arch may be subjected to a load of \n\n330 lb (150 kg). \n\nMaintenance and care 213 \n\nASSYST PLUS service interval display \n\nFunction of the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play \n\nExamples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate \n\nstops \n\nThe ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument cluster provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service message by using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain further information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. \n\nDisplaying the service due date \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service  5 ASSYST PLUS \n\nThe next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. \n\nBear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board com- \n\nputer(/ page 177) \n\nR Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or \n\non poor road surfaces \n\nR When the engine is often left idling for long \n\nperiods \n\nR Operation in particularly dusty conditions \n\nand/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used \n\nIn these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. If the vehicle is subjected to increased loads, check the tires more frequently. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nNon-operational times with the battery disconnec- ted \n\nThe ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal- culate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date on the instrument cluster before disconnecting the battery (/ page 213). \n\nHave service work carried out regularly \n\n* NOTE Premature wear through failure to \n\nEngine compartment \n\nobserve service due dates \n\nOpening and closing the hood \n\nMaintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter- \n\nvals. \n\n# Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving \n\nwith the hood unlocked \n\nThe hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is \n\nlocked. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the \n\nSpecial service requirements \n\nThe prescribed service interval is based on normal vehicle use. Perform maintenance work more often than prescribed if the vehicle is operated under arduous operating conditions or increased loads. \n\nhood \n\nIf you open the hood in the event of an over- heated engine or fire in the engine compart- ment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other \n\nescaping hot operating fluids. \n\n214 Maintenance and care \n\n# Before opening the hood, allow the \n\nengine to cool down. \n\n# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving \n\nparts \n\nIf you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following component parts: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap \n\nComponents in the engine compartment can continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the ignition is switched off. Observe the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch off the ignition. # Never touch the danger zone surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from using the \n\nwindshield wipers when the hood is open \n\nIf the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood. \n\n# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away \n\nfrom moving parts. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from touching live \n\ncomponents \n\nThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys- tem operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on. \n\nLive components in the fuel injection system include the injectors, for example. Live components of the ignition system include the following: R Ignition coils R Spark plug connectors R Diagnostic socket \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment \n\nCertain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. \n\n# Park the vehicle safely and on a surface that is \n\nas level as possible. # Switch off the vehicle. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury when the hood is \n\nopened \n\nThe hood may suddenly drop into the end posi- tion. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Before releasing the hood, ensure that \n\nthe support is firmly seated in the holder. # Open the hood only when there is no-one \n\nin its range of movement. \n\n# To open: pull handle 1 to release the hood. # Reach into the gap and push the hood catch \n\nhandle upwards. \n\nMaintenance and care 215 \n\n# Open the hood and hold it up. \n\n# Lower the hood and let it drop from a height of \n\napproximately 0.5 ft (15 cm). \n\n# If it is still possible to lift the hood a little, open the hood again and let it drop from a height of approximately 0.7 ft (20 cm) until it engages correctly. \n\nEngine oil \n\n▌Checking the engine oil level with the on-board computer \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is level during the measuring proc- \n\ness. \n\n# Take support 1 from the holder on the hood \n\nand pull it downwards. \n\n# Insert the support into bracket below 2. \n\nR The hood is closed. R Depending on the driving profile, the oil level \n\ncan be displayed only after a driving time of up to 30 minutes and only when the vehicle is switched on. \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable \n\nmaterials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system \n\nFlammable materials may ignite. # Ensure that there are no flammable \n\nexternal materials in the engine compart- ment or on the exhaust system after maintenance work has been carried out. \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service  5 Engine Oil Level \n\nOne of the following messages appears on the instrument cluster: # Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible. Repeat the query after driving for a maximum of 30 minutes. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury \n\nwhen opening and closing the hood \n\nThe hood may suddenly drop into the end posi- tion. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of move- ment. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the hood \n\nPushing the hood closed with your hands could damage it. # To close the hood, let it drop from the \n\nspecified height. \n\n# To close: lift the hood slightly. # Move support 1 to the holder on the hood \n\nand apply light pressure to engage it. \n\n# Engine Oil Level OK and the bar indicating the oil level on the instrument cluster is green and is between \"min\" and \"max\": the oil level is cor- rect. \n\n# Engine Oil Level Drive until the engine is  \n\nwarm.: warm up the engine to operating tem- perature. \n\n# Engine Oil Level Correct Measurement Only  if Vehicle Is on Level Ground: park the vehicle on a level surface. \n\n# Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar indicating the oil level on the instrument clus- ter is orange and lies below \"MIN\": add 1.0 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. \n\n# Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar indicating the oil level on the instrument cluster is orange and lies above \"MAX\": drain off excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On: \n\nswitch on the vehicle. \n\n216 Maintenance and care \n\n# Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: the sen- sor is defective or not connected. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n# Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavaila- \n\nble: close the hood. \n\n% Vehicles with cold oil level displays: the oil \n\nlevel is automatically displayed on the instru- ment cluster after the vehicle has been non- operational for an extended period. If it is not possible to measure the engine oil level, a message to that effect will appear. % The result of the electronic measurement \n\nalways takes precedence over other measure- ments. \n\n▌Checking the engine oil level with an oil dipstick \n\nOil dipstick (example, if purchased) \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment \n\nCertain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. \n\n# Remove dipstick 1 and wipe it off. # Slowly insert dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube as far as it will go and pull it out after three seconds. R Oil level OK: the oil level is between the \n\nMIN and the MAX mark. \n\nR Oil level too low: the oil level is at the MIN \n\nmark or below. \n\n# If the oil level is too low, add approx. 1.0 US qt \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is on a level surface. R The engine is turned off and the ignition key is \n\n(1 liter) engine oil. \n\n# If the oil level is too high, drain off excess \n\nengine oil. \n\nkept out of range. \n\n# Contact a qualified specialist workshop if you \n\nR The engine is at operating temperature. R Wait 5 minutes after a short drive for the \n\nhave any questions. \n\n▌Adding engine oil \n\nengine oil to drip off. \n\n% Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level measurement. For this reason, the oil pipe is closed with a plug. The oil dipstick can be purchased from your authorized Service Partner as special equipment. \n\n% For oil level measurement, Mercedes-Benz pri- oritizes electronic measurement while driving with the display in the instrument cluster. If there is a discrepancy between electronic oil level measurement and dipstick method, the result of the electronic oil level measurement is given precedence. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment \n\nCertain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. \n\nIf you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following component parts: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap \n\nMaintenance and care 217 \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from \n\nengine oil \n\nIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled \n\nnext to the filler opening. \n\n# Allow the engine to cool off and thor- \n\noughly clean the engine oil from compo- nent parts before starting the vehicle. \n\n* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor- rect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives \n\n# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals. \n\nEngine OM642 \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends using original or tested replacement and service parts. # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. # Do not use additives. # Follow the instructions on the service interval display regarding oil changes. \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too \n\nmuch engine oil \n\nToo much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a \n\nEngine OM654 rear-wheel drive and all-wheel drive \n\nqualified specialist workshop. \n\nEngine M274 \n\n# Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # Add engine oil. \n\nEngine OM651 \n\n218 Maintenance and care \n\n# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it \n\nengages. \n\n# Check the oil level again. Check using the on- \n\n# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. \n\nboard computer (/ page 215), check with the oil dipstick (/ page 216). \n\n& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool- \n\n# In the case of vehicles with engines that do not have an oil dipstick, check the oil level with the on-board computer after the next journey (/ page 215). \n\nant \n\nIf you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening \n\nthe cap. \n\nIt is necessary to run the engine for an extended period after each oil top-up to correctly detect the oil level. Fill level changes during oil top-ups may not be immediately visible. Depending on the driv- ing profile, the new oil level can only be displayed after a driving time of up to 60 minutes. To avoid damage due to overfilling, do not add more than 0.26 gal (1 liter). Check the oil level again after a longer period. \n\n# When opening the cap, wear protective \n\ngloves and safety glasses. \n\n# Open the cap slowly to release pressure. \n\nAllow the engine and the engine cooling system to cool down before checking the coolant level or refilling coolant. \n\n* NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant \n\nChecking the coolant level \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment \n\nIf coolant gets on painted surfaces, the paint- work can be damaged. # Add coolant carefully. # Remove spilled coolant. \n\nCertain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. \n\nChecking the coolant level \n\nIf you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the \n\nhood \n\nCoolant expansion reservoir (example) \n\nIf you open the hood in the event of an over- heated engine or fire in the engine compart- ment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other \n\n# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Open the hood (/ page 213). # Slowly turn the coolant expansion tank cap 1 half a turn counter-clockwise and allow over- pressure to escape. \n\nescaping hot operating fluids. \n\n# Turn coolant expansion tank cap 1 further \n\n# Before opening the hood, allow the \n\nand remove it. \n\nengine to cool down. \n\nMaintenance and care 219 \n\n# Check the coolant level. \n\nThere is enough coolant in coolant expansion reservoir if the coolant reaches the MAX mark. \n\nAdd coolant # Refill the coolant to the MAX mark on the cool- \n\nant expansion reservoir. \n\nOnly use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz to avoid damaging the engine cooling system. # Replace coolant expansion reservoir cap 1 \n\n& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate \n\nWindshield washer concentrate is highly flam- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. \n\nand tighten in a clockwise direction. \n\n# Start the vehicle. # After about five minutes, switch off the vehicle \n\nagain and allow it to cool down. \n\n# Check the coolant level again and add coolant \n\nif necessary. \n\n% Observe additional coolant information \n\n* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid \n\nUnsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer fluids that \n\nare also suitable for use on plastic surfa- ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. \n\n(/ page 281). \n\nAdding washer fluid \n\nFilling up the windshield washer system \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment \n\nCertain components in the engine compart- ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radi- ator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. \n\nIf you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap \n\nWasher fluid reservoir (example) \n\n# Pre-mix the washer fluid in the correct mixing \n\nratio in a container. \n\n# Park the vehicle on a level surface and secure \n\n& WARNING Danger of burns when opening \n\nthe hood \n\nIf you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine com- partment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the \n\nit against rolling away (/ page 140). \n\n# Open the hood (/ page 213). # Pull the cap of the washer fluid container 1 \n\nupwards by the tab. \n\n# Pour in the pre-mixed washer fluid. # Press cap 1 onto the filler opening until it \n\naudibly engages. \n\nengine to cool down. \n\n# Close the hood (/ page 213). \n\n# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. \n\n220 Maintenance and care \n\n% Mix the washer fluid with windshield washer concentrate all year round. Comply with the information about windshield washer fluid in the technical data (/ page 282). \n\n% Comply with the further information about windshield washer fluid (/ page 282) \n\nCleaning the water drain valve of the air intake box \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving \n\nparts \n\nCertain components in the engine compart- ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never touch the danger zone surrounding moving component parts, e.g. the rota- tion area of the fan. \n\n# Open the hood (/ page 213). # Remove dirt from water drain valve 2 of air \n\nintake box 1. \n\nDraining the fuel filter \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from \n\n# Remove jewelry and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away \n\nfrom moving parts. \n\nfuel \n\nFuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating \n\nsparks must be avoided. \n\n& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- nent parts in the engine compartment \n\n# Before filling up, switch off the vehicle, and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating. \n\nCertain components in the engine compart- ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radi- ator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. \n\nIf you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to \n\nfuel \n\nFuels are highly flammable. There is a risk of fire and explosion due to contact with hot com- ponent parts. # Allow the engine and the exhaust system \n\nto cool down. \n\n* NOTE Engine damage due to delayed \n\ndrainage of the fuel filter \n\nVehicles with a diesel engine: delayed drainage of the fuel filter can lead to engine damage. If the ! indicator lamp lights up, drain the fuel filter immediately. \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental \n\npollution due to disposal in a non-environ- mentally responsible manner \n\n# Dispose of the hydrogen fuel mixture in an environmentally friendly manner. \n\nMaintenance and care 221 \n\n# Switch off the vehicle. # Open the hood (/ page 213). # Place a suitable collecting pan beneath drain \n\nhose 2. \n\n# Switch on the vehicle. # Open drain screw 1 until the water/fuel mix- \n\nture emerges from drain hose 2. \n\n# Close drain screw 1 as soon as around 0.2 qt (0.2 liters) of the water/fuel mixture has been collected. After 30 seconds, the electrical fuel pump automatically stops the discharge of the water/fuel mixture. \n\nEngine OM642 \n\n# Switch the vehicle off after draining. # Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixture in an environmentally responsible manner, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n# Check that drain screw 1 has been closed. \n\nIf the vehicle is running while drain screw 1 is open, you will lose fuel through drain hose 2. \n\n# Close the hood (/ page 213). # ! The indicator lamp does not go out after  \n\ndraining: drain the fuel filter again. \n\n# !The indicator lamp does not go out after  the second draining: consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop. \n\nEngine OM651 rear wheel drive \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends that you have the fuel filter drained at a qualified specialist work- shop. \n\nCleaning and care \n\nNotes on washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle \n\nThe braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. \n\nEngine OM654 rear-wheel drive and all-wheel drive * NOTE Risk of damage to the paintwork \n\n# Park the vehicle in a safe location and secure it \n\nagainst rolling away. \n\n# Switch off the auxiliary heating (/ page 107). \n\nand plastic components \n\nIf you wash your vehicle in Touchless Auto- matic Car Wash systems that use special \n\n222 Maintenance and care \n\ncleaning agents, the cleaning agents used can damage the paintwork or plastic components of the vehicle. # Do not wash the vehicle in Touchless Automatic Car Wash systems that use special cleaning agents. \n\nMake sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, fold in the outside mirrors and remove any additional antennas. Otherwise, the outside mir- rors, antennas or the vehicle itself could be dam- aged. Make sure any additional antennas are re-installed and that the outside mirrors are fully folded out again when you leave the automatic car wash. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing before using an automatic car wash: R the side windows and the sliding window are \n\ncompletely closed. \n\nR the blower for ventilation and heating is \n\nswitched off. \n\nR the windshield wiper switch is in position g. \n\nIf the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. % Removing the wax from the windshield and the wiper rubbers after washing the vehicle, will help avoid smearing and reduce wiper noise. \n\nTo avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a power washer: R maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in \n\n(30 cm) to the vehicle when using 25° flat- spray nozzles and concentrated-power jets or 27.6 in (70 cm) when using round-spray noz- zles and observe the information in the equip- ment manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits. \n\nR maintain a minimum distance of 19.7 in \n\n(50 cm) for a reversing camera. \n\nWashing the vehicle by hand \n\nObserve the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. In this case, make sure that a specially designated wash bay is used for washing by hand. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water and a \n\nsoft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. \n\n# Carefully spray the vehicle with water and dry off with a leather cloth. Be careful not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grilles. The blower should be switched off while doing so. \n\n# Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint- \n\nNotes on use of a power washer \n\nwork. \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident when using \n\nAt the onset of winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. \n\npower washers with round-spray nozzles \n\nThe water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex- pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round- \n\nspray nozzles. \n\n# Have damaged tires or chassis parts \n\nreplaced immediately. \n\nNotes on paintwork care \n\n* NOTE Paintwork damage and corrosion \n\ndue to inadequate care \n\nFailure to promptly and thoroughly remove dirt from bird droppings or other residue could result in paintwork damage and corrosion at a later date. # Clean dirt off paint and matte finish thor- \n\nNever use a power washer in the vehicle interior. The pressurized water created by the power washer and the associated spray could cause con- siderable damage to the vehicle. \n\noughly and as soon as possible. \n\nObserve the notes on cleaning and care to avoid paintwork damage. \n\nMaintenance and care 223 \n\nPaint R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and \n\nthen wash off. \n\nR Do not use a wash program that ends with a hot wax treatment in automatic car washes. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing \n\nR Bird droppings: Soak with water and then wash \n\nproducts, or gloss preservers, e.g. wax. \n\noff. \n\nR Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a \n\nR Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by \n\nqualified specialist workshop. \n\nrubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. \n\nR Coolant and brake fluid: Remove with a moist \n\nNotes on the care of vehicle parts \n\ncloth and clean water. R Tar stains: Use tar remover. R Wax: Use silicone remover. R Do not affix stickers, films or similar. R Remove dirt as soon as possible. \n\nMatte finish R Use only care products approved for \n\nMercedes-Benz. \n\n& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind- \n\nshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned \n\nIf the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers \n\nand the vehicle before cleaning the wind- shield or wiper blades. \n\nR Do not polish the vehicle or alloy wheels. R Use only automatic car washes that meet cur- \n\nrent technological standards. \n\nObserve the following notes: \n\nNotes on cleaning and care \n\nPreventing damage to the vehicle \n\nWheels/rims \n\nUse water and acid-free wheel cleaner. \n\nR Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. Otherwise, wheel bolts and brake components may be damaged. \n\nR To avoid corrosion of brake discs and brakepads, drive for a few minutes after cleaning and before parking the vehicle. The brake discs and brake- pads will warm up and dry out. \n\nWindows \n\nClean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent rec- ommended for Mercedes-Benz. \n\nDo not use dry cloths or abrasive or sol- vent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. \n\nWiper blades \n\nCarefully clean the folded-away wiper blades with a damp cloth. \n\nDo not clean the wiper blades too often. \n\nExterior light- ing \n\nClean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. \n\nUse only cleaning agents or cloths suita- ble for plastic lenses. \n\nSensors \n\nClean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. \n\nWhen using a power washer, keep a mini- mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). \n\nReversing  camera and 360° Camera  \n\nUse clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. \n\nDo not use a power washer. \n\n224 Maintenance and care \n\nNotes on cleaning and care \n\nPreventing damage to the vehicle \n\nTrailer hitch \n\nR Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. \n\nwith a wire brush. \n\nDo not clean the ball neck with a power washer or solvent. \n\nR Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the \n\nball head. \n\nR Observe the notes on care in the \n\ntrailer hitch manufacturer's operator's manual. \n\nSliding door \n\nR Remove foreign objects from the \n\nvicinity of the contact plates and con- tact pins of the sliding door. \n\nDo not oil or grease the contact plates or the contact pins. \n\nR Clean the contact plates and contact pins with a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth. \n\nSteps \n\nR Clean the electrically operated steps and their housing with a power washer. \n\nDo not use oil or grease as a lubricant. \n\nR After cleaning, spray the lateral guides \n\nwith silicone spray. \n\nR Clean the steps in the bumper with a \n\npower washer. \n\nAluminum  side panels \n\nR Brush down the aluminum side panels with water and a neutral or mild alka- line cleaning agent. \n\nDo not use abrasive cleaning agents to clean the dropsides. \n\nNotes on the cleaning and care of the interior \n\n* NOTE Damage to property due to incor- \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products \n\nCare and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries \n\nfrom bleached seat belts \n\nBleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. \n\nrect leather care \n\nThe steering wheel, seat covers and other parts of the vehicle interior can be made of leather. Leather becomes brittle and can crack if it is incorrectly cared for or cleaned. # If it gets dirty, thoroughly wipe it with a damp cloth (water or mild soapy water) or use leather care agents or cleaners that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Then wipe it over again with a dry cloth. \n\n# Do not use a microfiber cloth for clean- \n\ning. \n\n# Do not soak the leather. # Do not use cleaning agents containing solvents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner, polishes or waxes. \n\nMaintenance and care 225 \n\n* NOTE Property damage due to disinfec- \n\ntants \n\nThe interior includes a number of sensitive sur- faces such as displays, plastics and leather. Disinfectants can contain alcohol and other substances that penetrate and damage surfa- \n\nces. Technology behind buttons and displays can also be damaged. # Do not use disinfectant on interior surfa- \n\nces. \n\nObserve the following notes: \n\nNotes on cleaning and care \n\nPreventing damage to the vehicle \n\nSeat belts \n\nClean with lukewarm soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning \n\nagents. \n\nR Do not dry the seat belt by \n\nheating above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. \n\nInstrument cluster surfa- ces \n\nClean the surfaces carefully with a microfiber cloth and acrylic glass care product. \n\nR Do not use any other agents. \n\nDisplay \n\nClean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and LC/TFT display care product. \n\nR Switch off the display and let it \n\ncool down. \n\nR Do not use any other agents. \n\nDigital inside rearview mir- ror \n\nR Clean the mirror glass with a cloth moistened with glass cleaner. \n\nR Do not spray the glass cleaner \n\non the mirror glass. \n\nR Do not use any other agents. \n\nR Clean the light sensors of the inside rearview mirror with a dry cotton cloth. \n\nPlastic trim \n\nR Clean with a damp microfiber \n\nR Do not affix stickers, films or \n\ncloth. \n\nsimilar. \n\nR For heavy soiling: Use care product recommended for Mercedes-Benz. \n\nR Do not allow to come into con- tact with cosmetics, insect repellent and sun creams. \n\nReal wood and trim ele- ments \n\nR Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. \n\nR Do not use solvent-based \n\ncleaning agents, polishes or waxes. \n\nR For heavy soiling: Use care product recommended for Mercedes-Benz. \n\nRoof lining \n\nClean with a soft brush or dry shampoo. \n\n226 Maintenance and care \n\nNotes on cleaning and care \n\nPreventing damage to the vehicle \n\nCloth seat covers  \n\nVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp micro- fiber cloth and a 1% soapsuds solu- tion to clean the entire seat cover. Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz. \n\nR Do not use any oil-based clean- \n\ning and care products. \n\nR Do not spot-clean. \n\nImitation leather seat cov- ers \n\nVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire seat cover. Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz. \n\nR Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Do not use any oil-based clean- \n\ning and care products. \n\nR Do not spot-clean. \n\nSteering wheel and gear  or selector lever \n\nClean with a damp cloth. \n\nPedals and floor mats \n\nClean with a damp cloth. \n\nR Do not use any cleaning and \n\ncare products. \n\nVehicle interior \n\nClean with a damp cloth. \n\nR Do not use a power washer. R Allow the vehicle interior to dry completely after cleaning. R Do not allow liquids to pene- trate into gaps or cavities. \n\nCurtains \n\nThe curtains may be dry cleaned only. \n\nR Do not wash the curtains. \n\nBreakdown assistance 227 \n\nEmergency \n\nEmergency Call System \n\nRemoving the safety vest \n\nInformation on the emergency call system \n\n# Remove the safety vest from the storage com- \n\npartment in the driver's door. \n\n% Safety vests can also be stored in the storage \n\ncompartments of the rear doors and the co- driver door. \n\n1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry-clean 7 This is a class 2 vest \n\nThe safety vest only fulfills the legally required standards if it is the correct size and is completely closed. Replace the safety vest if: R Damaged or if the reflex strips are dirty R The maximum permitted number of washes is \n\nexceeded \n\nR The safety vest's fluorescence has faded \n\nUSA only: Your vehicle is equipped with the Emer- gency Call System (\"eCall\"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service pro- viders. Insufficient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emer- gency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the sys- tem relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that follows (/ page 228). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service depart- ment to deactivate the vehicle's communication module. Deactivation of this module prevents the activa- tion of any and all Mercedes me connect services.  After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emer- gency call and manual emergency call will not be  available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto- matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized \n\nMercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. \n\nRemoving the first-aid kit (soft sided) \n\nOverview of the emergency call system \n\nThe first-aid kit (soft sided) is located in the stow- age compartment in the front passenger door. # Remove first-aid (soft sided) kit from the stow- \n\nage compartment. \n\nRemoving the warning lamp \n\nThe warning lamp is located in the stowage com- partment in the front-passenger door. # Remove the warning lamp from the stowage \n\ncompartment. \n\neCall can help to reduce the time between an acci- dent and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 228) or manually (/ page 228). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. \n\n228 Breakdown assistance \n\nMessage in the media display: SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or eCall is not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: http://www.mercedes- benz.com/connect_ecall % If an emergency call is unavailable or malfunc- tioning, a message to this effect also appears in the instrument cluster display. \n\nTriggering a manual emergency call \n\n# To use the SOS button in the overhead control  panel: press the SOS button at least one sec- ond long. \n\n# To use voice control: use the Voice Control \n\nSystem \"Call the Mercedes accident center\" voice command . \n\nWhen the emergency call is made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes- \n\nBenz emergency call center. \n\nTriggering an automatic emergency call \n\nRequirements:  R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. \n\nIf restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices have been activated after an accident, eCall may automatically initiate an emer- gency call. When the emergency call is made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes- \n\nBenz emergency call center. \n\nR A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call center. \n\nR Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. \n\nIf no connection can be made to the emergency services: # Dial the local emergency number on your \n\nmobile phone. \n\nR A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. \n\nEnding an unintentional emergency call # Select ~ on the multifunction steering \n\nThe SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services: # Dial the local emergency number on your \n\nmobile phone. \n\nIf an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. \n\nR Based on the call, the operator decides \n\nwhether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. \n\nR If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance \n\nis sent to the vehicle immediately. \n\nwheel. Depress the button for several seconds. \n\nTransmitted data with the emergency call system \n\nData transmitted by the eCall includes but is not limited to: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route  \n\n(a few hundred meters before the incident) \n\nR Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Estimated number of people in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated man- \n\nually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system \n\nData transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC. \n\nBreakdown assistance 229 \n\nFor Canada, please contact MBC’s Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be determined R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants \n\n# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. \n\n# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nR Further information on ABS (/ page 145) R Further information on ESP®(/ page 146) \n\ncan be established \n\nFlat tire \n\nNotes on flat tires \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat \n\ntire \n\nA flat tire strongly impairs the vehicle's driving characteristics, as well as its steering and braking characteristics. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Replace the flat tire with the spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified special- ist workshop. \n\nIn the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment: R You can make a breakdown assistance call \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends that you have the starter battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. If you want to replace the battery yourself, observe the following information: R Only replace a faulty battery with a battery which fulfills the vehicle's specific require- ments. \n\nR Carry over detachable parts such as the vent hose or terminal cover from the battery which is to be replaced. \n\nR Make sure that the vent hose is always con- nected to its original opening on the battery side. Install the existing or newly supplied stop plugs. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. \n\nusing the breakdown assistance call button in the overhead control panel . R Change the wheel (/ page 261). \n\nBattery \n\nNotes on the starter battery \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery \n\nR Make sure that the detachable parts are con- \n\nnected in the same way as before. \n\nFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protec- tion to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in an accident. \n\nWork carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- lowing situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions \n\n& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- \n\ntrostatic charge \n\nElectrostatic charge can ignite the highly explo- sive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge \n\nthat may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery. \n\nThe highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jump-starting. \n\n230 Breakdown assistance \n\n& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from \n\nWear eye protection. \n\nthe battery acid \n\nBattery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or \n\nKeep children at a safe distance. \n\nclothing. \n\n# Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor- oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental \n\ndamage due to improper disposal of bat- teries \n\nObserve these Operating Instructions. \n\nIf you do not use the vehicle for a long period or drive short distances regularly: R Connect the battery to a charger recommen- \n\nded for Mercedes-Benz \n\nR Consult a qualified specialist workshop to dis- \n\nconnect the battery \n\nillegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. \n\n# \n\n Batteries contain pollutants. It is \n\nStarting assistance and charging the starter bat- tery \n\n# Always use the jump-start connection in the engine compartment for starting assistance and when charging the battery. \n\n Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. \n\nConsult a qualified specialist workshop to connect the battery. Observe the safety notes and protective measures when handling batteries. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the battery from over- \n\nvoltage \n\nWhen charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi- mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. \n\n& WARNING Risk of explosion due to the \n\nRisk of explosion \n\nignition of hydrogen gas \n\nFire, open flames and smoking are pro- hibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. \n\nIf there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery. # Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. \n\nElectrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a safety mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte acid splashes off with clean water. If necessary, seek medical advice. \n\n# Never place metal objects or tools on a \n\nbattery. \n\n# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described. \n\n# During starting assistance, always take \n\ncare to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity. \n\nBreakdown assistance 231 \n\n# During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. \n\n# Do not connect or disconnect the battery \n\nterminals with the engine running. \n\nWhen jump-starting and charging the batteries, observe the following points: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insu- lated terminal clamps \n\nR Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps \n\n& WARNING Risk of explosion due to a mix- \n\nture of explosive gases \n\nA mixture of explosive gases can escape from the battery during charging and jump starting. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating \n\nsparks must be avoided. \n\nmust not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables/charging cables are connected to the battery/jump-start con- nection point \n\nR The jumper cables/charging cables must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running \n\n# Make sure that there is sufficient ventila- \n\ntion. \n\n# Do not stand over the battery. \n\n& WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen \n\nbattery \n\nA discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before \n\ncharging it or performing starting assis- tance. \n\nIf the warning/indicator lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at temperatures around or below freezing, it is highly probable that the dis- charged battery has frozen. In this case, observe the following points: R Do not give the vehicle starting assistance or \n\ncharge the battery. \n\nR The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced drastically. \n\nR The starting behavior may deteriorate, particu- \n\nlarly at low temperatures. \n\nR It is recommended that you have a thawed bat- tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nR Make sure that neither you nor the battery is \n\nelectrostatically charged R Avoid fire and open flames R Do not lean over a battery R When charging: only use a battery charger that has been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz and read the operating instructions for your charger before charging the batteries \n\nObserve the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided using \n\nbatteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch each other R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only perform starting assistance when the engine and exhaust system are cold \n\n# Vehicles with a battery main switch: check whether the battery main switch is inserted (/ page 123). \n\n# Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the \n\ntransmission to position j. \n\n# Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to \n\nneutral. \n\n# Switch off the vehicle and all electrical con- \n\nsumers. \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine \n\n# Open the hood (/ page 213). \n\nNumerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts \n\nto start the engine. \n\n232 Breakdown assistance \n\n# Remove the terminal clamps of the starting assistance/charging cable in reverse order. First remove second black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 5 from ground point 6 in the engine compartment. Then remove black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 4 from the donor battery. Then remove second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 from the POSITIVE terminal of jump- start connection 3. Then remove red POSI- TIVE terminal clamp 1 from the donor bat- tery. The red protective cap springs back to its initial position when second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 is disconnected from jump-start connection 3. \n\n% Right-hand drive vehicle: the jump-start con- \n\nnection may be on the opposite side. \n\nYou can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n# Remove the cover from the POSITIVE terminal \n\nof the donor battery. \n\n# First connect a red POSITIVE terminal clamp 1 of the starting assistance/charging cable to the POSITIVE terminal of the donor battery. # With second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 \n\nof the starting assistance/charging cable, slide the red protective cap on jump-start connec- tion 3 back with a clockwise turn. \n\n# Attach second red POSITIVE terminal clamp \n\n2 to the POSITIVE terminal of jump-start con- nection 3. \n\n# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and let it run at idle speed. \n\n# First, connect a black NEGATIVE terminal \n\nclamp 4 of the starting assistance/charging cable to the NEGATIVE terminal of the donor battery. \n\n# Connect the second black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 5 of the starting assistance/charging cable to ground point 6 on your own vehicle (bare metal part in the engine compartment). # During starting assistance: start the vehicle. # When charging: start the charging process. # During starting assistance: let the engine run \n\nInstalling and removing the floor covering \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects \n\nin the driver's footwell \n\nObjects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. \n\n# When using floor mats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the ped- als. \n\n# Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets \n\non top of one another. \n\nfor a few minutes. \n\n# During starting assistance: before disconnect- ing the jumper cable, switch on an electrical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. \n\nWhen the starting assistance/charging process is complete: \n\nBreakdown assistance 233 \n\nRequirement  R All electrical consumers are switched off. \n\nerwise the on-board electronics may be damaged. \n\nRemoving \n\n% If the vehicle is expected to be parked or out \n\n# Unscrew screws3 and remove trim 2. # Remove floor covering 1. \n\nof use for longer than four weeks, observe the information on parking up the vehicle (/ page 143). \n\nInstalling # Insert floor covering 1 and align with the driv- \n\ner's seat base and the doorway. \n\n# Vehicles with a battery main switch: remove \n\nthe main switch of the battery (/ page 123). # Vehicles without a battery main switch: switch \n\n# Put trim 2 in place and screw screws 3 \n\noff all electrical consumers. \n\nback in. \n\nDisconnecting the starter battery \n\n# Switch off the vehicle. # Remove the floor covering (/ page 232). # Remove screws 1 and slide battery cover 2 \n\n* NOTE Damage to electrical major assem- bly due to disconnecting incorrectly \n\nin the direction of the arrow. The screws must protrude over the larger recesses. \n\nElectrical major assemblies could be damaged if the starter battery is disconnected while the vehicle is running. # Switch off the vehicle. Then, release the battery clamps of the starter battery. # Always disconnect the starter battery in the battery case in the left footwell first. Otherwise, electrical major assemblies, e.g. the alternator, could be damaged. \n\n# Remove battery cover 2 upwards. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the on-board electronics \n\ndue to disconnecting incorrectly \n\nIf the starter battery is not disconnected as described below, the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Always disconnect the starter battery as described in the following sequence. Never reverse the battery terminals. Oth- \n\n234 Breakdown assistance \n\n# First loosen and remove the NEGATIVE termi- nal clamp on the battery so that the clamp is no longer in contact with the terminal. \n\n# Remove the clamp cover of the POSITIVE ter- \n\nminal. \n\n# Loosen the POSITIVE terminal clamp and fold it up to the side, together with the prefuse box. \n\nRemoving/installing the starter battery \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the starter battery \n\n# Insert the starter battery into the battery box. # Fold down the bars of the starter battery. # Slide the starter battery into its anchorage in \n\nthe opposite direction to the direction of travel. \n\n# Insert bracket 3. # Tighten screws 2 on bracket 3 which holds \n\nthe battery in place. \n\n# Disconnect the starter battery (/ page 233). # Remove breather hose 1 with the connector bracket from the connection on the degassing cover. \n\n# Attach breather hose 1 with the connector bracket to the connection of the degassing cover. \n\n# Reconnect the starter battery (/ page 233). \n\n# Pull out and remove screws 2 of bracket 3 \n\nupwards. \n\n# Slide the starter battery from its anchorage in \n\nthe direction of travel. \n\n# Fold the bars of the starter battery upwards and remove the starter battery from the bat- tery box. \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends that you have the starter battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. If you want to replace the starter battery yourself, observe the following notes: R Replace a defective starter battery with a starter battery which meets the specific requirements of the vehicle. \n\nR Use detachable parts such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the starter battery to be replaced. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the starter battery # When reconnecting the starter battery, \n\nobserve the safety measures and protection notes (/ page 230). \n\nR Make sure that the vent hose is always con- nected to its original opening on the battery side. Install the existing or newly supplied stop plugs. \n\nBreakdown assistance 235 \n\nOtherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. \n\nR Make sure that the detachable parts are con- \n\nnected in the same way as before. \n\n# Observe the safety measures and protection notices when disconnecting the auxiliary bat- tery (/ page 230). \n\nDisconnecting the auxiliary battery in the engine compartment \n\n* NOTE Damage to electrical major assem- bly due to disconnecting incorrectly \n\n# Switch off all electrical consumers. # Switch off the vehicle. # Open the hood (/ page 213). # First loosen and remove the negative terminal clamp on the auxiliary battery so that the clamp is no longer in contact with the terminal. \n\nElectrical major assemblies could be damaged if the starter battery is disconnected while the vehicle is running. # Switch off the vehicle. Then, release the battery clamps of the starter battery. # Always disconnect the starter battery in the battery case in the left footwell first. Otherwise, electrical major assemblies, e.g. the alternator, could be damaged. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle's electronics \n\n# Remove the positive terminal clamp cover. # Loosen and remove the positive terminal \n\nclamp. \n\nTowing or tow-starting \n\nOverview of permissible towing methods \n\nIn the event of a breakdown, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you have the vehicle transported instead of towed. \n\nIncorrectly disconnecting the auxiliary battery can cause damage to the vehicle's electronics. # Always disconnect the auxiliary battery as described in the following sequence. Do not reverse the battery terminals under any circumstances. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing \n\naway incorrectly \n\n# Observe the instructions and notes on \n\ntowing away. \n\n% Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear- wheel drive: if there is a malfunction, the auto- matic transmission may be locked in position j. If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle (/ page 238). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport. \n\n236 Breakdown assistance \n\nPermissible towing methods \n\nBoth axles on the ground \n\nFront axle raised \n\nRear axle raised \n\nVehicles with automatic transmission and rear- wheel drive \n\nYes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) \n\nYes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) \n\nYes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock \n\nVehicles with all-wheel drive \n\nYes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) \n\nNo \n\nNo \n\nTowing with a raised axle: towing should be per- formed by a towing company. \n\nTowing the vehicle with both axles on the ground \n\nIf the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle (/ page 238). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport. \n\n# Observe the notes on permissible towing meth- & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a \n\nods (/ page 235). \n\nvehicle which is too heavy \n\n# Make sure that the battery is connected and \n\ncharged. \n\nWhen the battery is discharged, the following situa- tions occur: R The vehicle does not start. R It is not possible to release or apply the elec- \n\ntric parking brake. \n\nIf the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may \n\nswerve or rollover. \n\nR Vehicles with automatic transmission: The \n\nautomatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j. \n\n# Before tow-starting or towing away, \n\ncheck if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to towing away at \n\nexcessively high speeds or over long dis- tances \n\nThe drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distan- ces. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) \n\nmust not be exceeded. \n\n# A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) \n\nmust not be exceeded. \n\nIf a vehicle is towed or tow-started, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the vehicle's permissible gross mass can be found on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 272). \n\n# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not \n\nopen the driver's or co-driver door. Otherwise, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j. \n\n% Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear  wheel drive: if there is a malfunction, the auto- matic transmission may be locked in position j. \n\n# Install the towing eye (/ page 238). # Secure the towing device. \n\nBreakdown assistance 237 \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- \n\ntion of the tow bar \n\n# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process \n\nthe towing eyes. \n\n% You can also secure the towing device to the \n\ntrailer hitch. \n\nSafety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched off. R The brake system or power steering system \n\n* NOTE Damage and risk of accident when \n\nis malfunctioning. \n\ntowing with a tow rope \n\nR The energy supply or the on-board electri- \n\nThere is a risk of an accident if you do not observe safety and protective measures when towing using a tow rope. Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: # Secure the tow rope on the same side on \n\nboth vehicles. \n\n# Make sure the tow rope does not exceed \n\ncal system is malfunctioning. \n\nWhen your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. \n\nthe legally prescribed length. \n\n# Mark the tow rope in the center, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. \n\n# Observe the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance that ensures the tow rope does not sag. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive \n\npower \n\nIf you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be dam- aged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. \n\n# Do not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. Otherwise, you could dam- age the vehicle. \n\nTowing a vehicle with the front or rear axle raised \n\n* NOTE Damage if the vehicle is switched on \n\n# Deactivate automatic locking (/ page 51). # Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate tow-away alarm (/ page 65). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 149). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the \n\nIf you leave the vehicle switched on while tow- ing it with the front or rear axle raised, an inter- vention by ESP® can damage the brake sys- tem. # Switch off the vehicle. \n\nautomatic transmission to i. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect removal or \n\n# Release the parking brake. \n\ninstallation of the propeller shafts \n\nWhen installing the propeller shafts, they can be damaged if you do not use new screws. Always use new screws when installing the propeller shafts. Only have the propeller shafts installed or removed by qualified, skilled personnel. \n\n% If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle at the front axle, and if the rear axle is dam- aged, raise the vehicle at the rear axle. \n\n238 Breakdown assistance \n\n% Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear- wheel drive: if there is a malfunction, the auto- matic transmission may be locked in position j. If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle (/ page 238). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport. # Observe the notes on permissible towing meth- \n\nVehicles with all-wheel drive/vehicles with auto- matic transmission \n\nods (/ page 235). \n\n# The propeller shafts to the drive axles must be removed if the maximum permissible towing distance is exceeded. \n\n# Only have the propeller shafts installed or removed by qualified, trained personnel. \n\n# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the \n\nautomatic transmission to i. \n\n# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle \n\n# Release the parking brake. # Switch off the vehicle. \n\n# Do not position the vehicle above the \n\nconnection point of the transport vehicle. \n\nLoading the vehicle for transport \n\nTowing eye storage location \n\n# Observe the notes on permissible towing meth- \n\nods (/ page 235). \n\nThe towing eye is located in the vehicle tool kit in the front-passenger footwell (/ page 240). \n\n# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to load \n\nthe vehicle. \n\nInstalling/removing the towing eye \n\n# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the \n\nautomatic transmission to position i. \n\nInstalling the front towing eye \n\n% Vehicles with automatic transmission: in the \n\nevent of damage to the electrics, the auto- matic transmission may be locked in position j. To shift to position i, provide the on- board electrical system with power (/ page 230). \n\n# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the \n\nautomatic transmission to position j. # Use the parking brake to secure the vehicle \n\nagainst rolling away. \n\n# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. \n\n# Press the top of the cover and remove the \n\ncover. \n\n# Screw in towing eye 1 clockwise to the stop \n\nand tighten. \n\nRemoving the front towing eye # Unscrew towing eye 1 counter-clockwise. \n\nBreakdown assistance 239 \n\n# Insert the cover with the tabs at the top and \n\npush in at the bottom until the cover engages. \n\nElectrical fuses \n\nNotes on electrical fuses \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due \n\nto overloaded lines \n\nIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amper- age. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses \n\nRear towing eye (vehicles with passenger vehicle approval) \n\nElectrical components or systems could be damaged by incorrect fuses. # Only use fuses which have been \n\n% Rear towing eye 2 is firmly screwed to the \n\nvehicle. \n\napproved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor- rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch \n\nWhen a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to \n\ntow away or tow start the vehicle. \n\n# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery. \n\nThe electrical fuses in your vehicle isolate defec- tive circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will cease to oper- ate. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of an equivalent specification, which you can determine by the color and fuse rating. The fuse allocation chart and further information on the electric fuses and relays can be found in the \"Fuse allocation chart\" supplement. \n\n* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by \n\nTow-starting the vehicle \n\nmoisture \n\n* NOTE Damage to the automatic transmis- \n\nsion due to tow starting \n\nMoisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure \n\nThe automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission \n\nthat no moisture can enter the fuse box. \n\n# When closing the fuse box, make sure \n\nthat the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box. \n\nmust not be tow started. \n\nIf the new fuse which has been inserted also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. Make sure of the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured such that it does not roll \n\naway \n\nR All electrical consumers are switched off R The vehicle is switched off \n\n240 Breakdown assistance \n\nThe fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the co-driver's footwell \n\n(/ page 240) \n\nR Fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat \n\n(/ page 240) \n\nOpening the fuse box in the seat base of the driv- er's seat \n\nExample: vehicle tool kit insert \n\n# Lift the insert at marked positions 1. # Pull the insert out of clips 2. \n\nClosing the fuse box # Slide the insert into clips 2. # Close the insert by pressing on marked posi- \n\ntions 1. \n\n# To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1 \n\non the cover. # Remove the cover. # To close: press the cover firmly into the seat \n\n# Put on the stowage compartment cover in the co-driver's footwell and lock it (/ page 241). \n\nVehicle tool kit \n\nbase until fasteners 1 clip in. \n\nInformation on the vehicle tool kit \n\nOpening and closing the fuse box in the co-driver's footwell \n\nOpening the fuse box # Unlocking and removing the stowage compart- \n\nment cover in the co-driver's footwell (/ page 241). \n\nThe vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage com- partment in the footwell on the front passenger side (/ page 241). The vehicle tool kit contains: R a towing eye R a screwdriver with Torx®, Phillips and slotted \n\nheads \n\nThe vehicle tool kit may also contain the following, for example: R an open-end wrench R a wheel wrench R a release tool for the park pawl R an insert bit R a socket wrench R a tool for unlocking the lockable DEF filler cap \n\nBreakdown assistance 241 \n\nUnlocking and removing the storage compartment cover \n\nStoring the vehicle tool kit # Slide the insert into clips 2. # Close the insert by pressing on marked points \n\n1. \n\nHydraulic jack \n\nInformation on the hydraulic jack \n\n# Remove the rubber mat from the co-driver's \n\nfootwell. \n\n# To unlock: turn quick-release fastener 1 \n\ncounter-clockwise to position 1. # Slightly raise and pull out the cover. \n\nInserting and locking the cover # Slide in the cover and press it downwards. # Press down quick-release fastener 1 until it \n\nengages. \n\nThe hydraulic jack is located in side compartment 1 above the co-driver door step. Vehicles with more than 18 seats \n\n# To lock: turn quick-release fastener 1 clock- \n\nwise to position 2. \n\nRemoving the vehicle tool kit \n\nExample: vehicle tool kit insert \n\n# Raise the insert at marked points 1. # Pull the insert out of clips 2. \n\nHydraulic jack 1 is located behind the last bench seat on the right. The jack has a maximum weight of 16.5 lbs (7.5 kg) depending on the vehicle's equipment. You will find the maximum load capacity of the jack stated on the adhesive label attached to the jack. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n242 Breakdown assistance \n\nJack maintenance: R Clean and grease all moving parts after use. R Extend and retract the pistons fully every six \n\nVehicles with more than 18 seats Requirement:  R The right-hand rear-end door is open. \n\nmonths. \n\nRemoving the pump lever rod and the jack \n\nRequirements:  R The co-driver door is open. \n\n# Open clasps 2 on jack 1, loosen the straps \n\nand remove the jack. \n\n# To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1 \n\non the cover. # Remove the cover. # Pull out the holder completely and place it on \n\n# Open clasp 2 on pump lever rod 3, loosen the straps and remove the pump lever rod. # To store: collapse pump lever rod 3 and place it along with jack 1 in the loosened straps, and tighten clasps 2 to close. \n\nthe step. \n\n# Remove jack 2 and the pump lever rod. # To close: press the cover firmly so that fasten- \n\ners 1 engage. \n\nWheels and tires 243 \n\nInformation on noise or unusual driving charac- teristics While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual driving characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate damage to the wheels or tires. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check if wheels and tires have been damaged or are no longer functioning properly. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual driving characteristics. If no signs of dam- age can be detected, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nConduct the following checks regularly on all wheels, at least once a month or as required, e.g. before a long journey or when driving off-road: R check the tire pressure (/ page 245) R check the valve caps \n\nValves must be protected from moisture and dirt with valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. \n\nR visually inspect the tread depth and the tire contact surface across the whole tire width The minimum tread depth for summer use is â in (3 mm) and for winter use ã in (4 mm). \n\nNotes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury through damaged \n\ntires \n\nDamaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of \n\ndamage and replace any damaged tires immediately. \n\nCheck the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Look out for the following types of damage, for example: R cuts in the tires R punctures in the tires R tears in the tires R bulges on tires R deformation or severe corrosion on wheels \n\n& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to \n\ninsufficient tire tread \n\nInsufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. \n\nMarkings 1 show in which places the bar indica- tors (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible as soon as the tread depth is approx- imately á in (1.6 mm). \n\nInformation on driving with summer tires At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold tempera- tures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the summer tires you have installed (/ page 256). Once you have installed the summer tires: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 245) R Restart the tire pressure monitor \n\n(/ page 251) \n\nMinimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm) \n\n# For safety reasons, replace the tires \n\nbefore the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. \n\nInformation on M+S tires At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use winter tires or all-season tires that are marked with M+S. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym- bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. \n\n244 Wheels and tires \n\nOnly these tires allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to also function optimally in win- ter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have installed (/ page 256). If you install M+S tires that have a lower maximum permissible speed than the maximum design speed of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. You can obtain this at a qualified specialist workshop. Once you have installed the M+S tires, take the fol- lowing measures: R check the tire pressure (/ page 245) R restart the tire pressure monitoring system \n\n(/ page 251) \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to snow \n\nchains breaking \n\nIf you drive too fast with snow chains, they can break, injure other persons, and damage the vehicle. # Observe the maximum permissible speed \n\nfor operation with snow chains. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from \n\nmounted snow chains \n\nIf snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels \n\nbefore mounting snow chains. \n\nObserve the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain \n\nNotes on snow chains \n\nwheel/tire combinations. You can obtain infor- mation on this at a qualified specialist work- shop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- \n\nrectly installed snow chains \n\nVehicles with rear-wheel drive: if you have installed snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front \n\nwheels. \n\n# Only install snow chains on the rear \n\nwheels in pairs. \n\n# Vehicles with twin tires: install the snow \n\nchains on the outer wheels. \n\nR For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehi- cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. \n\nR The snow chains must be retightened after \n\ndriving approximately 0.6 miles (1 km). This is the only way to ensure the snow chains are optimally seated with clearance to adjacent components. \n\nR Vehicles with all-wheel drive: install snow \n\nchains on the wheels on the rear axle. On vehi- cles with twin tires, install the snow chains on the outer wheels. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita- \n\nble snow chains \n\nCommercially available snow chains can come loose and damage chassis components or brake hoses. # Only install snow chains that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for these tires. \n\nR Use snow chains only when the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. \n\nR Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the applicable regulations before installing snow chains. \n\nR Activate all-wheel drive before driving off with \n\nFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been checked and approved. You can obtain information about snow chains from any qualified specialist workshop. \n\nsnow chains (/ page 126, 127). \n\nR If snow chains are installed, the maximum per- \n\nmissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). \n\nR Vehicles with Parking Assist: do not use Park- ing Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains are installed. \n\nWheels and tires 245 \n\n% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away \n\n(/ page 146). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. \n\nTire pressure \n\nTire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire defects as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption \n\nNotes on tire pressure \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuffi- \n\na tire pressure \n\ncient or excessive tire pressure \n\nUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose in par- ticular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or \n\nTires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking prop- erties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures. \n\nunevenly. \n\nR The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. \n\n# Comply with the recommended tire pres- sures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regu- larly: R Monthly R When the load changes R Before embarking on a longer journey R If operating conditions change, e.g. off- \n\nroad driving \n\n# Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. \n\nExcessively high tire pressure can result in: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- \n\nted pressure drop in the tires \n\nThe wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or \n\nDriving with tire pressure that is too high or too low can: R shorten the service life of the tires R cause increased tire damage R adversely affect handling characteristics and thus driving safety, for example, due to hydro- planing \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low \n\na tire pressure \n\nthe valve has a leak. \n\n# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nYou can find information on recommended tire pressures for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 252). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel \n\nTires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking prop- erties and the handling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure. \n\nfiller flap . \n\nObserve the maximum tire pressure (/ page 256). Use a suitable pressure gage to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pres- sure. \n\n246 Wheels and tires \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to insufficient or excessive tire pressure \n\nOverinflating or underinflating your tires will shorten their service life. # Check the tire pressure regularly, but at \n\nleast every 14 days. \n\nVehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: you can also check the tire pressure using the on- board computer. Only check tire pressures when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile \n\n(1.6 km). \n\nA rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C) increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tire pressure of warm tires. The tire pressures recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table may affect the ride comfort. \n\nThe tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for the tires installed at the factory on this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures are valid for cold tires and different vehicle load condi- tions. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for those tire sizes. If the preceding tire sizes are supplemented by the + symbol, the tire pressure information follow- ing shows alternative tire pressures. The load conditions \"partially laden\" and \"fully laden\" are defined in the table for varying weights. Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diam- eter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R16. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the side wall of the tire (/ page 256). \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita- \n\nble accessories on tire valves \n\nIf you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes- Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. \n\nNotes on trailer operation Always inflate the tires on the rear axle to the rec- ommended tire pressure on the tire pressure table for a full load. \n\nOverview of the tire pressure table \n\nThe tire pressure table can be found on the seat base or on the B-pillar on the driver's side. % The data shown in the images is example data. \n\nWheels and tires 247 \n\nFront axle tire pressures on vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and Single tires Max. front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg) \n\nLT245/75R16 120/116Q \n\nFully laden \n\n320 kPa (3.2 bar/46 psi) \n\nFront axle tire pressures on vehicles with rear wheel drive and Single tires Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) \n\nLT245/75R16 120/116Q \n\nFully laden \n\n360 kPa (3.6 bar/52 psi) 1) \n\n1) Only valid for vehicles with a long wheelbase 171 in (4350 mm) and a permissible gross mass of over 7716 lbs (3.5 t). \n\nRear axle tire pressures on vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and Single tires Max. rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg) \n\nLT245/75R16 120/116Q \n\nFully laden \n\n480 kPa (4.8 bar/70 psi) \n\nLT245/75R16 120/116Q \n\nPartially laden 2) \n\n420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 2) \n\n2) It is only permissible to use this reduced tire pressure if it can be guaranteed by weighing the vehicle that the rear axle load of 4960 lbs (2250 kg) will not be exceeded. In case of doubt, inflate to 480 kPa (4.8 bar/70 psi). \n\nFront axle tire pressures for vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and twin tires Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg) \n\nLT215/85R16 115/112Q \n\nFully laden \n\n380 kPa (3.8 bar/55 psi) \n\nMax. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) \n\nLT215/85R16 115/112Q \n\nFully laden \n\n420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) \n\n248 Wheels and tires \n\nMax. front axle load 4630 lbs (2100 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4630 lbs (2100 kg) \n\nLT215/85R16 115/112Q \n\nFully laden \n\n450 kPa (4.5 bar/65 psi) \n\nRear axle tire pressures for vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and twin tires Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. rear axle load up to 7055 lbs (3200 kg) \n\nLT215/85R16 115/112Q \n\nFully laden \n\n370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi) \n\nMax. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg) \n\nLT215/85R16 115/112Q \n\nFully laden \n\n400 kPa (4.0 bar/58 psi) \n\nMax. rear axle load 7937 lbs (3600 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. rear axle load 7937 lbs (3600 kg) \n\nLT215/85R16 115/112Q \n\nFully laden \n\n420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) \n\nFront axle tire pressures on vehicles with Super Single tires Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg) \n\n225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) \n\nFully laden \n\n340 kPa (3.4 bar/49 psi) \n\nMax. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) \n\n225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) \n\nFully laden \n\n370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi) \n\nWheels and tires 249 \n\nRear axle tire pressures on vehicles with rear wheel drive and Super Single tires Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg) \n\n285/65R16C 131R \n\nFully laden \n\n460 kPa (4.6 bar/67 psi) \n\nMax. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg) \n\nTires/disc wheel \n\nVehicle load \n\nMax. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg) \n\n285/65R16C 131R \n\nFully laden \n\n520 kPa (5.2 bar/75 psi) \n\nBe sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245) R Tire and Loading Information placard \n\n(/ page 252) \n\nR Maximum tire pressure (/ page 256) \n\nOverview of the tire pressure for emergency spare wheels \n\nTire/emergency spare wheel \n\nAir pressure \n\nIn combination with vehicle tires \n\n225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 1) \n\n370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi) \n\n225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) \n\n225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 1) \n\n690 kPa (6.9 bar/100 psi) \n\n285/65 R16C 131R \n\n1) Valid to use as an emergency spare wheel on Super Single vehicles for a maximum distance of 100 km (62 mi) and a maximum permissible speed of 55 km/h (34 mph). \n\nTire pressure monitoring system \n\n▌Function of the tire pressure monitoring system with single tires \n\n& DANGER Risk of accident due to incorrect \n\ntire pressure \n\nEach tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire \n\ninflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, \n\n250 Wheels and tires \n\neven if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approx- imately one minute and then remain continu- ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. \n\n# \n\nSystem limits \n\nThe system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R if the tire pressure has been set incorrectly R if there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire \n\nR if there is a malfunction caused by another \n\nradio signal source \n\nR if there is a change of tire size \n\nBear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245) \n\n▌Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is switched on. \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service  5 Tires \n\nThe system checks the pressure and temperature of the tires mounted on the vehicle with the aid of a tire pressure sensor. New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires, are automatically taught-in during the first journey on which they are used. The tire pressure and the tire temperature are shown on the instrument cluster display (/ page 178). If there is a significant loss of tire pressure, a warning is issued: R via display messages (/ page 303) R via the h warning lamp on the instrument \n\ncluster (/ page 318) \n\nIt is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pres- sure to the recommended cold tire pressure suita- ble for the operating situation. Set the tire pres- sure when the tires are cold using a tire pressure gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitoring system. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring system will automatically update the reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, how- ever, also update the reference values manually by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 251). \n\nOne of the following displays appears: R The current tire pressure and tire temperature \n\nof the individual wheels. \n\nInstrument cluster display (color) \n\nR The current tire pressure for each wheel. \n\nInstrument cluster display (black and white) \n\nR Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a  few minutes.: the teach-in process of the sys- \n\nWheels and tires 251 \n\ntem is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored. \n\nBear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245) \n\n# Compare the tire pressure with the recommen- ded tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 246). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 245). \n\n% The values shown on the instrument cluster display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge, as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245) \n\n▌Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system \n\nRequirements:  R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating condition on each of the wheels (/ page 245). \n\n▌Radio equipment approval of the tire pressure monitoring system \n\nCountry \n\nCanada \n\nRadio equipment approval number \n\nIC: 4008C-TSSRE4A Operation is subject to the following two con- ditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation. \n\nR Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in  \n\nthe following situations:  \n\nMexico \n\n- \n- \n\nThe tire pressure has changed. The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. \n\nUSA \n\nOn-board computer: 4 Service  5 Tires \n\n# Scroll down in the menu. \n\nThe Use current pressures as new reference  values? message appears in the instrument cluster display. \n\n# Confirm the message to initiate a restart. \n\nThe Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the instrument cluster display. Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp goes out. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pres- sures are within the specified range. The cur- rent tire pressures are then accepted as refer- ence values and monitored. \n\nModel: TSSRE4A & TSSSG4G6, IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806 \n\nFCC ID: YGOTSSRE4A This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper- ation. WARNING: Any changes or modifica- tion not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to operate this equip- ment. \n\n252 Wheels and tires \n\nLoading the vehicle \n\nTire and Loading Information placard \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident when driv- \n\ning with an overloaded tire \n\nOverloaded tires may overheat and burst. Overloaded tires can impair the steering and handling characteristics and lead to brake fail- ure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Mercedes-Benz recommends you use the load-bearing index, which is given in the vehicle documents. \n\nThe Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R The maximum number of seats indicates the maximum number of occupants permitted to travel in the vehicle. \n\nR The maximum permissible load equals the \n\ngross weight of all vehicle occupants, the lug- gage and cargo. \n\nR The recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures apply to the maximum permissible load and up to the maxi- mum permissible speed of the vehicle. \n\nAlso observe the following information: R The information about permissible weights on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 272). R The information about tire pressure on the tire \n\n# Never overload the tires by exceeding the \n\npressure table . \n\nmaximum load. \n\nOnly vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. \n\nAdditional related subjects: R Determining the maximum load (/ page 252). R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245). \n\nSteps to determining the correct critical load \n\nThe following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in accord- ance with the \"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.\" # Step 1: Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. \n\n1 Tire and Loading Information placard \n\n# Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. \n\n# Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\ndriver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passen- gers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) \n\n# Step 5: Determine the combined weight of lug- gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa- ble cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. \n\n# Step 6: If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, \n\nload from your trailer will be transferred to your \n\nWheels and tires 253 \n\nvehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. \n\nAdditional related subjects: R Sample calculation for determining the maxi- \n\nmum load (/ page 253) \n\nIn your Operating Instructions or Operator's Man- ual you will find the vehicle's placard under \"Tire and Loading Information placard\" and a calculation example for determining the maximum load. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer- hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any ques- tions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. \n\nEven if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum per- missible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate. Have you loaded vehicle – including driver, occu- pants and load – weighed on a vehicle weigh- bridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. \n\nR Tire and Loading Information placard \n\n(/ page 252) R Tire pressure table R Vehicle identification plate \n\nSample calculation for determining the maximum load \n\nThe following table has examples of how to calcu- late total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This value is  for illustrative purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 252). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. \n\nStep 1 \n\nExample 1 \n\nExample 2 \n\nCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) \n\n1500 lbs (680 kg) \n\n1500 lbs (680 kg) \n\nStep 2 \n\nExample 1 \n\nExample 2 \n\nNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) \n\n5 \n\n1 \n\nDistribution of the occupants \n\nFront: 2 Rear: 3 \n\nFront: 1 \n\nWeight of occupants \n\nOccupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) \n\nOccupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) \n\nTotal weight of all occupants \n\n750 lbs (340 kg) \n\n200 lbs (91 kg) \n\n254 Wheels and tires \n\nStep 3 \n\nExample 1 \n\nExample 2 \n\nPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) \n\n1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) \n\n1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) \n\nTire labeling \n\nOverview of tire labeling \n\n1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\n% This grading is not legally prescribed for Can- ada, but specified in most cases anyway. \n\n1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards \n\n(/ page 254) \n\n2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire \n\nIdentification Number (/ page 255) \n\n3 Maximum tire load (/ page 255) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 256) 5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 256) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity \n\nand speed rating (/ page 256) \n\n8 Tire name \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\nTread wear grade The tread wear grade is a comparative grading based on tread wear grade tests conducted under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. Depart- ment of Transportation test track. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire gra- ded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to var- iations in driving habits, service practices and dif- ferences in road characteristics and climate condi- tions. \n\nTraction grade \n\nInformation on tire quality grades \n\n& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade- \n\nAccording to the requirements of the U.S. Depart- ment of Transportation's \"Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards\" tire manufacturers must grade their tires using the following three performance factors: \n\nquate traction \n\nThe traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. \n\nWheels and tires 255 \n\n* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from \n\nwheelspin \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\n# Avoid wheelspin. \n\nThe traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. These grades relate to the tire's ability to come to a standstill on a wet pavement under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government test surface made from asphalt and concrete. \n\nTemperature grade \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident from tire over- \n\nheating and tire failure \n\nExcessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the \n\ntires. \n\n# Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. \n\nThe temperature grades are A (highest grade), B and C. These relate to a tire's resistance to heat and its ability to release heat on a specified test wheel in laboratory tests under controlled condi- tions. Sustained high temperatures can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. In addition, excessively high temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C refers to a per- formance which all passenger vehicle tires must exhibit, according to the U.S. Department of Trans- portation's requirements. \n\nThe TIN is a unique identification number for tires and consists of the following components: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire sym- bol 1 indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- portation. \n\nR Manufacturer identification code: manufac- \n\nturer identification code 2 provides informa- tion about the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (/ page 259). \n\nR Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used \n\nby the manufacturer as a code to describe spe- cific characteristics of the tire. \n\nR Date of manufacture: date of manufacture 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd numbers indicate the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th numbers indicate the year of manufacture (e.g. \"3208\" refers to the 32nd week of the year 2008). \n\nInformation on maximum tire load \n\nInformation on DOT and TIN (Tire Identification Number) \n\nU.S. tire regulations indicate that every tire manu- facturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\nMaximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maxi- mum permissible load. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Load- ing Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv- er's side (/ page 252). \n\n256 Wheels and tires \n\nInformation on maximum tire pressure \n\n# Observe the tire load rating and speed \n\nrating required for your vehicle. \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\nMaximum permitted tire pressure 1, which is per- mitted for the tires must not be exceeded. Exception: when using the 225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) tires as a spare wheel on the rear axle of Super Single vehicles with a distance limit of 62 mi (100 km) and speed limit of 34 mph (55 km/h). \n\n1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index, Single tires 7 Load-bearing index, twin tires 8 Speed rating \n\nInformation on tire characteristics \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\nFurther information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. \n\nFirst letter(s) 1: R \"LT\": light truck tires according to US manufac- \n\nturing standards \n\nR \"C\": tires for commercial usage in accordance \n\nwith European manufacturer standards \n\n% The data shown in the illustration is sample \n\ndata. \n\nThis information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall 1 and under tire tread 2. \n\nAspect ratio (in percent) 3: The size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent (tire height divided by tire width). \n\nTire code 4 (tire type): R \"R\": radial tire \n\nTire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating \n\nExceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. \n\nRim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). \n\nLoad-bearing index 6 and 7: Numerical code which specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (\"91\" equals, e.g. 1,356 lb (615 kg)). The tire load-bearing capacity must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maximum per- missible load of the tires. \n\nWheels and tires 257 \n\nSee also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 252) \n\nR Maximum tire load (/ page 255) \n\nSpeed rating 8: Specifies the approved maximum design speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi- cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). \n\nEnsure that your tires have the required speed rat- ing. You can obtain information on the required speed rating at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. \n\nSummer tires \n\nIndex \n\nSpeed rating \n\nL \n\nUp to 75 mph (120 km/h) \n\nM \n\nUp to 81 mph (130 km/h) \n\nN \n\nUp to 87 mph (140 km/h) \n\nP \n\nUp to 93 mph (150 km/h) \n\nQ \n\nUp to 100 mph (160 km/h) \n\nR \n\nUp to 106 mph (170 km/h) \n\nSummer, all-season and winter tires \n\nIndex \n\nSpeed rating \n\nL M+S1 \n\nUp to 75 mph (120 km/h) \n\nM M+S1 \n\nUp to 81 mph (130 km/h) \n\nN M+S1 \n\nUp to 87 mph (140 km/h) \n\nP M+S1 \n\nUp to 93 mph (150 km/h) \n\nQ M+S1 \n\nUp to 100 mph (160 km/h) \n\nR M+S1 \n\nUp to 118 mph (170 km/h) \n\n1: Or \"M+S i\" for winter tires. Winter tires are marked with the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. \n\nInformation on definitions (tires and loading) Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated layers in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Average weight of vehicle occupants: the number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed mul- tiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature char- acteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer in accordance with test specifications of the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommended tire pressure is the pressure specified for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires, the maximum permissible load and the maximum per- missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehi- cle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equip- ment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): GAWR is the gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle \n\n258 Wheels and tires \n\nmust never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating. You can find the Gross Axle Weight Rating on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the Gross Vehicle Weight comprises the weight of the vehicle includ- ing fuel, tools, the spare wheel, any accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer nose- weight if applicable. The Gross Vehicle Weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing (GVWR) specified on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer noseweight if applicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is specified on the vehicle identifica- tion plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maxi- mum weight is the sum of the vehicle's curb weight, weight of the accessories, maximum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are the equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are instal- led on the vehicle, but does not include passen- gers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum per- missible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load for one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds \n\nper square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Tire pressure on cold tires: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Special equipment weight: the combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Special equipment, such as high-perform- ance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or a high-performance battery, are not inclu- ded in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identifi- cation number which can be used by a tire manu- facturer to identify tires, for example in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer identification code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nominal load and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) multi- plied by the number of seats in the vehicle. \n\nWheels and tires 259 \n\nChanging a wheel \n\nNotes on selecting, installing and replacing tires \n\nYou can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- \n\nrect wheel and tire dimensions \n\nIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the service brakes or wheel suspension com- ponents may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with \n\nOtherwise, certain properties, such as han- dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions and consumption could be adversely affected. Other wheel sizes may cause the tires to come into contact with the vehicle body and axle components when under load. This may result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. # Only use tires, wheels and accessory \n\nparts that have been checked and rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz. \n\n* NOTE Driving safety put at risk by retrea- \n\nded tires \n\nones that fulfill the specifications of the original part. \n\nFor wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type R Permissible wheel load R Wheel offset \n\nRetreaded tires are not checked or recommen- ded by Mercedes-Benz, as previous damage is not always detected during the retread proc- ess. Driving safety cannot, therefore, be guaran- teed. # Do not use used tires when their previ- \n\nous usage is unknown. \n\nFor tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type R Load-bearing index R Speed rating \n\n* NOTE Damage to electronic components \n\ndue to use of installation tools \n\nVehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: electronic components are located in the wheel. # Do not place any installation tools in the \n\narea of the valve. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating \n\n# Only have tires replaced at a qualified \n\nspecialist workshop. \n\nExceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire dam- age and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed \n\nrating required for your vehicle. \n\n* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage due to tire types and sizes that have not been approved \n\nFor safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessory parts which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with driving systems and driving safety sys- tems, such as ABS or ESP®. \n\nAccessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are not being used correctly, can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved acces- sories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R suitability R legal stipulations R factory recommendations \n\nObserve the following points when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Use only tires and wheels of the same type, \n\ndesign (winter tires, all-season tires) and make. \n\nR Only install wheels of the same size and tread \n\ndesign on one axle (left and right). \n\n260 Wheels and tires \n\nIt is only permissible to install a different wheel size to this in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. \n\ntires with different dimensions; doing so may lead to the general operating permit being ren- dered invalid. \n\nR Only install tires of the correct size onto the \n\nwheels. \n\nR Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- \n\ntem: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure moni- toring system. \n\nR At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use win- ter tires or all-season tires with the M+S mark- ing on all wheels. Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym- bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. \n\nAlso observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245) R Tire and Loading Information placard \n\n(/ page 252) \n\nR Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity \n\nand speed rating (/ page 256) R Tire pressure table (/ page 246) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel \n\n(/ page 266) \n\nNotes on changing wheels \n\nR Only use tires with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for \n\nthe installed tires. If this is below the vehicle's maximum permis- sible speed, this must be indicated in an appro- priate label in the driver's field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the \n\nfirst 60 miles (100 km). \n\nR Replace the tires after six years at the latest, \n\nregardless of wear. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury through different \n\nwheel sizes \n\nRotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimen- sions. \n\nFor more information on wheels and tires, contact a qualified specialist workshop. % Vehicles with twin tires: \n\nFor vehicles with twin tires with a GVW of 11,030 lbs or 12,125 lbs, only use tires with the dimension LT 215/85 R16 which have been approved for this vehicle by the manufac- turer. It is not permissible to use tires with dif- ferent dimensions; doing so may lead to the general operating permit being rendered inva- lid. \n\n% Vehicles with single tires: \n\nOn vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the inter- vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 (5,000) to 6,000 miles (10,000 km), depending on the degree of wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on \"Changing a wheel\" when doing so. \n\nSize categories of wheels \n\nFor vehicles with single tires with a GVW less than or equal to 9,480 lbs, only use tires with the dimension LT 245/75 R16 which have been approved for this vehicle by the manufac- turer. It is not permissible to use tires with dif- ferent dimensions; doing so may lead to the general operating permit being rendered inva- lid. \n\n% Vehicles with Super Single tires: \n\nFor vehicles with single tires with a GVW of 11,030 lbs, only use tires with the dimensions 225/75 R16C (FA) and 285/65 R16C (RA) which have been approved for this vehicle by the manufacturer. It is not permissible to use \n\nThe determined vehicle speed is displayed in the instrument cluster and is important for controlling the driving safety systems and driving systems. The display accuracy of the speedometer and the odometer is legally prescribed. Determining the speed is dependent on the tire size or the rolling circumference of the tires. The rim diameter is always specified in inches. For this reason, the vehicle control units can be coded for the following wheel size categories: Wheel size category 3 R 205/75 R16C FA R 225/75 R16C FA \n\nWheels and tires 261 \n\nR 285/65 R16C RA R LT245/75 R16 R LT215/85 R16 \n\n% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you stay \n\nwithin a wheel size category when changing a tire. In this way, you avoid recoding the control units. \n\n% You will find the maximum load capacity of the \n\njack stated on the adhesive label attached to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a mal- function, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive \n\nIf you change the wheel size of your vehicle, for instance when changing wheels for winter opera- tion, check it is assigned to the correct wheel size category. If the wheel size category changes, you must have your vehicle's control units recoded at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the display accuracy of the speedome- ter and the odometer will be outside the legally prescribed tolerance. It may also be lower, i.e. the current road speed is then higher than the speed shown on the speedometer. If a deviation is out- side the range of tolerance, driving safety systems and driving systems may be operationally impaired or may detect a malfunction and switch them- selves off. \n\nInformation on the direction of the tires' rotation \n\nTires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- planing. You will only gain these benefits if the cor- rect direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may also install a spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the spare wheel. \n\nNotes on storing wheels \n\nThe tire-change tool kit is located in stowage com- partment 1 above the step of the front passenger door and in the stowage compartment in the foot- well on the front passenger side. \n\nPreparing the vehicle for a wheel change \n\nRequirements:  R The tire-change tool kit is available. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level \n\nground. \n\n# Apply the parking brake. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead \n\nposition. \n\nObserve the following when storing wheels: R Wheels that have been removed should be stored in a cool, dry and, if possible, dark place. \n\nR Protect the tires from oil, grease and fuel. \n\n# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the \n\ntransmission to position j. \n\n# Switch off the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be switched \n\non. \n\n# Take the vehicle tool kit from the footwell on \n\nOverview of tire-change tool kit \n\nthe co-driver side (/ page 240). \n\nRequired tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack R Wheel wrench \n\n262 Wheels and tires \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect \n\npositioning of the jack \n\nIf you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from vehicle tip- \n\nping \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive # Take the jack and the tire-change tool kit out of the stowage compartment (/ page 261). \n\nOn slopes, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Never change a wheel on a slope. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n# If necessary, remove the wheel trim. # Assemble the lug wrench extension using the middle rod and the rod with the largest diame- ter from the three-piece jack pump lever. # Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug \n\nwrench extension as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. \n\n# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts or bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel nuts or bolts completely. \n\n# Raise the vehicle (/ page 262). \n\n* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the \n\njack \n\nIf you do not position the jack at the jack sup- port points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle. # Only position the jack at the jack support \n\npoints provided for this purpose. \n\nRequirements:  R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle is prepared for changing a wheel \n\n(/ page 261). \n\nRaising the vehicle when changing a wheel \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury due to the jack \n\ntipping over \n\nIf you park a vehicle with air suspension, the air suspension can remain active for up to an hour, even if the vehicle is switched off. If you then raise the vehicle using the jack, the air suspension will attempt to even out the vehicle level. The jack can tip over. # Before raising the vehicle, press the \n\nService button on the remote control for the air suspension. This prevents the vehicle level from being automatically readjusted or manually raised or lowered. \n\nOnly position the jack on the jack support points intended for this purpose. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Important notes on using the jack: R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has \n\nbeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incor- rectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. \n\nR The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle \n\nfor a short time while a wheel is being changed and is not suitable for carrying out mainte- nance work under the vehicle. \n\nR Avoid changing a wheel on uphill and downhill \n\nslopes. \n\nR The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and \n\nnon-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load bearing and non-slip underlay. \n\nR The foot of the jack must be positioned verti- \n\ncally under the jack support point. \n\nWheels and tires 263 \n\nSafety instructions while the vehicle is raised: R Do not put your hands or feet under the vehi- \n\ncle. \n\nR Do not lie underneath the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the \n\n# Close pressure release screw 3. # To do this, use the flattened section on pump lever 1 to turn pressure release screw 3 clockwise to the stop. \n\n% Do not turn pressure release screw 3 more \n\nparking brake. \n\nR Do not open or close any doors. \n\nthan one or two full turns. Hydraulic fluid could otherwise escape. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive \n\n# Insert pump lever 1 with the largest rod into the recess on the jack and secure by turning it clockwise. \n\n# Place the jack vertically beneath the jack sup- \n\nport points described below. \n\nJack support points \n\nOnly use the middle rod and the pump lever rod with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Oth- erwise, the rods could bend and deform so much that they can no longer be used as pump levers for the jack. \n\nJack support point, front axle \n\nJack support point, rear axle (example: chassis up to 3.5 t) \n\n# To prepare the hydraulic jack: insert the third rod of pump lever 1 for the jack into the lug wrench extension. \n\n264 Wheels and tires \n\n* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on \n\nwheel bolts \n\n# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a \n\ndirty surface. \n\n# Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts with the wheel \n\nnut wrench. \n\n# On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove the \n\nwheel nut cover. # Remove the wheel. \n\nInstalling a new wheel \n\nJack support point, rear axle (example: panel van and crewbus up to 4.0 t) \n\nRequirements:  R The wheel is removed (/ page 264). \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a \n\nwheel \n\nOiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. \n\n# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- \n\naged hub threads replaced. \n\n# Do not continue driving. \n\nJack support point, rear axle (vehicles 5.0 t) \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening \n\nwheel bolts and nuts \n\n# Place the jack beneath the jack support point. # Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn jack spindle 2 counter-clockwise as far as it will go. # Raise the vehicle until the tire is raised a maxi- \n\nmum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. \n\nIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. \n\n# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 264). \n\n* NOTE Damage to electronic components \n\ndue to use of installation tools \n\nRemoving a wheel \n\nRequirements:  R The vehicle is raised (/ page 262). \n\nWhen changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs since this could impair the level of comfort when braking. \n\nVehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: electronic components are located in the wheel. # Do not place any installation tools in the \n\narea of the valve. \n\n# Only have tires replaced at a qualified \n\nspecialist workshop. \n\n# Observe the information on the choice of tires \n\n(/ page 259). \n\nWheels and tires 265 \n\n# Observe the instructions and safety notes on \n\nchanging a wheel (/ page 259). \n\nWheels with wheel nuts # Front wheels with wheel nut cover: press the \n\n# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. \n\nwheel nut cover onto the wheel nuts. \n\n# Screw in three wheel nuts over the fixing discs \n\nof the wheel nut cover. \n\nWhen you install the steel spare wheel, it is essen- tial you use short wheel bolts for a steel wheel. Using other wheel bolts when installing the steel spare wheel may damage the brake system. \n\n# Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are in \n\nthe middle of the holes. \n\n# Screw in the remaining wheel nuts. # Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts. \n\nLowering the vehicle after a wheel change \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- \n\nrect tightening torque \n\nThe wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescri- bed torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tighten- ing torque. \n\n1 Wheel bolt for alloy wheel 2 Wheel bolt for steel wheel \n\n# Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfa- \n\nces. \n\n# If you are not sure, do not move the vehi- cle. Contact a qualified specialist work- shop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. \n\nRequirements:  R The new wheel has been installed \n\n(/ page 264). \n\n# Vehicles with ultrawide-base tires: first install the adapter for the more narrow spare wheel on the wheel hub. \n\n# Slide the wheel which is to be re-install onto the wheel hub or the adapter for the spare wheel and push it on. \n\nVehicles with steel wheels # Use the short wheel bolts intended for the \n\nsteel spare wheel, which are found in the vehi- cle tool kit. \n\n# Screw in the wheel bolts until they are finger- \n\ntight. \n\nVehicles with light alloy wheels # Use the long wheel bolts intended for the light- alloy spare wheel, which are found in the vehi- cle tool kit. \n\nObserve the notes on raising the vehicle (/ page 262). \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Oth- erwise, the rods could bend and deform so much that they can no longer be used as pump levers for the jack. Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you mount the spare wheel on the rear axle, do not exceed the maximum speed of 34 mph (55 km/h) and the maximum distance of 62 miles (100 km). Other- wise, the rear axle differential could be damaged due to the different wheel speeds. # Using the pump lever, slowly turn the drain \n\n# Screw in the wheel bolts until they are finger- \n\ntight. \n\nscrew on the jack approximately one revolution and carefully lower the vehicle. \n\n# Place the jack to one side. \n\n266 Wheels and tires \n\n# Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off the \n\n# Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel \n\npump lever. The shortened pump lever serves as a lug wrench extension. \n\n# Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug \n\nwrench extension as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. \n\nholder. \n\n# Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport the malfunctioning rear wheel in the load area. The rear wheel is too large for the spare wheel holder. \n\n# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed \n\nwheel and adjust it if necessary. \n\n# Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the specified tightening torque after the vehicle has been driven 31 miles (50 km). \n\n# When using a wheel or spare wheel with a new or newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel bolts or wheel nuts retightened after approx- imately 620 miles (1,000 km) to 3,100 miles (5,000 km). \n\n% Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. \n\n# Tighten the wheel bolts or nuts evenly in the \n\nMake sure to observe the following further related subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 245) \n\nsequence indicated (1 to 6). Specified tightening torque: R Steel wheel bolts: 177 lb-ft (240 Nm) R Wheel nuts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm) R Alloy wheel bolts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm) # Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in again \n\nand close the pressure release screw. # Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn the jack spindle clockwise as far as it will go. % You can now install the hub caps on steel \n\nwheels with wheel bolts. The installation pro- cedure depends on whether the hub cap acts as a trim that covers the whole wheel, or just covers the center. \n\n# Wheel with wheel trim: position the opening in the wheel trim for the tire valve over the tire valve. \n\n# Push the edge of the hub cap onto the wheel \n\nrim with both hands until it engages into place. Make sure the hub cap retaining catches engage on the steel wheel. \n\n# Wheel with central hub cap: position the retain- ing lugs of the central hub cap over the wheel bolts. \n\nSpare wheel \n\nNotes on the emergency spare wheel and spare wheel \n\nEmergency spare wheel: wheel and/or tire dimen- sions as well as the type of tire are different from the wheel to be replaced. % A label with the limit speed and tire pressure can be found on the emergency spare wheel. Spare wheel: wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type of tire correspond to the other installed wheels. An installed emergency spare wheel or spare wheel changes the driving characteristics and bears risks. \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- \n\nrect wheel and tire dimensions \n\nMounting an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel may severely impair the driving charac- teristics. There is an increased risk of an accident. To prevent hazardous situations: # Check the tire pressure of the spare \n\n# Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on \n\nthe wheel. \n\nwheel or emergency spare wheel once installed and, if necessary, adjust. \n\nWheels and tires 267 \n\n# The emergency spare wheel may only be used temporarily and must be replaced with a standard wheel as soon as possi- ble. \n\n# Never install more than one emergency \n\nspare wheel. \n\nrear axle differential may be damaged by the different wheel speeds. # When the spare wheel is installed on the rear axle, observe the maximum speed of 34 mph (55 km/h) and a maximum driv- ing distance of 62 mi (100 km). \n\n# Adapt your driving style and drive care- fully in emergency spare wheel mode. \n\n# Do not switch off ESP®. # Do not use snow chains on the emer- \n\ngency spare wheel. \n\n# Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. \n\n% It is possible to use the spare wheel without restrictions only on the front axle of a vehicle with Super Single tires. \n\nThe following should be checked regularly, particu- larly prior to long journeys: R that the emergency spare wheel or spare \n\nwheel are firmly secured \n\nR When using an emergency spare wheel or \n\nspare wheel (different from the wheel to be replaced), you must not exceed a permissible top speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). \n\nR the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel (adjust the tire pressure if nec- essary) (/ page 246) \n\nR the fastenings of the emergency spare wheel \n\nR Have the emergency spare wheel or spare \n\nholder or spare wheel holder \n\nwheel replaced by a qualified specialist work- shop (/ page 259). \n\nR The tire pressure of the emergency spare \n\nwheel or spare wheel must be checked before starting a journey and, if necessary, adjusted (/ page 246). \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to dam- aged spare wheel with Super Single tires \n\nReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel. % If you have installed an emergency spare \n\nwheel or a spare wheel, the tire pressure mon- itoring system will not function for this wheel. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel is not equipped with a sensor for the tire pres- sure monitoring system. \n\nVehicles with Super Single tires If you exceed the maximum speed or maximum distance, or re-install the spare wheel, its tire could be undetectably damaged and cause tire pressure loss. You could lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the spare wheel if it has not yet been installed on the rear axle with the current tire. \n\nInstalling and removing the spare wheel \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (Cargo Van or Passenger Van) \n\n# If the spare wheel has been installed on the rear axle, have the tire of the spare wheel replaced after changing the wheel again. \n\n# For safety reasons, when changing a tire ensure that only the tire valve type approved for the tires is used. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the rear axle differential \n\ndue to differing wheel speeds \n\nVehicles with Super Single tires: when you install the spare wheel on the rear axle, the \n\nBolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo Van) \n\n268 Wheels and tires \n\n# Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve \n\n5 on spare wheel carrier 4. \n\n# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump \n\nlever and attach right-hand retaining hook 3. \n\n# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and attach left-hand retaining hook 3. # Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5. # Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts \n\n3 by turning them clockwise. # Replace and engage covers 1. # Close the rear-end doors. \n\n# Open the rear-end doors. # Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and then \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (vehicle with lowered chassis) \n\npry off covers 1. \n\n# Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit, unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clock- wise by approximately 20 turns. \n\n# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand retaining hook 3. \n\n# Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4. \n\n# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump \n\nlever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 3. \n\n# Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the \n\nground. \n\n# Lift spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the \n\nBolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo Van) \n\npump lever out of the sleeve. \n\n# Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel \n\nbeyond the rear edge of spare wheel carrier 4. \n\n# Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (Cargo Van or Passenger Van) # Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. \n\n# Open the rear-end doors. # Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and then \n\npry off covers 1. \n\nWheels and tires 269 \n\n# Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit, unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clock- wise by approximately 20 turns. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (chassis) \n\n# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand retaining hook 3. \n\n# Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4. \n\n# Raise the spare wheel carrier with the pump \n\nlever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 3. \n\n# Prepare the jack. # Place the jack beneath the corresponding jack \n\nsupport point. \n\n# Move the pump lever up and down until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.18 in (3 cm) off the ground. \n\n# Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. \n\n# Loosen wing nuts 3 manually and then \n\nremove them. \n\n# Loosen nuts 2 as far as the thread end. # Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand retaining hook 1. \n\n# Install the spare wheel on the vehicle. # Lower the vehicle. \n\n# Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (vehicle with lowered chassis) % In the event of a flat tire, you may store the defective wheel inside the vehicle only. An intact wheel may be stored in the spare wheel carrier only when the vehicle is unladen. A laden vehicle must first be raised. \n\n# Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. \n\n# Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve \n\n5 on spare wheel carrier 4. \n\n# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump \n\nlever and unhook right-hand retaining hook 1. \n\n# Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the \n\nground. \n\n# Lift spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the \n\npump lever out of the sleeve. \n\n# Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel \n\nbeyond the rear edge of the spare wheel car- rier. \n\n# Carefully remove the spare wheel from the \n\nspare wheel carrier. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. \n\n# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump \n\nlever and attach right-hand retaining hook 3. \n\n# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and attach left-hand retaining hook 3. # Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5. # Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts \n\n3 by turning them clockwise. # Replace and engage covers 1. # Close the rear-end doors. \n\nVehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (chassis) # Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto the spare wheel carrier, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. \n\n270 Wheels and tires \n\n# Slide the pump lever for the jack into the \n\nsleeve on spare wheel carrier 4. \n\n# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump \n\nlever and attach right-hand retaining hook 1. \n\n# Slightly raise the spare wheel carrier and attach left-hand retaining hook 1. # Pull the pump lever out of the sleeve. # Tighten nuts 2. # Put wing nuts 3 in place and tighten them. \n\nTechnical data 271 \n\nInformation on the technical data The given data only applies to vehicles with stand- ard equipment. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n# When operating two-way radios in the \n\nvehicle, always connect them to the low- reflection exterior antenna. \n\nOn-board electronics \n\n* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instruc- tions for installation and use \n\nNotes on work on the engine electronics \n\n* NOTES Premature wear through improper \n\nmaintenance \n\nImproper maintenance may cause vehicle com- ponents to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. # Always have work on the engine elec- \n\nThe operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out- put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. \n\ntronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nTwo-way radios \n\n▌Installation notes for two-way radios \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios \n\nIf two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehi- cle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical \n\nand electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nUse Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of after- market radio frequency transmitting equipment) when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equip- ment, use the power supply or antenna connec- tions intended for use with the fittings. Observe the manufacturer's supplements during installa- tion. \n\n▌Mobile telephony transmission output The maximum transmission outputs (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table: \n\nFrequency band and maximum transmission out- put \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to \n\nFrequency band \n\nMaximum transmis- sion output \n\nimproper operation of two-way radios \n\nIf you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an \n\nexterior antenna. \n\nR The exterior antenna is installed incorrectly \n\nShort wave 3 – 54 MHz \n\n4‑m frequency band 74 – 88 MHz \n\n2 ‑m‑ frequency band 144 – 174 MHz \n\n100 W \n\n30 W \n\n50 W \n\nor is not a low-reflection antenna. \n\nThis could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified specialist work- shop. \n\nTrunked radio system/ Tetra 380 – 460 MHz \n\n10 W \n\n272 Technical data \n\nFrequency band \n\nMaximum transmis- sion output \n\nphrase \"Installation clearances\" in the Digital Oper- ator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet, and in the app. \n\n70‑cm frequency band 420 – 450 MHz \n\nTwo-way radio (2G/3G/4G) \n\n35 W \n\n10 W \n\nVehicle identification plate, vehicle identification number (VIN) and engine number \n\nVehicle identification plate \n\nThe following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmission \n\noutput of up to 100  mW \n\nR two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 – 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) \n\nThere are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- lowing frequency bands: R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70‑cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G \n\nRegulatory radio identifications and notes \n\nRegulatory radio identifications of small compo- nents \n\nDepending on the vehicle model, the vehicle identi- fication plate is located on the seat base of the driver's seat or on the B-pillar. % The data is vehicle-specific and can differ from that shown. Always observe the specifications on your vehicle's identification plate. \n\nManufacturer information on wireless vehicle com- ponents can be found under the heading \"Regula- tory radio identification\" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. \n\nRegulatory radio identifications – Indonesia \n\nManufacturer information on wireless vehicle com- ponents for Indonesia can be found under the heading \"Regulatory radio identifications – Indone- sia\" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Information on small components can be found under the heading \"Regulatory radio identifications of small components.\" \n\nInformation on installation clearances \n\nInformation on installation clearances of wireless vehicle components can be found using the key \n\nVehicle identification plate (example: USA, complete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Gross combination mass rating 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code \n\nTechnical data 273 \n\nVehicle identification plate (example: USA, incomplete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Gross combination mass rating 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code \n\nVehicle identification plate (example: Canada, incomplete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Gross combination mass rating 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code \n\nVehicle identification plate (example: Canada, complete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Gross combination mass rating 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code \n\nThe maximum permissible gross vehicle mass is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- pants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front‑ or rear axle). Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or‑ rear axle. The vehicle identification plate may also contain the following data: R Payload R Empty weight R Number of passenger seats \n\nVIN engraved underneath the hood \n\n274 Technical data \n\nEngraved VIN 1 is located underneath the hood. \n\nVIN below the windshield \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the \n\nenvironment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids \n\nIncorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environ- ment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an environ- \n\nmentally responsible manner. \n\nThe VIN is also attached as label on the lower sec- tion of the windshield 2. \n\nEmission Control Information label \n\nOperating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield cleaning agent R Climate control system refrigerants \n\nExample: Emission Control Information label \n\n% The data is vehicle-specific and can differ from \n\nthat shown. \n\nOnly use products which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Damage to the vehicle caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz guarantee or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) \n\nEngine number The engine number is stamped onto the crank- case. You can obtain further information from a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nOperating fluids and capacities \n\nFurther information on approved operating fluids is available at the following locations: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluids at https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com (under specification designation). R At a qualified specialist workshop \n\nNotes on operating fluids \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from operating \n\nfuel \n\nfluids harmful to your health \n\nOperating fluids may be poisonous and harmful to your health. # Observe the text on the original contain- ers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. \n\n# Always store operating fluids sealed in \n\nFuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creating \n\nsparks must be avoided. \n\n# Before refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater, and leave them switched off during refu- eling. \n\ntheir original containers. \n\n# Always keep children away from operat- \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels \n\ning fluids. \n\nFuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. \n\nTechnical data 275 \n\n# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. \n\n# Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel \n\nEven small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. # Only refuel with the recommended fuel. \n\nthe refueling process. \n\nIf you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with \n\nsoap and water. \n\n# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel \n\nEven small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. Never refuel with the following: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by \n\nvolume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 \n\n# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- \n\ntion immediately. Do not induce vomiting. \n\n# Change immediately out of clothing that \n\nhas come into contact with fuel. \n\nR Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal \n\n# Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec- \n\nommended for your vehicle. \n\nFuel \n\n▌Notes on fuel grades on vehicles with a gasoline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\n* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles \n\nwith a gasoline engine. \n\nIf you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise \n\nfuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. \n\n# Contact a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained \n\ncompletely. \n\n% To ensure the longevity and performance of \n\nthe engine, only unleaded regular gasoline may be used. Note that the higher quality premium grade gasoline can be refueled at any time. If you are using drums or canisters to refuel the vehicle, you should filter the fuel before filling. This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel system due to contaminated fuel. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the fuel pump. If there is no identification on the fuel pump, consult a gas station attendant. % For further information, contact a qualified \n\nspecialist workshop or visit http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). \n\n▌Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\nOnly refuel using low-sulfur regular fuel with at least 87 AKI/91 RON. % E10 fuel contains an additive of up to 10% \n\n* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable \n\nadditives \n\nethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You can fuel your vehicle with E10 fuel. \n\nEven small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions. # Only add cleaning additives recommen- ded by Mercedes-Benzto the fuel. \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends using brand-name fuels with additives. \n\n276 Technical data \n\nIn some countries, the available fuel may not con- tain sufficient amounts of additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel should be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios indi- cated on the container. \n\n▌Notes on fuel quality for vehicles with diesel engines \n\nGeneral notes Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture \n\nIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using gasoline in diesel \n\nengines. \n\n# Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel \n\nEven small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Never refuel with the following: R Gasoline R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester (bio-diesel) or \n\nvegetable oil \n\nR Paraffin or kerosene \n\n# Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and \n\ndo not use any additive. \n\nIf you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel, observe the following: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. \n\n* NOTE Malfunctions due to contaminated \n\nfuel \n\nFuel contamination can lead to malfunctions in the fuel system. \n\n# If you are using drums or canisters to refuel the vehicle, you should filter the fuel before filling. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel \n\nIncorrect fuel can lead to engine damage. # Refuel only ULSD or diesel fuel with a sulfur content of maximum 15 ppm. \n\nUsually you will find information about the fuel quality on the fuel dispenser. If there is no identifi- cation on the fuel dispenser, consult a gas station attendant. The fuel quality recommended for your vehicle is found on the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 133). \n\nNotes on low outside temperatures \n\n& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion from \n\nigniting fuel \n\nIf you heat up parts of the fuel system, fuel may leak and ignite. Depending on the type of damage, fuel might not escape until the engine is running. # Never heat fuel system components. # Contact a qualified specialist workshop \n\nto rectify the malfunction. \n\nRefill only with commercially available ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfur content 15 ppm), which fulfills the ASTM D975 standard. The flow properties of diesel fuel may be inade- quate at low outside temperatures due to paraffin separation. % Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separation can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a heated garage, for example. \n\nTo prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved flow characteristics is available in the winter months. You can obtain further information on this at the gas station or from your fuel supplier. Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating sys- tem. This additionally improves the flow character- istics of the diesel fuel by about 14.5°F (8°C). ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without risk of malfunction down to an outside tempera- ture of approximately 14.5°F (-10°C). \n\nTechnical data 277 \n\n* NOTE Damage due to gasoline or paraffin \n\nReserve fuel tank (gasoline engines) \n\nGasoline or paraffin in diesel fuel impairs the lubricity of the diesel fuel. This can result in damage to the diesel injection system, for example. # Do not add any gasoline or paraffin to \n\nGasoline engine \n\nReserve \n\nM274 \n\nApprox. 5 US gal (19 liters) \n\nFuel tank total capacity (diesel engines) \n\ndiesel fuel to improve its flow character- istics. \n\nDiesel engine \n\nTotal capacity \n\nB20 fuels with bio-diesel content \n\nOM642 OM651 \n\nApprox. 25 US gal (93 liters) \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel \n\nContinuous use of fuels with bio-diesel content over 5% (B20 fuels) can lead to fuel filter clog- ging. Deposits may also form on the fuel injec- tor. This may reduce the engine output. Unburned fuel can get into the oil pan. This causes the engine oil level to rise. This can cause engine mechanical damage. Observe the following points to avoid damage and reducing the engine output: # Fill up with fuels with bio-diesel content of 5% (ULSD) or less, whenever possible. \n\n# Regularly check your engine oil level if you use B20 fuels on a regular basis. # Strictly follow the oil change intervals quoted in the instrument cluster and within your Maintenance Booklet. \n\n# Use only engine oils and filters approved \n\nfor use in your vehicle. \n\n# If you do not plan to drive your vehicle for several weeks, completely fill the fuel tank in advance with ULSD fuel. \n\nOM654 \n\nApprox. 21 gal (93 liters) or Approx. 16 gal (71 liters) \n\nReserve fuel tank (diesel engines) \n\nDiesel engine \n\nReserve \n\nOM642 OM651 \n\nApprox. 5 US gal (19 liters) \n\nOM654 \n\nApprox. 3.2 US gal (12 liters) \n\nDEF (vehicles with a diesel engine only) \n\n▌Notes on DEF® Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). DEF® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. \n\nFor more information, consult the gas station staff. The identification of fuels with bio-diesel content (ULSD or B20) must be clear. If the identification is not clear, do not refuel. Do not refuel with any fuels that have not been approved for your vehicle. \n\n▌Tank content and fuel reserve The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. \n\n* NOTE Irritation of skin, eyes and respira- \n\ntory tract by DEF \n\nDEF may be irritating if inhaled, swallowed or if it comes in contact with eyes or skin. When the tank is opened, ammonia vapors may escape. # Do not inhale or swallow DEF. # Avoid contact of DEF with skin, eyes or \n\nclothing. \n\nFuel tank total capacity (gasoline engines) \n\nGasoline engine \n\nTotal capacity \n\n# Keep DEF away from children. # Only fill the DEF tank in well-ventilated \n\nM274 \n\nApprox. 23 US gal (85 liters) \n\nareas. \n\n278 Technical data \n\nIf a person has come into contact with DEF, observe the following points: R If DEF is swallowed, drink plenty of water and seek medical attention immediately. R If DEF has gotten into the eyes, rinse the \n\neyes with water for 15 minutes, also under the eyelids. \n\nR Immediately rinse off DEF from the skin \n\nwith water. \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by additives in DEF \n\nor by diluting DEF \n\nThe DEF exhaust gas aftertreatment system could be destroyed by the following: R Additives in DEF R Diluting DEF \n\n# Only use DEF in accordance with ISO \n\n22241. \n\n# Do not mix additives. # Do not dilute DEF. \n\n* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused \n\nby impurities in DEF \n\nImpurities in DEF result in the following: R Higher emission values R Damage to the catalytic converter R Engine damage R Malfunctions in the DEF exhaust gas after- \n\ntreatment system \n\n# Avoid impurities in DEF. \n\n+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Soiling with DEF DEF residue crystallizes after some time and stain the affected surfaces. # Immediately rinse surfaces that come in contact with DEF when filling with water or remove DEF with a damp cloth and cold water. \n\nExhaust gas aftertreatment The vehicle must be operated with DEF® if the exhaust gas aftertreatment system is to function correctly. If you operate the vehicle without DEF® or with emissions-relevant malfunctions, the legal operat- ing permit is invalidated. The vehicle could be pro- hibited from public road use by an official ordi- nance. It may be improper or punishable in some coun- tries to operate a vehicle that uses no DEF® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this operator's manual. Engine management monitors the exhaust gas aftertreatment components for compliance with emissions laws and regulations. If you attempt to operate the vehicle without DEF®, with diluted DEF® or with a different reducing agent, this will be detected by the engine management. Other emissions-relevant malfunctions, e.g. metering malfunctions or sensor errors, are also detected and logged. The engine management system subsequently pre- vents the engine being restarted after issuing a warning message. Therefore refill DEF® tank regularly during vehicle operation or, at the latest, after receiving the first warning message via the instrument cluster. \n\n▌DEF® consumption and filling quantity \n\nDEF® consumption Like fuel consumption, DEF® consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating condi- tions. DEF® consumption is usually within a range of 0 and 10% of the fuel consumption. If necessary, DEF® must be refilled in accordance with the instructions when the refill message is displayed in the instrument cluster. This may also be necessary between the scheduled maintenance. \n\nTotal capacity of DEF® tank \n\nModel \n\nAll models \n\nTotal capacity \n\n5.8 gal (22 liters ) \n\nIf DEF has already crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold water. \n\nEngine oil \n\nIf you open the DEF® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Do not inhale any ammonia vapors that may be released. Only fill the DEF® tank in well-ventilated areas. \n\n▌Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\nTechnical data 279 \n\nMB-Freigabe or MB-Approval (gasoline engines) \n\nGasoline engines \n\nMB-Freigabe or MB- Approval \n\nM274 \n\n229.51) \n\n1) Recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE  \n\nviscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the  \n\napproved SAE viscosity classes). \n\n* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor- rect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives \n\n# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals. \n\nMB-Freigabe or MB-Approval (diesel engines) \n\nDiesel engines \n\nMB-Freigabe or MB- Approval \n\nOM642 OM651 \n\n228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.521) \n\n# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. # Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the \n\nOM654 \n\n228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52, 229.711) \n\n1) Recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE  \n\nviscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the  \n\nprescribed intervals. \n\napproved SAE viscosity classes). \n\nMercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on engine oil and oil filters: R in the MB Specifications for operating fluids at https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com (under specification designation). R at a qualified specialist workshop \n\n▌Engine oil quality and filling capacity % The containers of the various engine oils are marked with the ACEA (Association of Euro- pean Automotive Manufacturers) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) classifications. Use only approved engine oils that correspond to the MB Specifications for Operating Fluids and the prescribed ACEA and/or API classifi- cations named below. Engine oils of other grades are not permissible and may result in the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The use of other engine oils not approved for diesel engines can damage the diesel particu- late filter (DPF). \n\nTo achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifica- tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis- cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes. % If the engine oils listed in the table are not \n\navailable, you may add a maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of the following engine oils once only: Vehicles with gasoline engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4 Vehicles with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5 \n\nMultigrade engine oils of the prescribed SAE vis- cosity class may be used all year round, taking the outside temperature into account. \n\nViscosity of the engine oil \n\n* NOTE Engine damage due to incorrect SAE \n\nclassification (viscosity) of the engine oil \n\nIf the SAE classification (viscosity) of the engine oil added is not suitable for prolonged low outside temperatures, it may cause engine damage. The temperature readings of the SAE classifi- cation are always based on fresh oil. Engine oil ages when driving as a result of soot and fuel \n\n280 Technical data \n\nresidue. The characteristics of engine oil dete- riorate significantly at low outside tempera- tures. # Use an engine oil of the appropriate SAE classification at low outside tempera- tures. \n\n# Use oil for all-year-round operation. \n\nThe temperature readings of the SAE viscosity class are always based on fresh oil. The tempera- ture characteristics of the engine oil, especially at low outside temperatures, can deteriorate signifi- cantly due to aging during driving. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you change the engine oil before the start of the cold season. Use only an approved engine oil in the pre- scribed SAE viscosity class for this purpose. \n\nWe recommend that you use only engine oil of the same grade and SAE viscosity class as the oil filled at the last oil change. If, in exceptional cases, engine oil of the type in the engine is not available, use another approved mineral or synthetic engine oil. Vehicles with diesel engines: if the grade is not available, you may also refill with engine oils according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The top-up quantity will then be limited to a maximum of 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter). Vehicles with gasoline engines: if the grade is not available, you may refill with engine oils according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4. The top-up quantity will then be limi- ted to a maximum of 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter). You must then have an oil change carried out at the earliest possible opportunity. Engine oils are differentiated according to: R Engine oil brand R Grade (MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval) R SAE viscosity class \n\nThe viscosity indicates the flow characteristics of a fluid. With regard to engine oil, a high viscosity is synonymous with thick liquid and a low viscosity with thin liquid. Depending on the outside temper- atures, select the engine oil according to the SAE viscosity class. The table shows the SAE viscosity class to be used. The low temperature characteris- tics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly dur- ing operation due to aging, soot and fuel accretion, for example. A regular oil change with an approved engine oil in the appropriate SAE viscosity class is therefore strongly recommended. \n\nAdditives \n\nOil change interval The on-board computer automatically shows the date of the next oil change as an event message on the display. Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nEngine oil filling capacity \n\nEngine \n\nM274 \n\nOM642 \n\nOM651 (rear-wheel drive) \n\nCapacity \n\nApprox. 11.1 US qt (10.5 liters) \n\nApprox. 13.2 US qt (12.5 liters) \n\nApprox. 12.2 US qt (11.5 liters) \n\n* NOTE Engine damage due to use of addi- \n\ntives in the engine oil \n\nOM654 \n\nApprox. 10.6 US qt (10.0 liters) \n\nThe use of additional additives in the engine oil can damage the engine. # Do not use any additional additives in the \n\nengine oil. \n\nInformation on oil consumption Depending on the driving style, the vehicle con- sumes a maximum of 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil per 620 miles (1,000 km). \n\nMiscibility of engine oil Mixing oil reduces the benefits of high-quality engine oils. \n\nTechnical data 281 \n\nIn the following cases, oil consumption may also exceed this limit: R The vehicle is new. R You use the vehicle mostly under arduous \n\noperating conditions. \n\nInformation on brake fluid is available at the follow- ing locations: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluids 331.0 at https://operatingfluids.mercedes- benz.com \n\nR You frequently drive at a high engine speed. \n\nR At a qualified specialist workshop \n\nRegular maintenance is a prerequisite for favorable consumption figures. You can assess the oil con- sumption only after a long journey. Check the oil level in the engine regularly, e.g. weekly or every time you refuel. \n\nCoolant \n\n▌Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\nNotes on brake fluid \n\nObserve the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\n& WARNING Risk of an accident due to \n\nvapor pockets forming in the brake system \n\n& WARNING Risk of Fire and injury due to \n\nantifreeze \n\nIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the vehicle to cool down before \n\nThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the \n\nspecified intervals. \n\nrefilling with antifreeze. \n\n# Make sure that antifreeze does not spill \n\nout over the filler neck. \n\n# Before starting the vehicle, thoroughly \n\nclean the components contaminated with antifreeze. \n\n* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- \n\nant \n\n* NOTE Damage to paint, plastic or rubber \n\nby brake fluid \n\n# Only add coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. \n\nThere is a risk of damage to property if brake fluid comes into contact with paint, plastic or rubber. # If paint, plastic or rubber comes into con- tact with brake fluid, rinse with water immediately. \n\nInformation on coolant is available at the following locations: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluids 320.1 at https://operatingfluids.mercedes- benz.com \n\nR At a qualified specialist workshop \n\nObserve the notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care (/ page 222). Have the brake fluid renewed every two years at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. \n\n* NOTE Overheating at high outside temper- \n\natures \n\nIf an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high out- side temperatures. # Always use coolant approved for \n\nMercedes-Benz. \n\n# Observe the instructions in the MB Spec- ifications for operating fluids320.1. \n\n282 Technical data \n\n* NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant \n\n# Do not spill coolant on painted surfaces. \n\n# Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. \n\nHave the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Note the proportion of anti-corrosion agent/anti- freeze in the engine cooling system within the fol- lowing temperature ranges: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down \n\nto approx. -35°F (-37°C)) \n\nR A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down \n\nto -49°F (-45°C)) \n\n* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids \n\n# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- \n\nterFit with other windshield washer fluids. \n\nDo not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may give a false reading. \n\n▌Information on the windshield cleaning agent \n\n▌Coolant filling capacity Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. \n\nRecommended windshield cleaning agent: R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit \n\nCoolant \n\nEngine \n\nM274 \n\nCapacity \n\nApprox. 3.0 gal (11.5 liters) \n\nMixing ratio For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- tion on the anti-freeze container. Mix the washer fluid with windshield cleaning agent all year round. \n\nOM642 \n\nApprox. 2.6 gal (10.0 liters) \n\nFilling capacities \n\nOM651 \n\nApprox. 2.5 gal (9.5 liters) \n\nWindshield washer system \n\nWasher fluid \n\n5.8 qt (5.5 l) \n\nOM654 \n\nRefrigerant \n\nWindshield washer fluid \n\n▌Notes on windshield cleaning agent Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). \n\n& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate \n\n▌Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 274). % Your vehicle's climate control system is filled with the refrigerant R134a. The refrigerant R134a contains fluorinated greenhouse gas. \n\n* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant \n\nWindshield washer concentrate is highly flam- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. \n\nor refrigerant compressor oil \n\nIf the incorrect refrigerant or refrigerant com- pressor oil (PAG oil) is used, this can damage the climate control system. # Use only R‑134a refrigerant and the PAG \n\noil approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. \n\n* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid \n\n# Do not mix the approved PAG oil with \n\nanother PAG oil. \n\nUnsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. \n\nMaintenance work, such as refilling refrigerant or replacing components, may be carried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regu- \n\nTechnical data 283 \n\nlations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Have all work on the climate control system car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. \n\nExample: refrigerant information label 1 Symbols for hazard and service information 2 Refrigerant capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 Refrigerant type \n\nRetrofitting a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is specified in your vehicle docu- ments. You can obtain further information on the trailer hitch at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have a trailer hitch retrofitted at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Only use a trailer hitch which has been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Use only a ball neck that has been approved for your vehicle and for your Sprinter trailer hitch. Notes on the permissible dimensions of the ball neck can also be found on the identification plate of the trailer hitch. The maximum permissible towing capacity for unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg). \n\nTrailer loads \n\nSymbols 1 advise you of the following: R Potential dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a \n\nqualified specialist workshop \n\nThe permissible weights and loads can also be obtained from the following sources of information: R Vehicle documents R The type plates of the trailer hitch, trailer and \n\nvehicle \n\nVehicle data \n\nVehicle dimensions \n\nThe following section contains important technical data for your vehicle. Your vehicle documents con- tain further vehicle-specific and equipment- dependent technical data such as vehicle dimen- sions and weights. \n\nThe values approved by the manufacturer can be found in the following table. If the figures differ, the lowest figure applies. Use a calibrated weighing machine to check that the weight restrictions have been complied with before you start your journey. \n\nTrailer hitch \n\nNotes on the trailer hitch \n\n& WARNING Risk of accident due to imper- missible attachment of a trailer tow hitch \n\nIf you install a trailer tow hitch or other compo- nents, the longitudinal frame member is weak- ened and can break. The trailer may become detached from the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only retrofit a trailer tow hitch if permissible. \n\nObserve the notes on trailer operation (/ page 170). \n\n284 Technical data \n\nMaximum permissible weights and loads Vehicle type, gross vehicle mass and unladen mass \n\nVehicle model \n\nPermissible gross vehicle mass GVWR \n\nPermissible unladen mass7) \n\n1500 \n\n8550 lbs (3.878 t) \n\n6950 lbs (3.152 t) (gasoline only) \n\n2500 \n\n8550 lbs (3.878 t) \n\n7400 lbs (3.357 t) (diesel only) \n\n9050 lbs (4.105 t) \n\n6450 lbs (2.926 t) (gasoline only) \n\n7400 lbs (3.357 t) (diesel only) \n\n9480 lbs (4.300 t) \n\n7400 lbs (3.357 t) (diesel only) \n\n3500 \n\n9900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only) \n\n7400 lbs (3.357 t) \n\n9989 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only) \n\n3500 XD \n\n11030 lbs (5.003 t) \n\n10470 lbs (4.749 t) \n\n4500 \n\n12125 lbs (5.500 t) \n\n9375 lbs (4.252 t) \n\n7) Maximum permissible unladen mass of a vehicle in ready-to-drive condition without driver or vehicle occupants, including all fluids and their reservoirs when filled up to 100 %. \n\nFront axle load, rear axle load, gross mass of vehicle combination (series, optional) Vehicle types 1500 and 2500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 8,550 lbs (3.878 t), 9050 lbs (4.105 t) and 9480 lbs (4.300 t) \n\nPermissible front axle load GAWR (FA) \n\nPermissible rear axle load GAWR (RA) \n\n4100 lbs (1.860 t) 5) \n\n5360 lbs (2.431 t) \n\n4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1) \n\nVehicle type 3500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 9900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only) and 9989 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only) \n\nPermissible front axle load GAWR (FA) \n\nPermissible rear axle load GAWR (RA) \n\n4080 lbs (1.851 t) 5) \n\n7060 lbs (3.202 t) \n\n4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1) \n\nTechnical data 285 \n\nVehicle type 3500 XD with a max. permissible gross mass of 11,030 lbs (5.003 t) \n\nPermissible front axle load GAWR (FA) \n\nPermissible rear axle load GAWR (RA) \n\n4080 lbs (1.851 t) 5) \n\n7720 lbs (3.502 t) \n\n4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1) \n\nVehicle type 4500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 12,125 lbs (5.500 t) \n\nPermissible front axle load GAWR (FA) \n\nPermissible rear axle load GAWR (RA) \n\n4630 lbs (2.100 t) \n\n7935 lbs (3.599 t) \n\n1) Front axle with increased load capacity. 5) Not in combination with all-wheel drive (AWD) and not in combination with vehicle model desig- nation 907.745 (combination vehicles with a vehi- cle length of 290 inch (7367 mm)) \n\nGross mass of vehicle combination, trailer load, tongue weight Vehicle types 1500 and 2500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 8550 lbs (3.878 t) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n13,550 lbs (6.146 t) \n\n5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2) \n\n500 lbs (0.227 t) 2) \n\nVehicle type 2500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 9050 lbs (4.105 t) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n13,930 lbs (6.319 t) \n\n5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2) \n\n500 lbs (0.227 t) 2) \n\nVehicle type 2500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 9480 lbs (4.300 t) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n9480 lbs (4.300 t) \n\n– \n\n– \n\n286 Technical data \n\nVehicle type 3500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 9900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n14,900 lbs (6.759 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\n15,250 lbs (6.917 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\nVehicle type 3500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 9990 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n14,990 lbs (6.799 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\n15,250 lbs (6.917 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\nVehicle type 3500 XD with a max. permissible gross mass of 11,030 lbs (5.003 t) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n15,250 lbs (6.917 t) 4) \n\n5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\noptional: 7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\noptional: 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehi- cle model designation 907.657 8) \n\nTechnical data 287 \n\nVehicle type 4500 with a max. permissible gross mass of 12,125 lbs (5.500 t) \n\nPermissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9) \n\nPermissible trailer load GTW, braked 6) \n\nPermissible tongue weight TWR \n\n15,250 lbs (6.917 t) 4) \n\n5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) \n\n500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\noptional: 7500 lbs (3.400 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) \n\noptional: 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehi- cle model designation 907.657 8) \n\n2) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- city 5004 lbs (2.270 t). 3) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- city 7500 lbs (3.400 t). 4) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- city 5004 lbs (2.270 t) or 7500 lbs (3.400 t). 6) In trailer operation, do not exceed any individual maximum permissible gross mass of those speci- fied in the table. 8) The vehicle length for vehicles with the vehicle model designation 907.657 (Cargo Van) is 290 in (7367 mm). 9) It is not possible to tow a trailer on vehicles which have not been equipped with a trailer cou- pling as standard. In this case, the maximum per- missible gross vehicle weight corresponds to the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle combination. % If the trailer coupling is retrofitted, adapt the \n\ntype plates accordingly with the altered, maxi- mum permissible weights. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have any further questions. \n\nCargo tie-down points and carrier systems \n\nLoading capacity of the cargo tie-down points and cargo tie-down points \n\n* NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum loading capacity of the cargo tie-down points is exceeded \n\nDuring maximum full-stop braking, for example, forces act that can multiply the weight force of the load. # If various cargo tie-down points are com- bined to secure a load, always take the maximum loading capacity of the weak- est cargo tie-down point into account. # Always use several cargo tie-down points to distribute and spread the load. Distrib- ute the load on the cargo tie-down points evenly. \n\nNominal tensile force is the maximum permissible tensile load. Further information on the cargo tie-down points and cargo tie-down rings can be obtained in the \"Transporting\" section (/ page 209). \n\nCargo tie-down rings \n\nNominal tensile load of cargo tie-down rings \n\nCargo tie-down rings \n\nNominal tensile load \n\nPassenger van \n\n786.5 lbf (350 daN) \n\nCargo van \n\n1798.5 lbf (800 daN) \n\nThe body builder label is found on the front-end module above the radiator and contains the maxi- mum permissible curb weight for the vehicles. \n\n288 Technical data \n\nLoading rails \n\nNominal tensile load of cargo tie-down point in the cargo compartment \n\nCargo tie-down point \n\nLoading rails on cargo floor \n\nLower loading rail on side wall \n\nUpper loading rail on side wall \n\nNominal tensile load \n\n1124.0 lbf (500 daN) \n\n449.6 lbf (200 daN) \n\n281.0 lbf (125 daN) \n\n* NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum permissible roof load is exceeded \n\nIf the weight of the roof luggage, including the roof rack, exceeds the maximum permissible roof load, there will be a risk of an accident. # Ensure that the weight of the roof lug- \n\ngage and roof rack does not exceed the maximum permissible roof load. \n\n# The roof rack supports must be arranged at an even distance from each other. # Mercedes-Benz advises you to install a stabilizer on the vehicle's front axle. \n\nThe values specified apply only to loads resting on the cargo floor under the following circumstances: Conditions: R The load is secured to two cargo tie-down \n\nFurther information about safety measures can be found in the \"Transport\" section (/ page 209). \n\nMax. roof load/pairs of roof rack supports \n\npoints on the rail \n\nVehicles with \n\nR the distance to the nearest load-securing point on the same rail is approximately 3 ft (1 m) \n\nMaximum  roof load \n\nMinimum  number of  pairs of sup- ports \n\nInformation about roof luggage racks \n\nRoof \n\n661 lbs (300 kg) \n\n6 \n\n& WARNING Risk of injury if maximum roof \n\nload is exceeded \n\nThe vehicle center of gravity and the usual driv- ing characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics will change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the han- dling as well as steering and braking character- istics are severely affected. # Always comply with the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. \n\nHigh roof \n\n331 lbs (150 kg) \n\n3 \n\nThis information applies if the load is distributed evenly across the entire roof area. If the roof luggage rack is shorter, reduce the load proportionately. The maximum load per pair of roof rack supports is 110 lbs (50 kg). The loading guidelines and other information about load distribution and load securing can be found in the \"Transport\" section (/ page 209). \n\n& WARNING Danger of accident due to \n\nuneven loading \n\nThe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking characteristics, may be greatly impaired. # Load the vehicle evenly. # Secure the load against sliding. \n\nThe driving, braking and steering characteristics of the vehicle will change with the type of load, the weight and the center of gravity of the load. \n\nDisplay messages and warning and indicator lamps 289 \n\nDisplay messages \n\nIntroduction \n\n▌Function of display messages Display messages appear on the instrument clus- ter. The display messages with graphic displays can be displayed in simplified format in the Operator's Manual and may deviate from the display on the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster shows high-priority display messages in red. In addition, a warning tone sounds for specific display mes- sages. Act in accordance with the display messages and comply with the additional instructions in this Operator's Manual. In addition, symbols are shown for some display messages: ¤ Further information O Hide display messages \n\nYou can use the left-hand Touch Control to select between the symbols by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ¤ displays further information on the instrument cluster. Pressing O hides the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the ¤ button or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages are saved in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. You cannot hide high-priority display messages. The instrument cluster will show these display messages until their causes have been rectified. \n\n▌Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service  5 1 Message \n\nIf there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the instrument cluster display. # Browse through the display messages by swip- ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. \n\n# To exit the message memory: press the % \n\nbutton. \n\n290 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps \n\nSafety systems \n\nDisplay messages \n\nPossible causes/consequences and M Solutions ","unique":0,"loc":1,"id":"sec_76f277dd-8730-4376-a281-2b195c8930f4","sumid":"sum_b977530e-7227-49e2-900d-b2c68de38734"}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/test/test-index-of-generator.js b/test/test-index-of-generator.js
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..700746c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/test/test-index-of-generator.js
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+const tap = require('tap');
+const { indexOfGenerator } = require('../utils/index-of-generator');
+
+function promisifyGenerator(generator){
+    return (...args) => {
+        const gen = generator(...args);
+
+        function handleNext(resolvedValue){
+            if(resolvedValue.done){
+                return Promise.resolve(resolvedValue.value);
+            }
+            return Promise.resolve(gen.next(resolvedValue.value)).then(handleNext);
+        }
+    
+    
+        return Promise.resolve(gen.next())
+            .then((resolvedValue) => handleNext(resolvedValue), (error) => Promise.reject(gen.throw(error)));
+    }
+}
+
+const asyncIndexOf = promisifyGenerator(indexOfGenerator);
+
+const stringAsArray = ['s', 'o', 'm', 'e'];
+const text = stringAsArray.join('');
+
+tap.test('should return -1 if not found due to initialIndex', async () => {
+    const index = await asyncIndexOf(text, 's', 1);
+    const syncIndexOf = text.indexOf('s', 1);
+    tap.equal(index, syncIndexOf);
+})
+
+tap.test('should return proper index', async () => {
+    const index = await asyncIndexOf(text, 'e');
+    const syncIndexOf = text.indexOf('e');
+    tap.equal(index, syncIndexOf);
+})
+
+tap.test('should return proper test with initialIndex', async () => {
+    const index = await asyncIndexOf(text, 'e', 2);
+    const syncIndexOf = text.indexOf('e', 2);
+    tap.equal(index, syncIndexOf);    
+})
+
+tap.test('should return correct indexOf if initialIndex is same', async () => {
+    const index = await asyncIndexOf(text, 'e', 3);
+    const syncIndexOf = text.indexOf('e', 3);
+    tap.equal(index, syncIndexOf);    
+})
+
+tap.test('should return -1 if not found', async () => {
+    const index = await asyncIndexOf(text, 'x');
+    const syncIndexOf = text.indexOf('x');
+    tap.equal(index, syncIndexOf);        
+})
diff --git a/test/test-parse-big-escaped-string.js b/test/test-parse-big-escaped-string.js
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ec4666
--- /dev/null
+++ b/test/test-parse-big-escaped-string.js
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+'use strict';
+
+const yj = require('../index');
+const tap = require('tap');
+const { readFileSync } = require('fs');
+const str = readFileSync('./test/big-json-with-string.txt');
+const nodeJSNativeParse = JSON.parse(str);
+
+// Make sure the API works well without the optional parameters.
+yj.parseAsync(str, (err, obj) => {
+  if (!err)
+    tap.equal(obj.text, nodeJSNativeParse.text, 'Failed to parse big string message - omitting logs', { diagnostic: false });
+  else
+    tap.fail(err);
+});
diff --git a/utils/index-of-generator.js b/utils/index-of-generator.js
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a0af3fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/utils/index-of-generator.js
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//write more performant option for indexOf
+//if more than 50k characters, use BHM Algorithm
+//consider a big string to be 10k characters
+const MAX_STRING_SIZE = 10000;
+
+module.exports.indexOfGenerator = function* indexOfGenerator(stringInput, searchInput, initialIndex = 0) {
+  if (!stringInput || !stringInput.length) {
+    return -1;
+  }
+  stringInput = stringInput.slice(initialIndex);
+  let innerAt = 0;
+  let index = -1;
+  while (true) {
+    const at = Math.max(innerAt - 1, 0);
+    yield chunk = stringInput.slice(at, innerAt + MAX_STRING_SIZE);
+    if (!chunk.length) {
+      return index;
+    }
+    const indexOf = chunk.indexOf(searchInput);
+    if (indexOf !== -1) {
+      yield index = indexOf + at + initialIndex;
+      return index;
+    }
+    innerAt += chunk.length + 1;
+  }
+}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/yieldable-parser.js b/yieldable-parser.js
index 2882998..39245f4 100755
--- a/yieldable-parser.js
+++ b/yieldable-parser.js
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@
  *   Multiple authors (IBM Corp.) - initial implementation and documentation
  ***************************************************************************/
 'use strict';
+const { indexOfGenerator } = require('./utils/index-of-generator');
 
 /**
  * This method parses a JSON text to produce an object or array.
@@ -64,14 +65,14 @@ let parseWrapper = (text, reviver, intensity, cb) => {
   };
 
   // Process strings specially.
-  let normalizeUnicodedString = () => {
+  let normalizeUnicodedString = function*() {
     let inQuotes = ' ';
     let tempIndex = at;
     let index = 0;
     let slash = 0;
     let c = '"';
     while (c) {
-      index = parseStr.indexOf('"', tempIndex + 1);
+      index = yield * indexOfGenerator(parseStr, '"', tempIndex + 1);
       tempIndex = index;
       ch = parseStr.charAt(tempIndex - 1);
       while (ch === '\\') {
@@ -88,7 +89,7 @@ let parseWrapper = (text, reviver, intensity, cb) => {
     }
 
     // When parsing string values, look for " and \ characters.
-    index = inQuotes.indexOf('\\');
+    index = yield * indexOfGenerator(inQuotes, '\\');
     while (index >= 0) {
       let escapee = {
         '"': '"',
@@ -124,7 +125,7 @@ let parseWrapper = (text, reviver, intensity, cb) => {
         at = index + 1;
       } else
         break;
-      index = inQuotes.indexOf('\\', at);
+      index = yield * indexOfGenerator(inQuotes, '\\', at);
     }
     at = 0;
     return inQuotes;
@@ -225,7 +226,7 @@ let parseWrapper = (text, reviver, intensity, cb) => {
             return inQuotes;
           } else {
             seek();
-            return normalizeUnicodedString();
+            return yield * normalizeUnicodedString();
           }
         case '0':
         case '1':